HP StoreEver Interface Manager Guide

HP StoreEver Interface Manager and
Command View for Tape Libraries

Version 3.7.00 User Guide
Abstract
This guide provides information about installing the Command View for Tape Libraries (Command View TL) software, and using
the Command View TL graphical user interface (GUI) and Interface Manager command line interface (CLI). This book is intended
for system administrators and IT personnel responsible for operating and maintaining an Enterprise Storage Library (ESL) or
Enterprise Modular Library (EML).
HP Part Number: 344841-026

Published: December 2013
Edition: 24
Copyright 2003, 2013 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.

Confidential computer software. Valid license from HP required for possession, use or copying. Consistent with FAR 12.211 and 12.212, Commercial
Computer Software, Computer Software Documentation, and Technical Data for Commercial Items are licensed to the U.S. Government under
vendor's standard commercial license.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall
not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Acknowledgements
Intel, Itanium, Pentium, Intel Inside, and the Intel Inside logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the
United States and other countries.
Microsoft, Microsoft Excel, Windows, Windows XP, and Windows NT are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Adobe is trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Java is a US trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
Contents
1 Introduction.............................................................................................10
New features in Command View TL 3.7.00................................................................................10
SNIA compliance...................................................................................................................10
User interfaces.......................................................................................................................11
Network configuration overview...............................................................................................11
External features overview........................................................................................................14
2 Command View TL GUI.............................................................................15

Primary management station....................................................................................................15
Prerequisites...........................................................................................................................15
Installing Command View TL....................................................................................................18
Starting Command View TL......................................................................................................21
Testing the Insight Remote Support............................................................................................23
Managing libraries.................................................................................................................24
Navigating Command View TL.................................................................................................25
Device numbering conventions.................................................................................................26
Initial configuration steps.........................................................................................................26
Adding and removing libraries.................................................................................................27
Adding libraries manually...................................................................................................27
Editing a library name........................................................................................................27
Removing libraries.............................................................................................................27
Changing the e-mail settings....................................................................................................28
Configuring e-mail alerts.........................................................................................................29
Managing license keys............................................................................................................31
Adding a license key..........................................................................................................32
Viewing the Management Station.............................................................................................33
Changing the network settings of the management station............................................................33
Changing management station passwords.................................................................................34
Recovering a password...........................................................................................................35
Changing the library settings...................................................................................................35
Changing the network settings of the Interface Manager card......................................................36
RDC Configuration..................................................................................................................37
Verifying connectivity..............................................................................................................37
Getting information about an EML or ESL E-Series library.............................................................38
Viewing the health summary....................................................................................................38
Viewing the physical connections..............................................................................................38
Viewing the status of components.............................................................................................39
Viewing the alert log...............................................................................................................39
Changing the Interface Manager mode.....................................................................................41
Changing the connection properties of the interface controllers.....................................................41
Managing the interface controllers............................................................................................42
Replacing an interface controller..........................................................................................42
Clearing a WWN mismatch...............................................................................................43
Using TapeAssure...................................................................................................................44
Configuring standalone drives for TapeAssure........................................................................45
Configuring MSL libraries for TapeAssure..............................................................................45
Viewing TapeAssure information..........................................................................................45
Viewing the dashboard..................................................................................................46
Viewing the Health tab..............................................................................................46
Viewing the Library tab.............................................................................................48
Library TapeAssure views...............................................................................................51
Usage tabular view.......................................................................................................53
Contents
Empty slots per library...................................................................................................53

Moves per library..........................................................................................................56
Sorting and filtering.......................................................................................................59
Action menu drop down list............................................................................................59
Application bar............................................................................................................59
Viewing drive health......................................................................................................59
Viewing Drive Health and Life.........................................................................................61
Write Health tab......................................................................................................61
Life tab....................................................................................................................62
Viewing drive performance.............................................................................................63
Viewing drive utilization.................................................................................................65
Choosing a sample time................................................................................................66
Viewing drive performance and utilization history..............................................................67
Drive Performance tab...............................................................................................68
Drive Utilization tab..................................................................................................69
Utilization Analysis tab..............................................................................................71
Viewing the Performance Advisor graph...........................................................................74
Viewing the Collection Status..........................................................................................75
Viewing drive performance and utilization graph...............................................................76
Viewing detailed LTO drive information............................................................................77
Using the Tapes Content panel........................................................................................87
Viewing tape health......................................................................................................97
Viewing Tape Health and Life.........................................................................................98
Write Health tab......................................................................................................98
Life tab....................................................................................................................99
Viewing tape utilization................................................................................................100
Viewing the tape utilization and performance history.......................................................101
Tape Capacity tab..................................................................................................101
Tape Unloads tab...................................................................................................102
Tape Performance tab.............................................................................................103
Launching the Newly Added Tapes graph......................................................................105
Searching for a specific tape........................................................................................107
Viewing information about the Cleaning Tapes................................................................107
Exporting Library Data to CSV via TapeAssure................................................................108
Exporting TapeAssure panels as PDF files.......................................................................109
Scheduling a Library Data Export via TapeAssure............................................................112
Analyzing TapeAssure data from CSV files using the TapeAssure Analysis Template.............112
Backing up the TapeAssure database.................................................................................113
Restoring a TapeAssure database file.................................................................................114
Saving or copying a database backup file..........................................................................115
Using data verification..........................................................................................................115
Configuring the libraries to use data verification...................................................................116
Creating the data verification partition................................................................................116
Deleting the data verification partition............................................................................118
Viewing the Data Verification Control Panel.........................................................................118
Starting and stopping the data verification service...........................................................119
Setting the default verification type................................................................................119
Deleting the data verification test logs............................................................................119
Viewing the detailed data verification information for each library..........................................119
Viewing tapes that are present in the data verification partition.........................................121
Viewing tapes that are currently under data verification....................................................122
Viewing tapes that are queued for data verification.........................................................122
Viewing drives that are present in the data verification partition.........................................123
Adding, removing, and changing tapes from the queue...................................................125
Configuring the data verification policy...............................................................................125
4
Contents
Selecting the tapes for verification......................................................................................125

Setting up data verification email notifications.....................................................................126
Disabling data verification email notification...................................................................127
Viewing the test results for Data Verification.........................................................................127
Viewing the drive assessment results...................................................................................129
Working LTO4 and later tape drives........................................................................................130
Adding an LTO4 and later tape drive to a library.................................................................130
Replacing an LTO2 or LTO3 tape drive with an LTO4 or later tape drive..................................131
Changing the connection properties of LTO4 and later tape drives.........................................131
Using SNMP alerts...............................................................................................................132
Adding an SNMP trap......................................................................................................132
Editing an SNMP trap......................................................................................................133
Removing an SNMP trap...................................................................................................133
Saving the configuration of the library.....................................................................................134
Saving the current configuration.........................................................................................134
Restoring a configuration..................................................................................................134
Viewing a saved configuration...........................................................................................135
Rebooting components..........................................................................................................136
Rebooting a single component...........................................................................................136
Rebooting the Interface Manager and all controllers.............................................................136
Rebooting all components that require a reboot...................................................................136
Moving tape cartridges.........................................................................................................136
Updating the firmware with the Firmware Update wizard...........................................................137
Updating the firmware from version I1xx to version I2xx........................................................140
Restoring factory defaults.......................................................................................................141
Restoring factory defaults for one component.......................................................................141
Restoring factory defaults for all components.......................................................................141
Using factory overrides..........................................................................................................142
Disabling factory overrides....................................................................................................143
3 Advanced features in the GUI..................................................................144

Using license keys.................................................................................................................144
Configuring host HBA access with HP Secure Manager.............................................................144
About Access Control Groups (ACG)..................................................................................145
Creating an Access Control Group.....................................................................................145
Editing an Access Control Group.......................................................................................149
Removing an Access Control Group...................................................................................152
Synchronizing host access settings......................................................................................152
Viewing the device map....................................................................................................152
Partitioning a library.............................................................................................................153
Adding a partition...........................................................................................................153
Removing a partition........................................................................................................154
Removing all partitions.....................................................................................................155
Extending a partition........................................................................................................155
Upgrading capacity..............................................................................................................156
Capacity upgrades for ESL E-Series libraries........................................................................156
Capacity upgrades for EML E-Series libraries.......................................................................157
Enabling capacity upgrades..............................................................................................157
Encrypting data with the HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM) or HP Enterprise Secure Key
Manager (ESKM)..................................................................................................................158
Enrolling libraries with the SKM or ESKM............................................................................160
Selecting the SKM or ESKM as the key manager..................................................................160
Un-enrolling SKM or ESKM and reverting to the backup application as the key manager...........162
Changing the login on an SKM or ESKM............................................................................164
Changing the tier information for an SKM or ESKM..............................................................166
Contents
Adding or deleting addresses or hostnames for SKM or ESKM appliances..........................166

Adding a tier to the Key Manager Configuration.............................................................168
Deleting a tier from the Key Manager Configuration........................................................168
Updating certificates or the certificate authority for an SKM or ESKM.....................................168
Changing library partitions after initial SKM or ESKM setup..................................................169
Verifying connectivity from the library to SKM or ESKM.........................................................169
Transferring current HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM) enrollment settings to an HP
Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM)..............................................................................170
Using support tickets.............................................................................................................172
Generating a support ticket...............................................................................................172
Viewing a support ticket....................................................................................................175
Saving a management station log......................................................................................176
Saving a support ticket.....................................................................................................177
Sending a support ticket by e-mail.....................................................................................177
Removing a support ticket.................................................................................................179
4 Command View TL CLI............................................................................180

Accessing the CLI.................................................................................................................180
Starting a serial session....................................................................................................180
Starting a Telnet session....................................................................................................181
Telnetting through the LAN...........................................................................................181
Telnetting through the cascade port...............................................................................181
Command syntax structure.....................................................................................................182
Using command sequences...............................................................................................182
Abbreviating commands...................................................................................................183
Device numbering conventions...........................................................................................183
Navigating the CLI...........................................................................................................184
Interface Manager mode.......................................................................................................184
Common CLI functions...........................................................................................................185
Configuring a library........................................................................................................185
Configuring the FC interface controllers..............................................................................185
Monitoring device status...................................................................................................186
Updating the firmware with the CLI.....................................................................................186
Generating support tickets with the CLI...............................................................................187
Using HP Secure Manager functions...................................................................................188
Accessing Basic Secure Manager through the CLI............................................................188
5 CLI Command Reference.........................................................................190

clear station.........................................................................................................................191
create host...........................................................................................................................191
download drive....................................................................................................................192
download interface...............................................................................................................193
download library..................................................................................................................194
download mgmt...................................................................................................................194
map host.............................................................................................................................195
move media.........................................................................................................................196
reboot interface....................................................................................................................196
reboot library.......................................................................................................................197
reboot mgmt........................................................................................................................197
remove host.........................................................................................................................197
replace interface..................................................................................................................198
restore interface defaults........................................................................................................199
restore system config.............................................................................................................200
restore system defaults...........................................................................................................201
save drive lttsupportticket.......................................................................................................202
save interface lttsupportticket..................................................................................................202
6
Contents
save library lttsupportticket.....................................................................................................202

save ltt................................................................................................................................203
save mgmt lttsupportticket......................................................................................................203
save system config................................................................................................................204
set drive hostport mode.........................................................................................................204
set drive hostport speed.........................................................................................................205
set host name.......................................................................................................................205
set inet ftp...........................................................................................................................206
set inet telnet........................................................................................................................206
set interface beacon..............................................................................................................206
set interface clearwwnmismatch..............................................................................................207
set interface hostport alpa......................................................................................................207
set interface hostport connection.............................................................................................208
set interface hostport mode....................................................................................................208
set interface hostport speed....................................................................................................208
set mgmt clock.....................................................................................................................209
set mgmt ntp........................................................................................................................210
set mgmt password...............................................................................................................210
set mgmt timezone................................................................................................................210
set mgmt wwnstate...............................................................................................................211
set mode.............................................................................................................................212
set net v6 dhcpv6.................................................................................................................212
set net v6 ipaddress..............................................................................................................212
set net v6 ipversion...............................................................................................................213
set net v6 manual.................................................................................................................214
set net v6 stateless................................................................................................................214
set network config ................................................................................................................215
set network dhcp..................................................................................................................216
set network ipaddress............................................................................................................216
set network snmpcommunity...................................................................................................216
set network snmptrap............................................................................................................217
set ssh hostkeys....................................................................................................................218
set supportticket disable.........................................................................................................218
set supportticket enable.........................................................................................................218
set system contact assetnumber...............................................................................................219
set system contact email.........................................................................................................219
set system contact location.....................................................................................................219
set system contact name........................................................................................................219
set system contact pager........................................................................................................220
set system contact phone.......................................................................................................220
set system name...................................................................................................................220
show drive access.................................................................................................................221
show drive hostport...............................................................................................................221
show drive info.....................................................................................................................222
show drive interface..............................................................................................................222
show drive productid.............................................................................................................223
show drive revision...............................................................................................................223
show drive serialnumber........................................................................................................224
show drive status..................................................................................................................224
show drive type....................................................................................................................225
show firmware available........................................................................................................225
show firmware revisions.........................................................................................................226
show host access..................................................................................................................226
show host info......................................................................................................................227
show host name...................................................................................................................227
Contents
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
8
host sparselunmap........................................................................................................227
inet.............................................................................................................................227
interface access...........................................................................................................228
interface beacon..........................................................................................................228
interface hostport alpa..................................................................................................229
interface hostport connection.........................................................................................229
interface hostport mode.................................................................................................229
interface hostport sid....................................................................................................230
interface hostport speed................................................................................................230
interface info...............................................................................................................231
interface name.............................................................................................................233
interface revision..........................................................................................................233
interface status.............................................................................................................233
interface wwninfo.........................................................................................................234
library access..............................................................................................................234
library info..................................................................................................................234
library interface...........................................................................................................235
library name................................................................................................................235
library productid..........................................................................................................235
library revision.............................................................................................................236
library sensors.............................................................................................................236
library serialnumber......................................................................................................237
library status................................................................................................................237
library topology...........................................................................................................237
license........................................................................................................................238
media.........................................................................................................................238
mgmt clock..................................................................................................................239
mgmt info....................................................................................................................239
mgmt log detail............................................................................................................239
mgmt log event............................................................................................................240
mgmt revision..............................................................................................................240
mgmt status.................................................................................................................240
mgmt timezone............................................................................................................240
mgmt wwnstate............................................................................................................241
mode..........................................................................................................................241
network info................................................................................................................241
network dhcp...............................................................................................................242
network ipaddress........................................................................................................242
network snmpcommunity...............................................................................................242
partition......................................................................................................................243
robotics status..............................................................................................................243
ssh hostkeys.................................................................................................................243
station.........................................................................................................................244
supportticket cache.......................................................................................................244
supportticket policy.......................................................................................................244
supportticket statistics....................................................................................................245
system contact assetnumber...........................................................................................245
system contact email.....................................................................................................245
system contact location..................................................................................................245
system contact name.....................................................................................................246
system contact pager....................................................................................................246
system contact phone....................................................................................................246
system info..................................................................................................................246
system name................................................................................................................247
system status................................................................................................................247
Contents
synch secmgr.......................................................................................................................247
unmap host..........................................................................................................................247
6 Troubleshooting......................................................................................249
LED diagnostic codes............................................................................................................249
Common issues....................................................................................................................249
ESL9000 Series issues......................................................................................................250
ESL E-Series issues............................................................................................................252
EML E-Series issues...........................................................................................................254
ESL G3 issues..................................................................................................................256
MSL issues......................................................................................................................256
ESKM enrollment issues....................................................................................................256
7 Support and other resources....................................................................259

Contacting HP......................................................................................................................259
Related information...............................................................................................................259
Related documentation.....................................................................................................259
HP websites....................................................................................................................259
HP tape cartridges......................................................................................................260
Product warranties.......................................................................................................260
Subscription services....................................................................................................260
Typographic conventions.......................................................................................................260
Updated regulatory compliance and recycling notices...............................................................261
A ALPA matrix...........................................................................................262
B New features in previous versions of Command View TL..............................263
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
New
features in Command View TL 3.6.00..............................................................................263

features in Command View TL 3.5.00..............................................................................263
features in Command View TL 3.1.00 and Interface Manager firmware version I274..............264
features in Command View TL 3.0.1 and Interface Manager firmware version I273................264
features in Command View TL 3.0 and Interface Manager firmware version I272..................264
features in Command View TL 2.8...................................................................................265
features in Command View TL 2.3.0.1 and 2.3.02.............................................................266
Index.......................................................................................................269
Contents
1 Introduction
The HP StorageWorks Interface Manager for tape libraries is a management card designed to
consolidate and simplify the management of HP StorageWorks ESL9000 Series,1 ESL E-Series,
and EML E-Series tape libraries. The Interface Manager card provides the following features:
Simple, unified, graphical setup and configuration of Fibre Channel (FC) interface controllers.
Remote management of FC interface controllers via a Web-based GUI or command line

interface.
SAN-related diagnostics for key library components, such as interface controllers, drives, and
robotics.
Additional advanced SAN security and management features are available via licensing.
These features improve security, performance, reliability, and ease of control.
New features in Command View TL 3.7.00
Administrator can manually select tapes in a separate media verification partition without
interfering with host applications.
Configurable policies permit periodic scans based on a user-chosen time interval.
Support for Data verification and Drive Assessment in ESL G3 libraries for LTO5 and LTO6
drives and corresponding supported tapes.
Manage media verification, configuration, and usage though CVTL while ensuring data is
secure.
Licensing enforcement and management for data verification license for ESL G3 libraries.
MSL6480 license management via CVTL.
User notifications of degraded tapes.
Reports of data verification and drive assessment results.
Library TapeAssure enhancements including the Library Dashboard with Library TapeAssure
graphs.
Support Remote Data Collection (RDC) for ESL G3, MSL6480, and MSL G3 libraries. SMI-S
will implement the TapeAssure profile which can be collected by IRS RDC, and you can
configure collection days for the RDC from the CVTL interface.
SNIA compliance
The Storage Management Initiative (SMI) was created by the Storage Networking Industry
Association (SNIA) to develop and standardize interoperable storage management technologies
and aggressively promote them to the storage, networking, and end user communities.
For more information about SNIA and the SMI, see the following website: http://www.snia.org/
smi/home.
The HP StoreEver Command View TL Provider follows the Storage Management Initiative
Specification (SMI-S) and provides an interface for SMI-S compliant applications to manage HP
StoreEver tape libraries. See the HP StoreEver Command View for Tape Libraries Software SMI-S
Provider installation instructions at http://www.hp.com/support/cvtl for installation instructions.
1. ESL9000 libraries can be added, selected, and managed from the Command View TL 2.0 Launcher, but new features
in versions 2.0 and newer are not available on ESL9000.
10
Introduction
NOTE: If installing Command View TL on the same management station as Command View EVA
v10.2, special steps must be taken. For full instructions, see the HP StoreEver Command View for
Tape Libraries Software SMI-S Provider installation instructions at http://www.hp.com/support/
cvtl.
User interfaces
Four different user interfaces (UIs) can be used to control the Interface Manager card. These UIs
are provided by the Interface Manager card or by Command View TL. This chapter explains the
purpose and use of each UI. The UIs are as follows:
NOTE:
The Interface Manager card is only used with EML and ESL E-Series tape libraries.
SerialUses a command line interface (CLI) and connects directly to the Interface Manager
card through an RS232 serial interface rather than through the LAN.
TelnetUses the same CLI as the serial interface, but requires the IP address of the Interface
Manager card to initiate the session. This IP address can be set through the Interface Manager
card serial interface or cascade port or, on ESL E-Series libraries, through the library Operator
Control Panel (OCP). The advantage of using Telnet over the serial interface is that users can
Telnet from any client machine that is on the LAN; a separate serial connection is not needed.
You can disable Telnet (see set inet telnet (page 206)).
NOTE: If you use Telnet to change the IP address of the Interface Manager card or library,
you must log in to a new Telnet session with the new IP address.
SSHThis protocol uses the same CLI as the Telnet and serial interfaces, but over a more
secure channel. Different SSH client applications are available for various operating systems.
When connected via SSH, use it in the exact way you would use Telnet.
Command View TLIs a browser-based graphical user interface (GUI). This is the preferred
UI for controlling the Interface Manager card because it provides the most functionality and
should be used in most circumstances. From any client on the LAN, you can use a browser to
access Command View TL, which is hosted on a management station. For more information
on using Command View TL, see Command View TL GUI (page 15).
You can have multiple sessions open at the same time (serial, Telnet, SSH, or Command View TL).
If a write operation is in progress in one session, subsequent write operations for that library from
other sessions will be denied.
Network configuration overview

With the EML E-Series tape library, the external LAN communicates directly to the Interface Manager
card using the card's network IP address. The Interface Manager card processes requests and
relays information to the FC interface controllers.
ESL E-Series libraries contain a private LAN internal to the library. The library cabinet controller
provides a bridge between the external LAN and the library internal LAN and Interface Manager
card.
ESL E-Series and EML E-Series tape libraries with LTO4 or later tape drives also contain an internal
network switch to connect the LTO4 and later tape drives to the Interface Manager or library
internal LAN.
(page 12) and (page 13) show how the different UIs communicate with the Interface Manager
card in the various libraries.
User interfaces
11
Figure 1 Network configuration for ESL E-Series tape libraries
12
1. SDLT, LTO1, LTO2, or LTO3 tape drives
2. Robot
3. FC interface controllers
4. Interface Manager card
5. Internal network
6. External network
7. Management station with Command View TL
8. Remote web browser connected to management station

via HTTP
9. Telnet connection
10. Library Cabinet Controller
11. Serial CLI via RS-232 connection
12. Library boundary
13. LTO4 or later tape drives
14. Internal network switch (LTO4 or later libraries only)
Introduction
Figure 2 Network configuration for EML E-Series tape libraries
1. Hosts
2. FC switch
3. FC interface controllers (up to four)
4. Interface Manager card
5. LTO2 and LTO3 tape drives
6. Library robotics controller
7. Robot
8. Operator control panel
9. Serial connection
10. Telnet connection
11. Management station
12. Library boundary
13. LTO4 and later tape drives
14. Internal network switch (LTO4 and LTO5 libraries only)
Network configuration overview
13
External features overview

You can have either of the following Interface Manager cards. The two cards are functionally
equivalent if the 342213-001 or 393531-001 has a 256 MByte RAM. If a 128 MByte RAM is
installed the TapeAssure features will be disabled.
NOTE: Interface Manager firmware version I272 and later requires 256MB RAM on the Interface
Manager board to maintain a consistent connection with Command View TL.
Figure 3 Interface Manager card faceplate342213001 or 393531001
1. Cascade in back-end Ethernet port
2. Private Ethernet ports to FC interface controllers
3. Front-end Ethernet port (to LAN)
4. Serial port
5. Auxiliary RJ-11 serial connector or USB port (not used)
6. Board status LEDs
7. Reset button
8. Green link speed LED
9. Green link activity LED
Figure 4 Interface Manager card faceplate480240-001
1. Cascade in back-end Ethernet port
2. Private Ethernet ports to FC interface controllers
3. Front-end Ethernet port (to LAN)
4. Serial port
5. Auxiliary RJ-11 serial connector or USB port (not used)
6. Board status LEDs
7. Reset button
8. Green link speed LED
9. Green link activity LED
NOTE:
14
Introduction
For an explanation of the various LED states, see Troubleshooting (page 249).
2 Command View TL GUI

HP StoreEver Command View TL software provides a browser-based GUI for remote management
and monitoring of your Interface Manager card through a LAN. Command View TL is the preferred
user interface for controlling the Interface Manager card because it provides the most functionality.
In conjunction with the Interface Manager card, Command View TL provides the following:
Configuration and management of the Interface Manager card and FC interface controllers
Management of the entire library system
Hardware inventory and identity information
Status information for connected hardware
Error reporting and comprehensive error logs
Firmware management
License management
Access to TapeAssure.
IMPORTANT: While Command View TL is not required to manage ESL G3 and MSL6480 libraries,
it is required for TapeAssure functionality. Command View TL can list ESL G3 and MSL6480 in
the launcher panel, show the status of the library, and launch the ESL G3 and MSL6480 GUI to
a separate browser. Other ESL G3 and MSL6480 features are managed directly through the library
GUI. For more information on ESL G3 tape libraries, see HP Enterprise Systems Libraries (ESL) G3
Tape Library User Guide available from http://www.hp.com/support/eslg3.
Command View TL is installed on the management station and communicates with the Interface
Manager card through the LAN. The management station processes information from the Interface
Manager card and hosts the Command View TL GUI. You can access Command View TL, either
from the management station directly or through any client on the LAN, by using a browser-based
GUI interface. Multiple Command View TL GUI clients can be open simultaneously across the LAN,
and multiple libraries can be managed through the Command View TL software.
NOTE: Prior to version 1.5, Command View for Tape Libraries software was called Command
View ESL.
Primary management station

The primary management station is the first management station to manage a library. The primary
management station is the only management station that collects and stores TapeAssure data. For
best performance, the primary management station should be in the same physical location and
on the same IP subnet as the libraries it manages.
Prerequisites
Management station minimum system
For environments with fewer than 10 tape libraries, Command View TL requires a management
station (server) with a minimum of:
1.6-GHz CPU, 2-GB RAM
2 GB of free disk space for installation
10/100 Base-T network card (static IP address recommended)
Command View TL 3.7.00 installation support matrix:
Primary management station
15
NOTE: Command View TL software is only fully compatible with English-language versions
of Windows.
Command View TL Operating System
3.7.00
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP2 (32/64 bit)
Yes
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 SP2 (32/64 bit)
Yes
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 (64 bit)
Yes
Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Datacenter (64 bit)
Yes
NOTE: On the above listed Microsoft Windows Operating Systems (64bit), Command
View TL will run as a 32bit application.
Compatible with VMWare ESX 3.5.00 and 5.1
Management station recommended system

For environments with up to 20 tape libraries:
3.0-GHz CPU or greater, Dual Core, 4-GB RAM

For environments with 20 to 70 tape libraries:
3.0-GHz CPU or greater, Dual Core, 16-GB RAM
For environments with more than 70 tape libraries, or more than 900 tape drives (total), multiple
management stations will be required.
Browser minimum requirements
Microsoft Internet Explorer v8, v9, and v10
Mozilla Firefox v15.0.1 or higher
Google Chrome v24 or higher
Adobe Flash Player 10.3 or greater

NOTE: On Windows Server 2012 Internet Explorer 10 has an embedded version of Adobe
Flash Player. Ensure that the most recent Windows updates are installed using the Windows
update feature in the Control Panel.
Windows Server 2012 configuration to use Adobe Flash applications:
1. Ensure that the most recent Windows updates are installed using the Windows update
feature in the Control Panel.
2. Configuring Windows Server 2012:
a. Click Server Manager in the bottom left corner of the screen.
b. In the Server Manager dialog box, click Add Roles and Features Wizard.
c. Continue with Next with the default options selected and provide specific options in
the wizard.
d. In the Features dialog box choose User Interfaces and Infrastructure (installed). This
feature has three sub-features. Select the Desktop Experience check box.
e. Click Next and the Install.
16
Command View TL GUI
3.
Configure Internet Explorer:

a. Select ToolsCompatibility View Settings.
b. Enter the website address, then click Add.
c. Verify the Include updated websites lists from Microsoft and Display intranet sites in
Compatibility View check boxes are selected.
d. Click Close.
NOTE: Clearing the Internet Explorer cache will remove the added websites in
Compatibility View Settings. If the cache is cleared, the websites must be added
back to the Compatibility View Settings list.
For ESL G3 Tape Libraries (only), Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.6.0 Update 24 is
also required.
Enable Java support for browsers:
1. Close all open browser windows.
2. From the Windows Control Panel, select Java.
3. Select the Advanced tab.
4. Expand the Default Java for browsers node and select the item for your browser if it is
not already selected.
5. Click OK.
An internet connection is recommended for Command View TL to connect to the HP Support

website.
Recommended minimum screen resolution: 1152 x 864

Library hardware requirements
EML and ESL E-Series tape libraries shipped before November 2007 may require a RAM upgrade
to be TapeAssure capable. This upgrade is customer installable and can be ordered as HP part
number 464581-001 from the HP Parts Store (http://www.hp.com/buy/parts) or PartSurfer (http://
partsurfer.hp.com). After replacing the part using the included instructions, remove and re-add the
library on the Command View TL Launcher window.
Other requirements
Command View TL version 2.8 includes support for the ESL G3 tape drives and library.
Command View TL version 2.6 and later includes TapeAssure support for MSL G3 and 1/8 G2
tape drives (LTO Utrium 1840 and later) and Standalone SCSI and SAS tape drives (LTO Ultrium
960 and later). MSL G3 and 1/8 G2 support is enabled through that library's remote management
interface. The Standalone TapeAssure Service requires a Windows agent downloadable from
http://www.hp.com/go/tapeassure. Additional documentation can be found at that website.
To install and run this software on Windows Server 2008, you must either login as Administrator,
or perform the following steps:
1. Become a member of the Administrators group using the Server Manager (StartAll
ProgramsAdministrative ToolsServer Manager).
2. If prompted by Internet Explorer, add the hostname of the management station to your Trusted
Sites Zone.
3. Launch the Command View TL installer by right-clicking on the executable and selecting Run
as Administrator.
The Windows Management Instrumentation service must be started before installation or
uninstallation of Command View TL.
Prerequisites
17
Installing Command View TL

NOTE: Upgrading to Command View TL 3.7.00 is only supported from versions 3.6.00 and 3.6
Patch 01. If your current Command View TL software is older than 3.6.00, upgrade to version
3.6.00 before you upgrade to 3.7.00.
Before upgrading Command View TL to the latest version, backup the TapeAssure database. To
perform the backup, refer to Backing up the TapeAssure database (page 113) and Saving or
copying a database backup file (page 115).
If you are upgrading from a previous version of Command View TL (Command View ESL prior to
version 1.5), follow the procedure below to install the new version over the old version. All previous
settings (device list, support tickets, proxy settings and so forth) are migrated during the upgrade.
During the upgrade, the Command View TL installation path (destination folder) will point to the
existing installation path where an earlier version of Command View TL is installed. Do not change
the Command View TL installation path to a new location.
Do not click cancel or close the installation dialog while the Command View TL installation/upgrade
is in progress.
Table 1 Command View TL upgrade support matrix for Windows Operating System variants
Command View
TL Version
Operating System 3.0.00
18
3.0.1
3.1.00
3.5.00
3.6.00/3.6.01
Microsoft
Windows Server
2003 SP2
(32/64 bit)
No
No
No
No
Yes
Microsoft
Windows Server
2008
SP1(32/64 bit)
No
No
No
No
Yes
Microsoft
No
Windows Server
2008 R2 (64 bit)
No
No
No
Yes
Microsoft
No
Windows XP (32
bit)
No
No
No
No
Microsoft
Windows Vista
(64 bit)
No
No
No
No
Yes
Microsoft
Windows 7 (64
bit)
No
No
No
No
Yes
Command View TL GUI
IMPORTANT:
To install and run this software on Windows Server 2008, you must either login as Administrator,
or perform the following steps:
1. Become a member of the Administrators group using the Server Manager (StartAll
ProgramsAdministrative ToolsServer Manager).
2. If prompted by Internet Explorer, add the hostname of the management station to your Trusted
Sites Zone.
3. Launch the Command View TL installer by right-clicking on the executable and selecting Run
as Administrator.
No changes are required to remotely browse to a library or management station.
1.
If the management station is running firewall software, configure the firewall to enable
communication on the ports used by the management station; see Table 2.
If the management station is running anti-virus software, ensure the ports that are used by
CVTL are not blocked by the anti-virus software.
The following network ports are used by the management station to communicate with the
web browser (Command View TL):
Table 2 Management station to web browser network ports
Port number
Purpose
TCP (added in 2.4)
80 (TCP)
bidirectional, HTTP library is a webserver for administration purposes
161
UDP bidirectional, required to communicate SNMP with library
162-169
UDP inbound, one port in the range required to receive the SNMP traps
443
TCP inbound, HTTPS Secure Webserver
2715
TCP and UDP outbound In Command View TL 2.8.00 or lower
4093 - 4095
TCP bidirectional
5450
TCP bidirectional
5696
TCP outbound, KMIP (future feature) communication port on the server.

Library uses a non privileged port
7755
TCP (added in 2.4)
By configuring the firewall to enable communication through these ports, the web browser
used to run Command View TL can be on the other side of the firewall from the management
station.
The following network ports are used by the management station to communicate with the
Interface Manager card:
Installing Command View TL
19
Table 3 Management station to Interface Manager card network ports

Port number
Purpose
8099
TCP inbound
18098
TCP SSL outbound
8098
TCP bidirectional in Command View TL 2.8.00 or lower
By configuring the firewall to enable communication through these ports, the management
station can be on the other side of the firewall from the Interface manager.
See your firewall documentation for instructions on configuring network access.
Table 4 Interface Manger uses this port for SNMP
Port number
Purpose
161
UDP SNMP from SKM bidirectional
Servers intending to receive SNMP traps will need to have this port open.
Table 5 Interface Manger uses this port for Network Time Protocol (NTP)
Port number
Purpose
123
TCP and UDP bidirectional
Servers intending to use NTP will need to have this port open.
HP recommends that an Secure Key Manager (SKM) or Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM)
appliance (node) use the following network ports to communicate with the SKM or ESKM
management user interface, or for SKM or ESKM communication to other devices. All ports
are TCP and SSL capable.
Table 6 SKM or ESKM network ports
Port number
Purpose
22
SSH login to SKM bidirectional
161
SNMP from SKM bidirectional
9000
Interface Manager login to SKM) bidirectional
9081
FIPS status server from SKM bidirectional
9001
SKM networking bidirectional
9443
Web login to SKM bidirectional
Table 7 SMTP port

Port number
Purpose
25
SMTP to send e-mails bidirectional
Table 8 LTT service ports
20
Port number
Purpose
7999-8099
LTT Service requests from clients
7011-7027
Used for SSH tunneling
7000-7010
Used for LTT Notification server
Command View TL GUI
NOTE: The ESL G3 and MSL6480 notifies CVTL of status changes by connecting to CVTL
on one port in the range of 162-169. Please ensure your firewall allows connections to each
port in this range.
2.
3.
4.
Download the Command View TL software from http://www.hp.com/support/cvtl.

Save the EXE file to your management station and double-click to execute the Command View
TL setup.
Follow the instructions in the window to complete the installation.
Command View TL is a web server that hosts a GUI interface to web clients. Command View
TL runs on the management station as a service. By default, this service starts automatically
whenever the management station is booted, and runs invisibly in the background. In most
cases, the default installation settings are adequate.
IMPORTANT: The typical installation does not include SMIS Tape Provider. In order to install
SMIS Tape provider, choose the custom installation and select SMIS Tape provider from the
features list.
After complete installation of Command View TL , restart Command View TL service to receive
Test Alerts when set from CVTL GUI Administrator+Send Insight Remote Support Test Alert.
If you need to stop Command View TL from running on the management station, use the
Services applet that is included with Windows. To access the Services applet, select
Start+SettingsControl PanelAdministrative ToolsServices and locate the Command View
TL service in the list. Use the Services applet to start and stop services, and to set whether the
service is started automatically when the computer is booted. See the online help that comes
with the Services applet for more information.
5.
The product documentation is located in the docs directory on the Installation CD.
Starting Command View TL

Command View TL requires Adobe Flash Player 10.3 plug-in. If the Adobe Flash Player 10.3
plug-in is not already installed on your computer and you are using a Windows operating system,
Command View TL attempts to download and install it for you. If prompted to install the Adobe
Flash Player 10.3, click OK and follow the instructions in the window. Otherwise, manually
download and install Adobe Flash Player 10.3 on the management station or remote client.
To start Command View TL, open your browser, either on the management station or on a client
machine on the LAN, and enter the following URL in the address field:
http://hostname:4095/
(where hostname is the IP address or network name of the management station. If you are starting
Command View TL on the management station itself, you can substitute localhost for the
hostname).
On the management station, you can also start Command View TL from the Windows Start button:
Start+All ProgramsHP Command View TLCommand View TL
Enter your user name and password
The following table lists the user names that are available and the default passwords. For more
information about the tasks each user can perform or to change one of these passwords, see
Changing library passwords (page 34).
Starting Command View TL
21
Table 9 User names and default passwords

User name
Default password
security
security
admin
admin
NOTE: Multiple users can log in at the same time. If one user is modifying the settings for a
library, other modify operations for that library will be denied.
Using Command View TL
The Launcher window has the following menu tabs in the lower left corner:
DevicesDisplays a list of libraries and virtual tape libraries that can be managed by
Command View TL. You can add or delete libraries from this list, or select a library to manage.
TapeAssureDisplays a consolidated summary of drive and tape utilization, advanced health,

and performance, for every drive and tape on every library using this management station as
its primary management station. It also includes data on the number of uses remaining on the
cleaning tapes in these libraries.
AdministrationDisplays the network settings of the management station. You can configure
these settings.
LicensingProvides a convenient way to track and safely store any additional license keys
you have purchased for use with tape libraries.
Figure 5 The Launcher window
NOTE: For each library, the status column displays messages such as Firmware update in
progress or Cannot communicate with library. It there are no messages to display, the status
column displays the name of the management station that is managing the library or if the library
is not currently managed, Ready to manage.
Licensing Notes
On initial installation of the Command View TL, you have a 60day instant-on license period and
a subsequent 30day grace period to install the TapeAssure Advanced license.
22
Command View TL GUI
Instant-on license behavior for devices:
During instant-on period, all the supported libraries can be added to the CVTL management
station regardless of the license that they have.
Double clicking the library from the devices page will allow the library to be managed.
During the instant-on and grace periods, if all the libraries are licensed then no messages are
visible on the devices page.
For ESL G3/MS6480 libraries:
During the instant-on period, the library is available to be managed.
After 90 days, the license expires and a message indicates that you can no longer manage
the library.
If you have a permanent license, you can manage the library.
For EML/ESL libraries:
During the instant-on period, the library is available to be managed for the first 90 days. (Prior
to version 3.0 the license was only available for 60 days.)
After 90 days, the license expires. A nagging message indicates that the license has expired
in the device management screen. However, you can still manage and perform all the
operations that were available during the instant-on period.
If you have a permanent license, you can manage the library.
Testing the Insight Remote Support

The Send Insight Remote Support Test Alert feature allows library administrators to verify the Insight
Remote Support installation on the server. The Send Insight Remote Support Test Alert sends a test
alert to Insight Remote Support; if Insight Remote Support receives the test alert you can consider
the Insight Remote Support installation successful.
CVTL provides an action to trigger an SMI-S Tape Provider event to the Insight Remote Support
client/back end. This makes testing of Insight Remote Support installations easy. To test the Insight
Remote Support installation, navigate to AdministratorActionsSend Insight Remote Support
Test Alert.
You will receive a message that indicates whether or not the Insight Remote Support alert was sent
successfully.
Testing the Insight Remote Support
23
Managing libraries
NOTE: The Launcher window contains all of the HP libraries that you have added. Different
versions of Command View will open depending on the type of library that you want to manage.
For instructions on using Command View versions earlier than Command View TL 2.0, see the
documentation provided with your library.
Table 10 Command View versions that open for different types of libraries
Type of library
Version of Command View used to manage library
ESL E-Series, EML E-Series tape library
Command View TL
MSL tape library (MSL2024, MSL4048, MSL8048,

MSL8096)
Command View MSL
ESL G3
ESL G3 Library Management Console
MSL6480
MSL6480 Library Management Console
To manage a library, do one of the following:
In the Launcher window, double-click the library.
In the Launcher window, select the library, and then select ActionsManage Library.
When you select an EML or ESL-E library to manage, a new window opens with the following four
tabs:
StatusDisplays details about the library and a hierarchical view of the library and its
components in the left panel. The right panel displays status information about the selected
item. On the Status tab, you can also view a health summary of the entire library, view an
alert log, or view the inventory of the library.
ConfigurationLets you configure library settings, interface settings, network settings,

management station passwords, and licensed capacity (for those libraries that support it). You
can partition the physical library into multiple logical libraries (using Secure Manager), and
configure HP StorageWorks Secure Manager or HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager (assuming
the appropriate licenses have been purchased for those features). You can also save and
restore a library configuration.
OperationsProvides a convenient way to move media and to reboot the library or individual
components of the library.
SupportProvides useful resources for finding support. On the Support tab, you can also
update firmware, generate support tickets, start a hardware replacement wizard, and restore
factory defaults for the Interface Manager card and selected interface controllers.
The upper-left corner of the window contains an icon that indicates the library status. The upper-right
corner contains a summary of the component status and recent alerts. The following table lists the
status icons used.
Table 11 Status icons
Icon
Description
CriticalMay prevent normal operations of the library and must be
addressed immediately
WarningDoes not require immediate attention but should be
addressed as soon as possible
InformationPresents information the user should be aware of but
does not require immediate attention
24
Command View TL GUI
The name of the current library appears in the lower-right corner of the screen. To change the
currently selected library, click Close in the upper-right corner of the screen to go to the Launcher
window.
While managing the MSL, ESL G3, and MSL6480 libraries, if prompted by Microsoft Internet
Explorer, add the library address to your Trust Sites Zone.
Navigating Command View TL

Many windows are divided vertically into two panels. The left panel contains a list showing a
hierarchical structure. The right panel displays additional information about items selected in the
left panel.
Figure 6 A two-panel window
Some windows show data in columns. To show text that is truncated, you can drag the vertical
lines between the column titles to adjust the width of the columns or you can pause your mouse
over some truncated text to show the complete text as a tool tip. Depending on the data being
displayed, you can find more detailed information by:
Double-clicking an item in the list.
Selecting one or more items in the list, and then selecting an item in the Actions menu.
Most windows have an Actions menu that displays a list of actions that you can perform from that
window or on the selected item. Menu items in bold type show the default action for that window
or selected item. Double-click the item to perform the action.
CAUTION: Use the various tabs, menus, and buttons throughout the program to navigate. Do
not use the browser navigation buttons. Doing so may cause loss of configuration data entered on
a window.
Command View TL uses toolbar buttons to perform tasks. These buttons may or may not be available
depending on the window. (page 26) lists these buttons and a description of the action performed.
Navigating Command View TL
25
Table 12 Toolbar buttons

Button
Description
ActionsDisplays a menu of available actions for the current window
or selected items.
RefreshRefreshes the data on the current window.
PrintOpens the Print dialog box to print the data on the current
window to the selected printer.
ExportExports the data or report on the current window to a PDF
file that you can save and print.
HelpOpens a help topic associated with the current window.
Device numbering conventions

In some instances, Command View TL numbers devices differently from how they are numbered
on the library front panel.
(page 26) shows the device numbering conventions used by Command View TL and by the library
front panel (when applicable).
Table 13 Device numbering conventions, GUI
Device
Command View TL
ESL E-Series front panel
EML E-Series front panel
Drives
One-based
One-based
One-based
Drive clusters
n/a
Zero-based1
n/a
Slots
One-based
n/a
One-based
FC interface controllers
One-based
n/a
One-based
FC host port numbers
Zero-based2
n/a
n/a
SCSI bus numbers
Zero-based2
n/a
n/a
Drive clusters in the ESL E-Series libraries are zero-based, although they are not referred to from the front panel of the
library.
The zero-based numbering of the FC host ports and SCSI busses corresponds to the numbers that are printed on the
actual hardware.
Initial configuration steps

After you have successfully installed the Interface Manager card and started Command View TL:
1. Verify that the proxy settings for the management station are correct. See Changing the network
settings of the management station (page 33).
2. Add all libraries that will be monitored to Command View TL. See Adding and removing
libraries (page 27).
3. Add the license key for Command View TL and any additional features that you have
purchased. See Managing license keys (page 31).
4. Change the management station passwords. See Changing library passwords (page 34).
5. Configure the library name, system date and time, and contact information for each library.
See Changing the library settings (page 35).
6. Edit the network settings of the Interface Manager card. See Changing the network settings
of the Interface Manager card (page 36).
7. (Optional) Configure library partitions. Use Secure Manager (license required) to configure
library partitions. Partitioning the library erases all host access configuration settings. See
Partitioning a library (page 153).
26
Command View TL GUI
Adding and removing libraries

You must add any library that you want to manage to each management station or client that you
want to launch or manage it from.
NOTE: The primary management station collects and stores data from the library. For best
performance, the primary management station should be in the same physical location and on the
same IP subnet as the libraries it will manage.
NOTE: If you wish to change the primary management station for a library, first remove the
library from the current management station. If the library is not removed from the current
management station first, the new management station will not be able to collect TapeAssure data
until an Interface Manager clear station command is issued through the CLI (for EML and ESL
E-series libraries.
For more information on the TapeAssure status for a library, click the TapeAssure tab on the
Launcher window.
Adding libraries manually

To manually add a single or multiple libraries:
1. In the Launcher window, click the Devices tab. A list of the libraries that you can currently
manage appears.
2. Click ActionsAdd Library(ies).
This launches the Add Multiple Library wizard.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Click Next.
Enter the management IP address or FQDN of the library. If you are adding multiple libraries,
separate them with commas.
Click Next.
The Summary page shows the libraries that have been entered; select the libraries to add. At
this point no validation has been done to determine if the library is invalid, down, etc.
Click Next.
The Progress page displays the libraries and the current progress of adding the library.
Once all libraries are added, click Finish. The wizard closes and the newly added libraries
are shown in the panel.
Editing a library name

NOTE:
This feature is only available for the ESL G3 and MSL6480 libraries.
To edit the library name:

manage appears.
2. To edit the library name, click ActionEdit Library name.
The Library name dialog box appears.
3.
4.
Edit the library name.

Click OK.
Removing libraries
Removing a library removes it only from the management station that you are using when you
remove it. When the library is removed from the primary management station, TapeAssure data
is no longer collected. TapeAssure data previously collected on the primary management station
is retained after the library removal and can be exported, if needed. See Using TapeAssure
Adding and removing libraries
27
(page 44), Exporting Library Data to CSV via TapeAssure (page 108), and Scheduling a Library
Data Export via TapeAssure (page 112).
NOTE: If the management station will not be managing this library in the future (for example,
when temporarily managing a library from a management station on a laptop computer), remove
the library from the management station before removing the management station from the network.
To remove a library from the management station:
manage appears.
2. Select the library to be removed.
3. Select ActionsRemove Library.
4. Confirm that you want to remove the libraries. The confirmation window will indicate if deleting
any of the selected libraries is of particular concern:
5.
A library that is the primary collector of TapeAssure events and data
An MSL library
An ESL/EML library
If you get an additional confirmation list, select the libraries to remove then click Remove
libraries.
Changing the e-mail settings

During troubleshooting, you can e-mail support tickets to HP Support. The e-mail settings menu
enables you to specify the SMTP server and the maximum e-mail size. To edit the e-mail settings
1. In the Launcher window, click the Administration tab. The current e-mail settings appear.
2. Select ActionsEdit E-mail Settings to display the E-mail Settings dialog box.
3. Enter the SMTP address in the SMTP Server text box.
4. Specify the maximum e-mail size. E-mail larger than the maximum size are broken up into
smaller e-mail.
5. Click OK to close the dialog box.
28
Command View TL GUI
Configuring e-mail alerts

Command View TL has the ability to e-mail users when it receives certain events. You can configure
Command View TL to notify you when it receives any Warning or Critical event, as well as any
network changes. To enable e-mail notification, you first need to have an SMTP server configured.
If you do not already have SMTP configured, go to Changing the e-mail settings. Once you have
your SMTP settings configured, you can enable e-mail notification.
1. In the Launcher window, click the Administration tab. The current settings appear.
2. Click ActionsEnable E-mail Notification.
3. Click Next to begin the Wizard.
4.
Check the libraries you wish to receive notifications about.
Configuring e-mail alerts
29
5.
6.
7.
8.
Enter the e-mail address that will receive the notifications. You may also enter additional e-mail
addresses in the Alternative To E-mail Address field.
Enter the e-mail address the notifications will be sent from. Click Next.
Choose the notifications you wish to receive. Click Next.
Click Finish to complete the wizard.
To disable the e-mail notification:

2. Click ActionsDisable E-mail Notification.
A confirmation dialog to disable the e-mail notifications appears.
30
Command View TL GUI
3.
Click Yes to disable e-mail notifications.
NOTE: For ESL G3 libraries, e-mail notifications are sent only for TapeAssure events. To receive
real-time library and drive health notifications from the libraries, open the library's own GUI from
the Command View TL launcher panel and complete the appropriate Notifications / Alerts
configuration steps.
Managing license keys

The License Key Summary window (on the Licensing tab) shows a summary of all the license keys
pertaining to the tape libraries that are installed on the system. You can add and delete license
key information from this window. The Interface Manager card, ESL G3, MSL G3, MSL 6480, and
Command View TL software use this information to enable any licensable features that have been
purchased.
The License Key Summary window tracks license keys for the following features:
Command View TL (separate licenses for ESL, EML, ESL G3, and MSL6480 tape libraries)
Secure Manager TL (separate licenses for ESL, EML, and ESL G3 tape libraries)
Licensed Capacity Panel Upgrade for ESL E-Series
Capacity upgrade for EML 71e
HP 6000, 9000, or 12000 Virtual Library System capacity
ESL G3 Automated Media Pool License
ESL G3 Partitioning License
ESL G3 E-SKM Encryption Key License
ESL G3 100-slot capacity upgrade license
ESL G3 Secure Manager License
ESL G3 Control Path Failover License
ESL G3 Data Path Failover License
HP ESL G3 KMIP Key Manager Client license
TapeAssure Advanced license
8uExtension
LTFS MSL G3 series
HP Data Verification License for ESL G3
HP StoreEver MSL6480 Data Path Failover License
HP StoreEver MSL6480 Encryption Key License ESKM
HP StoreEver MSL6480 Control Path Failover License
To manage your license keys, in the Launcher window, click the Licensing tab. A list of your current
license keys appears.
The first two columns of the License Key Summary window lists the library name and license name,
for each installed license.
Managing license keys
31
The remaining columns display the following information for each installed license key:
License TypeCan be one of the following:
Permanent licenseHas no expiration date.
Instant-on licenseAllows you to use the feature free of charge up to the expiration date.
You must obtain a permanent license to continue using the feature after the expiration
date without experiencing a reminder window.
Quantity (LTU)Displays the quantity purchased of the specified license.
IdentifierDisplays the unique device identifier (library serial number) for that license key.
Expiration DateDisplays the expiration date, if any, of the license key.
License KeyDisplays the actual license key. License keys are generally too long to fit in this
column. To see the entire license key, do one of the following to display the License Key
Properties dialog box:
Double-click the license key.
Select ActionsProperties.
Adding a license key

To add a new license key:
1. Obtain the license key from HP. See Using license keys (page 144) for instructions.
2. In the Launcher window, click the Licensing tab. A list of your current license keys appears.
3. To add a license key for EML, ESL-E, ESL G3, MSL G3, or MSL6480 library(s), select
ActionsAdd New License Key from the License Key Summary page.
32
Command View TL GUI
4.
Click Browse to locate license keys in your file system or enter the license key in the provided
text box, and then click OK.
The new license key is added to the License Key Summary window.
If EML or ESL E-Series is selected then the Library Identifier will be disabled as it is not required.
The license information will be added to the license summary page.
Viewing the Management Station

The Management Station is the default screen displayed when you click the Administration tab.
The screen displays the following information:
Network settingshostname, active IP address, Command View TL URL, proxy server, and
WebServer port
E-mail settingsSMTP server and e-mail size limit
Factory Overridesyes or no for whether they are enabled
Email Notificationyes or no for whether they are enabled
DV E-mail Notificationyes or no for whether they are enabled
RDC Configurationthe collection time period
Changing the network settings of the management station

To edit the network settings of the management station:
2. Select ActionsEdit Network Settings to display the Network Settings dialog box.
3. Set the required proxy settings. If you choose to use proxy settings, enter the web proxy
hostname and web proxy port. If necessary, consult your network administrator for this
information.
NOTE: Command View TL uses proxy settings to retrieve software and firmware information
through the Web. Command View TL attempts to detect the management station proxy settings
at startup, but it does not use these proxy settings until instructed to do so.
4.
Set the web server port. The default setting is 4095, which should not need to be changed.
If you do change this value, the new value does not take effect until the next time a GUI is
Viewing the Management Station
33
5.
started; the current GUI is unaffected. This value can be viewed in the content pane of the
Management Station tab.
Set the host name or active IP address for the management station. The active IP address is
the one used by the management station to communicate with clients and libraries.
NOTE: It is important to verify that the correct host name or IP address is set. On dual
networked servers, the installation process may have chosen the wrong IP address.
6.
Click OK to save your changes.

NOTE: Changing the host name or active IP address terminates the current GUI session. To
restart the GUI session, enter the new active IP address in the address field of the browser.
Changing management station passwords

IMPORTANT: Each user has a password (see (page 22)). Default passwords are set at the factory.
For security reasons, you should always change these passwords.
To change the password for the Command View TL management station:
1. In the Launcher window, click the Administration tab.
2. Select ActionsChange password. The Change Password dialog box appears.
3.
34
Enter the current password, new password, and confirm the new password. Also enter a
security question and answer that can be used to recover the password if you forget it in the
future.
Command View TL GUI
4.
5.
Click OK.
If you want to change the password for additional users, close Command View TL, restart it,
and log into the library as a different user (see (page 22)).
Recovering a password
To recover an existing password for the Command View TL management station:
1. In the Command View TL log-in window, click I've forgotten the password.
2. In the Recover Password dialog, answer the security question. Click OK.
This will generate a new password for the user to login.
Changing the library settings

Library settings include the following items:
Library name (editable)
System date (editable)
System time (editable)
Synchronizing with NTP (editable)
Time zone (editable)
System contact name (editable)
System contact phone number (editable)
System contact pager number (editable)
System contact e-mail address (editable)
System location (editable)
System asset number (editable)
To edit the library settings:

1. Double-click the EML or ESL E-Series library you want to manage. In the new Library window,
click the Configuration tab.
2. In the left panel, select Library Settings. The current settings appear in the right panel.
Recovering a password
35
3.
Do one of the following:
To edit the library name, select ActionsEdit Library Name.
To edit the system date and time, select ActionsEdit Library Date/Time.
Select either Set Clock Manually or Synchronize Clock with NTP Server.
When synchronizing with NTP servers, enter the IP addresses of up to three NTP servers.
Click Check to verify connectivity.
4.
To edit the contact information, select ActionsEdit Contact Information.
Make the required changes, and then click OK. The library settings are stored in the memory
of the Interface Manager card.
Changing the network settings of the Interface Manager card

Following are the network settings that pertain to the Interface Manager card of an EML or ESL
E-Series library.
IPv4 network settings
Hostname (editable)
Address configuration (editable)
IP address (editable)
Subnet mask (editable)
Gateway (editable)
DNS domain name (editable)
DNS addresses (editable)
IPv6 network settings
Hostname (editable)
Domain name (editable)
DNS servers (primary, secondary, and tertiary)
Stateless addressing
DHCP addressing
Static addressing
MAC Settings
MAC address (not editable)
Link selections (not editable)
Only the network settings can be edited. To edit the network settings:
1. If necessary, obtain the required network settings from your network administrator.
2. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab.
3. Under Network Settings, choose the IP version for which you'll configure your network settings.
IPv4 addresses are the shorter, traditional addresses.
IPv6 addresses are the second generation, 128bit addresses.
4.
36
Select ActionsEdit Network Settings to display the Network Settings dialog box.
Command View TL GUI
5.
Make the changes as required, and then click OK.
RDC Configuration
The RDC Configuration panel of the Administration page allows you to configure the collection
time period for SMI-S. The default time period is seven days. To change the time period:
1. In the navigation panel select Administration.
2.
3.
Under RDC Configuration, click Configure Days. This opens a separate window.
Enter a number. The maximum number of days is 999999999.
4.
Click OK. The screen refreshes to display the new time period.
Verifying connectivity
The Connectivity Check feature performs a quick check to verify that the management station can
communicate with the selected library.
NOTE: The Connectivity Check feature is available for ESL E-Series, EML, ESL G3, and MSL6480
libraries only.
To use the Connectivity Check feature:
1. In the Launcher window, select a library, and then select ActionsConnectivity Check. The
Please wait dialog box appears.
The Connectivity Check feature performs the test and displays the results. If a problem was
encountered, the dialog box provides information to help you troubleshoot and resolve the
problem.
2.
When you are finished, click OK to close the dialog box. If a problem was encountered,
perform the troubleshooting steps as indicated, and then run the Connectivity Check feature
again.
RDC Configuration
37
Getting information about an EML or ESL E-Series library

The Identity screen displays summary information and a photo of the currently selected library.
This screen is useful when you need to quickly find information pertaining to a library, such as the
number of drives or interface controllers it contains. Another use for the Identity screen is finding
the library serial number, which is required when ordering any of the optional, licensable features
of a library (see Advanced features in the GUI (page 144) for more information about additional
licensable features).
In the Library window, click the Identity menu.
Viewing the health summary

The health summary shows the status of every component in the library.
1. In the Library window, click the Status tab.
2. In the left panel, select Health Summary. A list of the health of each component appears in
the right panel.
The first column of the Health Summary displays each component of the library in a
hierarchical structure. Each component is shown with a green, yellow, or red status symbol
that enables you to see if any components need attention.
The second column describes the health of the component.
The third column provides additional information that may be useful if there is a problem
with the component.
The fourth column lists recent alerts.
NOTE: The Health Summary window is automatically updated whenever the status of the
library changes.
3.
To display the properties of a component, do one of the following:
In the right panel, double click a component.
In the right panel, select a component then select ActionsProperties.
Viewing the physical connections

The Cabling View window shows the physical connection between devices.
2. In the left panel, click Cabling View. A list of the physical connections appears in the right
panel.
TIP: Verify that the list does not contain an Unconnected Devices node which would
indicate that the Interface manager card is unable to establish connectivity with any of the
library components.
38
The first column shows the components in tree view.
The second column shows the health of the component with an icon.
The third column shows the serial number for the Interface Manager card, the World
Wide Node Name (WWNN) for the interface controllers, the World Wide Port Name
(WWPN) for the host ports, or a generic name for SCSI device ports.
Command View TL GUI
Viewing the status of components

The Component Status function displays the current status of the following library components
individually:
Library
Library sensors (temperature, voltage, and fan speed readings)
Robotics
Drives
Advanced LTO Drives
Interface Controllers
1.
2.
Interface Manager
In the Library window, click the Status tab.
In the left panel, select the component that you want to see the status of, either Library, Library
Sensors, Robotics, Drives, Interface Controllers, or Interface Manager. Relevant information
for that component shows in the right panel. The information displayed varies depending on
the component selected.
To display the properties of a component, do one of the following:
3.
In the right panel, double-click a component.
In the right panel, select a component, and then select ActionsProperties.
The information displayed varies depending on the component selected.
Viewing the alert log

To view the alert log:
2. In the left panel, select Alert Log. A list of alerts appears in the right panel.
The following information shows for each alert.
Viewing the status of components
39
TIP: Click a column title to sort by that column. Click the column title again to sort in the
reverse order.
3.
TimestampTime that the alert was recorded.
Alert DescriptionBrief description of the alert.
SourceDevice that triggered the alert.
SeverityDisplays one of the following icons indicating the type of the alert:
CriticalMay prevent normal operations of the library and must be addressed

immediately
WarningDoes not require immediate attention but should be addressed as soon

as possible
InformationPresents information the user should be aware of but does not require
immediate attention
If the message is truncated, double-click an alert.
NOTE: Alerts may be triggered for certain drive and tape conditions when a support ticket is
requested by the user, or if proactive log retrieval is enabled. The drives are checked for these
conditions and associated alerts whenever a drive unloads a tape. The following list describes
these alert conditions:
Warnings or errors generated from device analysis, which will show drive or tape problems
identified by looking at the drive logs.
Temperature problems identified for either the drive or tape.
Excessive drive usage, including load/unload life, head life, and reposition life.
Write quality problems.
Read quality problems.
Excessive media usage, including read/write life and load/unload life.
For write/read quality and usage issues, the severity of the alert triggered will depend on the level
of the issue. The alert description will include any recommended service actions.
40
Command View TL GUI
Changing the Interface Manager mode

In EML and ESL E-series libraries, the Interface Manager mode setting specifies how the FC interface
controllers are configured. In Automatic mode, the host port connection settings will be configured
the same across all FC interface controllers in the library. In Manual mode, the host port connection
settings for each FC interface controller can be configured differently. For example, one host port
can be configured for Fabric Attach and another can be configured for Direct Attach.
CAUTION: HP strongly recommends that you leave the Interface Manager mode set to the default
setting of Automatic.
If the Interface Manager mode has been changed to Manual and you want to change it back to
Automatic, the connection and speed properties must be the same on all the Interface controllers..
To change the Interface Manager mode:
2. In the left panel, click Interface Manager Mode. The current setting for the Interface Manager
Mode appears in the right panel.
3. Select ActionsEdit Interface Manager Mode to display the Interface Manager Mode dialog
box.
4. Change the mode as required, and then click OK.
5. If you are changing from Manual to Automatic mode, confirm that you want to reboot in the
Reboot Warning dialog box.
Changing the connection properties of the interface controllers

The connection properties for the FC interface controllers include the following.
World Wide Name (not editable)
Connection Type (editable)
Port Mode (editable only if Interface Manager mode is set to manual)
Hard AL-PA (editable only if Interface Manager mode is set to manual)
Speed (Gbps) (editable)
Only the connection type and speed of the ports can be set manually. The remaining items are
configured automatically by the Interface Manager card.
IMPORTANT: When the Interface Manager mode is Automatic, if you make changes to one FC
host port, those changes are applied to all the FC host ports on all the FC interface controllers in
the library. When the Interface Manager mode is Manual, changes apply only to the selected FC
host port (see Changing the Interface Manager mode (page 41)).
To edit the FC host port settings:
2. In the left panel, select Interface SettingsConnection Properties. A list of connections appears
in the right panel.
3. In the right panel, select an FC host port, and then select ActionsEdit Port Connection Settings.
TIP: When the library's Interface Manager mode is Automatic, it does not matter which FC
host port is selected because the changes you make apply to all FC host ports.
The Port Connection Settings dialog box appears.
Changing the Interface Manager mode
41
4.
Set the Port Connection Type to one of the following:
Fabric (SAN) AttachUse this connection type when connecting all FC host ports to an
FC switch (default setting).
Direct AttachUse this connection type when connecting all FC host ports directly to a
Host Bus Adapter (HBA) on a backup server.
NOTE: It is a good idea to disconnect the FC port if they are set to fabric and connected
to a HBA directly until the configuration can be made.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Set the Port Speed.

Click OK to save the changes.
Confirm that you want to reboot in the Reboot Warning dialog box.
Save a new configuration.
Managing the interface controllers

The Interface Manager card retains the World Wide Names (WWN) of installed interface
controllers. The Interface Manager card makes sure that your interface controllers maintain the
same WWN, along with the host mapping configuration and partitioning configuration, in the
event that they require replacement. This enables your backup configuration to continue unchanged,
despite the replacement. Replacing an interface controller is done with the Hardware Replacement
wizard.
Replacing an interface controller

After replacing an interface controller in a library with the Hardware Replacement wizard, all of
the following should happen:
1. If version 5.7.xx or 5.6.xx of the firmware is detected in the replacement interface controller,
the Interface Manager card will immediately update the firmware in the interface controller.
2. The Interface Manager card sets the WWN of the replacement interface controller to match
the WWN of the controller that was replaced.
3. The Interface Manager card transfers the retained host mapping and partitioning configuration
data to the replacement interface controller.
TIP: With the Hardware Replacement wizard, you can replace more than one interface controller
at the same time.
42
Command View TL GUI
To replace an interface controller:

CAUTION: If you need to replace an interface controller, refer to the appropriate library and
interface controller documentation for information on how to replace the hardware. Some interface
controllers are hot-pluggable. Refer to the interface controller documentation to see if your interface
controller is hot-pluggable.
1.
Follow the instructions in the interface controller's replacement poster to remove and replace
the card.
CAUTION: You must connect the cables to the new interface controller exactly as they were
connected to the original interface controller. If you don't, the Interface Manager card will
not be able to reapply the settings.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
In the Library window, click the Support tab.

In the left panel, select Hardware Replacement.
Select ActionsLaunch Interface Controller Replacement Wizard.
Follow the instructions in the wizard.
Verify that the firmware revision in the Interface Controller does not need to be upgraded.
Clearing a WWN mismatch

Beginning with version 1.7, the Interface Manager card claims ownership of the interface
controllers installed in a library. The MAC address of the Interface Manager card is stored in the
memory of each interface controller, creating an association between the Interface Manager card
and the interface controllers. If an interface controller that was owned by an Interface Manager
card is transferred from one library to another, then the Interface Manager card in the new library
will detect a WWN mismatch. To clear this situation, and to associate the interface controller with
the current Interface Manager card:
1. In the Library window, click the Support tab.
2. In the left panel, select Hardware Replacement.
3.
Select ActionsClear WWN Mismatches. The following warning message appears:
Managing the interface controllers
43
TIP: Moving a configured interface controller from one library to a previously empty slot in
another library may enable a duplicate WWN to exist in the SAN. The Interface Manager
card and Command View TL will highlight this possibility, but you will need to take additional
action as noted in the next step.
4.
Verify that there are no other interface controllers with the same WWN in the SAN. To view
the WWN of your interface controllers, cancel out of the Clear WWN Mismatches dialog,
and then click the Configuration tab, and then select Connection Properties in the left panel.
See Changing the connection properties of the interface controllers (page 41) for more
information. After verifying that there are no duplicate WWNs in your SAN, repeat Step 1
to Step 3 to return to the Clear WWN Mismatches dialog.
NOTE:
5.
6.
If you find a duplicate WWN, contact HP support.
Click OK. The dialog closes, and the interface controller is now owned by the Interface
Manager card.
Save a new configuration by selecting the Configuration tab, then the ActionsSave Current
Configuration option and following prompts.
Using TapeAssure
For EML, ESL E-series, ESL G3, and MSL6480 libraries that contain LTO tape drives, TapeAssure
data is collected by the primary management station for the library. The primary management
station is the first Command View TL management station to register the library. To make a particular
Command View TL management station the primary management station for an EML, ESL E-series,
ESL G3, and MSL6480 library, simply be the first Command View TL management station to register
that library.
To change the primary management station for a library:
1. Unregister the library from the current primary management station.
2. Register the library with the appropriate primary management station.
The new management station is the TapeAssure collector for that library. After this change,
all new TapeAssure data generated by the library will be sent to its new primary management
station.
To see the libraries for which your management station is the primary management station (and
TapeAssure data collector), go to the Launcher screen in Command View TL. The Status column
reports the primary management station for each library.
44
Command View TL GUI
Configuring standalone drives for TapeAssure

To configure a backup server with standalone HP drives to send TapeAssure data to a Command
View TL management station, install and configure an application called the HP StoreEver
TapeAssure Service on the backup server. This application can be downloaded from http://
www.hp.com/go/tapeassure using the following steps:
1. Navigate to the correct download for the required operating system.
2. Download and install the software on your backup server.
3. Re-boot the server.
This is a necessary step to ensure the service has access to the tape drive, but only needs to
be done once at install time. The service starts automatically once the reboot is complete.
4.
Configure the service by modifying the sta_service.cfg file.

a. Identify the server that will be running Command View TL.
b. Set up any specifics such as the rate at which tickets will be pulled.
Most changes to the configuration will be picked up automatically within five minutes though
the service can always be restarted to pick up all the configurations.
NOTE: If the Command View TL service is not active on the management station you have
specified, support tickets generated by the standalone drives will be stored on the backup server
and will be sent to Command View TL when the service becomes active.
Configuring MSL libraries for TapeAssure

To configure a MSL library to send TapeAssure data to a Command View TL management station:
1. Open the Remote Management Interface (RMI), web based management console for MSL
libraries.
2. Verify that the firmware on your library is at minimum firmware revision:
3.
80969.90
40487.20
20244.90
1/8 G23.00
From the Configuration: Network Management display of the RMI, in the Command View TL
configuration section:
a. Enter the IPv4 address of the Command View TL management station you wish to use as
TapeAssure collector.
NOTE: The minimum firmware revisions listed above only support IPv4 management
stations. A future firmware release will enable support for IPv6 management stations.
b.
c.
Enter 8099 for the port number.

Submit the new network configuration.
The first TapeAssure data will not be sent to this newly registered Command View TL
management station until a tape has been written to or read from the library and then unloaded
from its drive.
NOTE: MSL libraries only generate TapeAssure data for LTO tape drives of generation LTO4
and later.
Viewing TapeAssure information

For Command View TL versions 2.5 and later, the TapeAssure tab provides a centralized view of
health, performance, and utilization data for both tape drives and tape cartridges. Summary data
Using TapeAssure
45
for all tape drives and tape cartridges in every library managed by this management station can
be viewed on the various Drives and Tapes pages accessible from this tab.
NOTE: EML and ESL E-Series tape libraries shipped before November 2007 may require a RAM
upgrade to be TapeAssure capable. This upgrade is customer-installable and can be ordered as
HP part number 464581-001 from the HP Parts Store (http://www.hp.com/buy/parts) or PartSurfer
(http://partsurfer.hp.com). After replacing the part using the included instructions, remove and
re-add the library from the Command View TL Launcher window.
NOTE: Command View TL version 2.6 and later includes TapeAssure support for MSL G3 and
1/8 G2 tape drives (LTO Utrium 1840 and later) and Standalone SCSI and SAS tape drives (LTO
Ultrium 960 and later). MSL G3 and 1/8 G2 support is enabled through the remote management
interface of the library. The Standalone TapeAssure Service requires a Windows agent
downloadable from http://www.hp.com/go/tapeassure. Additional documentation can be found
at that website.
To access TapeAssure and the associated information:
1. In the Launcher window, click the TapeAssure tab.
2. In the left panel, under Drives, select Health, Performance, or Utilization. A list of the tape
drives in the libraries managed by this management station appears.
TIP:
To change the order of the columns, drag the column header and drop it in the new location.
To find a specific tape drive or set of tape drives, enter the serial number or name of a tape drive
in the Filter field and click the filter icon to the right of the text box.
For example, to search for the serial number HU172404BF, enter h to find tape drives with serial
numbers that contain h (matching serial numbers such as HU172404BF, HU171801UB, and
HU272404BB. Continuing with the same query, when you enter u17, the list will narrow to drive
names containing hu17 (matching serial numbers such as HU172404BF and HU171801UB). When
you enter the 2 and click the filter icon (to the right of the text box), the list in this example will only
contain HU172404BF.
To clear the filter, click the Clear filter string icon.
Viewing the dashboard

The dashboard is the default screen when you select TapeAssure in the Navigation panel and
contains two tabs. The Health tab is open by default and displays the current state of the libraries
being managed by this CVTL management station and of the drives and tapes that are present in
those libraries; see Viewing the Health tab (page 46). The Libraries tab displays the allocation
details of the library capacity; see Viewing the Library tab (page 48).
The Actions menu at the top of the screen provides these options:
Export Report to export the TapeAssure dashboard graphs and tabular data to a PDF file that
can be saved and printed
Refresh to refresh the page with the most recent data
The toolbar at the top of the screen allows you to Refresh, Print, or Export to PDF.
Viewing the Health tab
The Health tab of the dashboard has four main parts:
46
A pie chart containing the state of the licensed libraries, drives, and tapes. A red sector
indicates the number of libraries, drives, and tapes that are in the critical state, yellow indicates
the number that are in the warning state, and green indicates the number that are in the ready
state. If there is no health information available, that message is displayed instead of a pie
chart. The library health pie chart has an additional unknown state that means the data is
in the database but the library is not added to the management station. Beneath the pie charts
Command View TL GUI
is a button that takes you to a summary of any specific libraries, drives, and tapes that need
attention (in critical or warning states). This information is only available for libraries with the
Advanced TapeAssure license.
A table to the right of the pie charts lists the drives being polled by the hosts and the number
of hosts polling them. Clicking the linked number lists the hosts that are polling that drive.
A table beneath the drives being polled table lists the hosts and the number of drives that each
one is polling. Clicking the linked number lists the drives being polled by each host. (This is
the same information as the table above it from the perspective of the hosts instead of drives.)
The table across the bottom lists the most recent 100 alerts that have been received by the
management station.
Each of the tables contains a filter box to filter the rows based on the entered search criteria.
Using TapeAssure
47
NOTE: The TapeAssure dashboard information can be viewed only for the libraries having a
TapeAssure Advanced license. If there are no libraries with the Advanced License, the following
message is displayed:
Insufficient data available to plot the graph or Command View TL
TapeAssure Advanced license is not available.
Please install the Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license for the
appropriate tape libraries. To install a license, click 'Licensing' tab
on the left pane and add the Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license.
NOTE: On initial installation of the Command View TL, you have a 60day instant-on license
period and a subsequent 30day grace period to install the TapeAssure Advanced license. For
both time periods, the reminder messages providing the time period expiration date are shown
on the dashboard. If you install TapeAssure Advanced licenses on all of the libraries, no reminder
messages are shown.
TapeAssure Advanced licenses are only available for MSL6480, ESL G3, Autoloader, and MSL
libraries. Therefore, on EML/ESL libraries, links to access details from the TapeAssure panels will
always be disabled.
Viewing libraries, drives, and tapes needing attention
This page, launched from the button on the Health tab of the TapeAssure dashboard, provides lists
of the libraries, drives, and tapes that need attention, meaning that they are in either the warning
or critical state.
Viewing the Library tab

The Libraries tab of the TapeAssure Dashboard shows the allocation details of each librarys slots
and drives capacity. It does not matter if the slots and drives are allocated to a partition or not or
if there are tapes present in the slots. The tab also lists all of the tapes and drives grouped by type
for all libraries with the Advanced TapeAssure license.
48
Command View TL GUI
The Libraries tab of the dashboard has four main parts:
Slots Allocation: A pie chart displaying the number of allocated (already assigned to a partition)
and unallocated (not assigned to a partition) slots for all of the libraries. Hovering over the
allocated portion of the chart displays the numbers of total slots, full slots (loaded with a tape
cartridge), empty slots (no tape cartridges loaded), and the percentage of slots allocated. For
a single library, the full or empty slots are for all the partitions of the selected library.
When you click the allocated portion of the pie chart, a window displays the number of
allocated slots for each library as both a bar graph and table. The details include the number
of full slots and empty slots. Click the linked library serial number to view the partition level
details for that library. Clicking the unallocated portion of the dashboard pie chart displays
the number of unallocated slots for each library; there is no partition level details.
Using TapeAssure
49
Drives Allocation: A pie chart displaying the number of allocated (already assigned to a
partition) and unallocated (not assigned to a partition) drives for all of the libraries. Hovering
over the allocated portion of the chart displays the numbers of total drives and the percentage
of drives allocated.
When you click the allocated portion of the pie chart, a window displays the number of
allocated drives for each library as both a bar graph and table. Click the linked library serial
number to view the partition level details for that library.
Clicking the unallocated portion of the dashboard pie chart displays the number of unallocated
drives for each library; there is no partition level details.
Drives by type: A bar chart showing the type of drives on each library (LTO4, LTO5, LTO6,
older LTOs, and unknown), and the number of each type of drive.
Tapes by type: A bar chart showing the type of tapes on each library (LTO4, LTO5, LTO6,
older LTOs, and unknown), and the number of each type of tape.
NOTE: The TapeAssure dashboard information can be viewed only for the libraries having a
TapeAssure Advanced license. If there are no libraries with the Advanced License, the following
message is displayed:
If the data is not available for a specific chart, the following message is displayed:
TapeAssure Data Not Available to plot [chart name].
For ESL G3 libraries, the drives and tapes must be in the partition to view the library TapeAssure
information.
50
Command View TL GUI
Library TapeAssure views

Library TapeAssure offers three different tabular views.
Overview tabular view displays information for all the libraries for which the Library
TapeAssure information is available in the CVTL MS database.
Partition tabular view displays information for a selected library for which the Library
TapeAssure information is available in the CVTL MS database.
Usage tabular view displays information for all the libraries for which the Library TapeAssure
information is available in the CVTL MS database.
NOTE: Library TapeAssure features are supported for the MSL G3, ESL G3, and MSL 6480
libraries only.
Overview tabular view

The Library TapeAssure Overview tabular view displays information for all the libraries for which
the Library TapeAssure information is available in the CVTL MS database.
To launch the Overview Tabular Data, go to TapeAssureLibrariesOverview and click on the
Overview node.
If there is no data, then a message is displayed stating:
Library Overview is not available or libraries are using an older
firmware. Please upgrade to an appropriate firmware for the tape
libraries.
Table 14 (page 51) shows the tool tips for the Overview tabular view dialog box.
Table 14 Overview tabular view tool tips for column headers
Column Header
Tool Tip
Library SN
The HP serial number of the library (for support use)
Library Description
Description of the library
IP Address
IP address
Library Hostname
Hostname of the library
Library Firmware Revision
Firmware revision of the library
Storage Slots
Number of storage slots
Library Drives
Number of drives
Mail slots
Number of mail slots

Using TapeAssure
51
Table 14 Overview tabular view tool tips for column headers (continued)
Column Header
Tool Tip
Frames/Modules
Number of frames (modules)
Library Partitions
Number of partitions
Last Sample Time
The time at which the last sample was taken
Partition tabular view

By default when the Overview tabular view is displayed the first library is highlighted and the
partition tabular view for the corresponding library is display below. By clicking on particular row
of the Overview table, the corresponding partition for the selected library gets displayed in the
partition table.
NOTE:
If there is no partition available for the selected library, a message is displayed stating:
Partition data is not available for the selected library.
Table 15 (page 52) shows the tool tips for the Overview tabular view dialog box.
Table 15 Partition tabular view tool tips for column headers
Column Header
Tool Tip
Partition Serial Number
Serial number of the partition
Library Partition Number
Partition number of the library
Encryption Config
Encryption configuration:
Library managed (off) PLK Midrange Encryption Control
Token
Library managed ESKM (HP Enterprise Secure Manager)
Library managed KMIP (Key Management
Interoperability Protocol)
Application managed
Control Path Failover
Control path failover configuration:

Basic (off) The MSL tape libraries provide a basic
control path failover capability
Advanced The HP ESL G3 tape libraries provide an
advanced library control path failover
Number of Drives
52
Command View TL GUI
Number of drives in the partition
Table 15 Partition tabular view tool tips for column headers (continued)
Column Header
Tool Tip
Number of Slots
Number of slots in the partition
Number of Mail Slots
Number of mail slots in the partition
Usage tabular view

The Library TapeAssure Usage tabular view displays information for all the libraries for which the
Library TapeAssure information is available in the CVTL MS database.
To launch the Usage Tabular Data, go to TapeAssureLibrariesUsage and click on the Usage
node.
If there is no data, then a message is displayed stating:
Library Usage data is not available or libraries are using an older
firmware. Please upgrade firmware for the appropriate tape libraries.
Table 16 (page 53) shows the tool tips for the Usage tabular view dialog box.
Table 16 Usage tabular view tool tips for column headers
Column Header
Tool Tip
Library SN
The HP serial number of the library (for support use)
Library Description
Description of the library
Library Hostname
Hostname of the library
Moves
Total number of moves over the lifetime of the library
Library Power Cycles
Total number of power cycles in the library
Library Total Power on Time
Total time the library was powered on
Library Current Power on Time
Power on time since the last power cycle
Last Sample Time
The time at which the last sample was taken
libraries only.
Empty slots per library

The library empty slots data chart is displayed under the Libraries link in the TapeAssure tab. The
Library empty slots information is displayed in both a tabular and graphical view. The graphical
Using TapeAssure
53
view will be shown as a bar chart for a particular tape library over a particular time period. The
Empty Slots graph shows the number of empty slots available per library.
Launching empty slots chart

A TapeAssure Advanced license is required to display the empty slots chart. If no TapeAssure
Advanced license is found, the following error message will be displayed:
TapeAssure Advanced license is not available.Please install the Command
View TL TapeAssure Advanced license for the appropriate tape libraries.
To install a license, click 'Licensing' tab on the left pane and add
the Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license.
If there is no data available for a particular library or the library is using an older firmware version
the following message will be displayed:
The chart is not available for one of the following reasons:
There is not enough data for the selected time period.
The library is using an older firmware. Please upgrade firmware for the
appropriate tape libraries.
To launch empty slots chart:
1. From the left navigation tree, select TapeAssureLibrariesEmpty Slots.
The Empty Slots dialog box is displayed.
2.
Specify the library serial number and time period.

a. Select a library from the drop down list.
b. Select a Sample Time from the list provided. By default Last Month is selected.
3.
Click Plot Chart.

The Empty Slots chart is displayed.
54
Command View TL GUI
Empty slot chart view

The empty slots information is displayed in both a tabular and graphical view. By default, data is
displayed in the graphical view. To see the data in the tabular view, click Go to Tabular View.
The graphical view displays the data where the Y-axis is the number of empty slots and the X-axis
is the Date/Time. The value of the Y-axis is dependant on the number of empty slots. The X-axis
display the date and time of the support ticket.
NOTE:
Hovering over the data points data tip will show the empty slots and the date.
The date format is presented as mm/dd/yyyy and the time format is displayed as HH:MM AM/PM.
Slider and Zoom effect A replica of the original chart is displayed as a miniature chart at the
top of the dialog. Sliders can be used to zoom in and out on a specific data range.
Empty slots tabular view

Tabular view data is displayed for all the days in which support ticket data is available.
Using TapeAssure
55
NOTE:
Data filtered in the tabular view will also filter data in the graphic view.
Select Sample Time Select a sample time from the list provided or select a custom range by
entering the start and end dates; see Choosing a sample time (page 66).
libraries only.
Moves per library

The moves per library data chart is displayed under the Libraries link in the TapeAssure tab. The
Library Moves information is displayed in both a tabular and graphical view. The data is shown
as a line chart for a particular tape library over a particular time period.
The Moves graph shows the number of moves (tapes moved from slot to drive or vice versa and
slot to slot) performed per library.
Launching moves chart

To launch the moves chart:
1. From the navigation tree, select TapeAssureLibrariesMoves.
The Media Moves dialog box is displayed.
56
Command View TL GUI
2.
Specify the library serial number and time period.

a. Select a library from the drop down menu.
b. Select a Sample Time from the list provided. By default Last Month is selected.
NOTE: A TapeAssure Advanced license is required to display the chart. If no TapeAssure

Advanced license is found, the following error message will be displayed:
TapeAssure Advanced license is not available. Please install the
Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license for the appropriate tape
libraries. To install a license, click 'Licensing' on the left pane
and add the Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license.
If there is no data available for a particular library or the library is using an older firmware
version the following message will be displayed:
The chart is not available for one of the following reasons:
There is not enough data for the selected time period.
The library is using an older firmware. Please upgrade firmware for
the appropriate tape libraries.
3.
Click Plot Chart.

The Moves chart is displayed.
Moves chart
The moves chart information is displayed in both a tabular and graphical view. By default, data
is displayed in the graphical view. To see the data in the tabular view, click Go to Tabular View.
The graphical view displays the data where the Y-axis is the number of moves and the X-axis is
the Date. The X-axis displays the date according to the zoom in and zoom out range.
The date is displayed as mm/dd/yy. When grouped by months the date is displayed as mm/yy
and when grouped by year the date is displayed as yyyy. Grouping is dependant on the amount
of data available. If no support tickets are available for a particular day, the data point will not
be plotted in the graph.
Using TapeAssure
57
NOTE: Hovering over the data points data tip will show the moves count and the date. The date
is displayed as mm/dd/yyyy.
Slider and Zoom effect A replica of the original chart is displayed as a miniature chart at the
top of the dialog. The slider can be used to zoom in and out on yearly, monthly, weekly, and daily
level. The minimum time period is one day. The end of the slider displays the dates relevant for
the period as they are changed.
Moves tabular view

Tabular view data is displayed for all the days in which support ticket data is available. Grouping
is not allowed in the tabular view. To view the data in the graphical view, click Back to Graphical
View.
58
Command View TL GUI
Select Sample Time Select a sample time from the list provided or select a custom range by
entering the start and end dates; see Choosing a sample time (page 66).
libraries only.
Sorting and filtering

Sorting is string based or number based depending on the data type.
Filter is string based, similar to other TapeAssure tabular data viz: Drive Health, Media Health,
etc. While filtering on the Overview table, for a successful filter the first row from the filtered row
is automatically selected and the corresponding partition information is displayed below in the
partition table.
If the Export to PDF icon is clicked or the Export Report menu is selected after filtering, the report
would show only the filtered data. If there is no data to be shown after a filter then the Export to
PDF icon remains disabled.
Action menu drop down list

The Action menu bar is located at the top of the Overview dialog box. The Action drop down the
following options:
Export Report generates a report
Refresh refreshes table data
Application bar
The Application bar is located at the top of the Overview dialog box. The Application bar has the
following options:
Table 17 Application bar icons
Click the Refresh icon to refresh the data.
Click on the Print icon to export data to a PDF.
Click the PDF icon to export data to PDF.

NOTE: When exporting to a PDF from the Overview
dialog, the librarys overview data for each library is
exported and the partition data is displayed below it.
Click the Help icon to navigate to the Help page.
Viewing drive health

To access health information for a specific drive:
2. In the Navigation panel under Drives, select Health. A list of the tape drives in the libraries
managed by this management station appears.
3. Click on the drive, then select ActionsProperties, or double click the row, to launch the drive
properties.
4. Click the Overall Health link to open the drive health graphs.
Using TapeAssure
59
The TapeAssure drive health tab lists:
Serial NumberThe serial number of the drive. This is a static value and will change if a drive
has been replaced. Use the serial number when contacting HP support.
Overall Health An Overall Health icon and a details link allow you to view the Drive Health
and Life graphs and tabular data.
Drive TypeThe drive type including generation and interface type.
Library Serial NumberThe HP serial number that uniquely identifies the library. Defined at
manufacture, this is the number to quote when contacting HP support.
Write QualityA measure of the amount of tape used to write high quality data to the last
loaded tape followed by the amount of data written to the tape since it was last loaded.
Even if the warning is reported, the data will still have been written at high quality (unless the
drive reported an error) though more tape was used than recommended by HP. Note that a
warning will normally trigger an alert.
If appropriate, maintenance recommendations are made, such as to clean the drive and/or
replace the tape.
Read QualityA measure of the ease with which data was read back from the most recently
loaded tape followed by the amount of data read from the tape since it was last loaded.
Even if the warning is given, the data will have been read back correctly (unless the drive
reported an error) though more error correction was required than recommended. Note that
a warning will normally trigger an alert
If appropriate, maintenance recommendations are made, such as to clean the drive and/or
replace the tape.
Head Life (% Life Remaining)The percentage of remaining head life based on the amount
of tape passed over the head compared with worst case life expectancy testing in a clean
environment.
If a life warning is shown, the drive should be replaced at the next maintenance period.
Reposition Life (% Life Remaining)The percentage of remaining reposition life based on the
number of changes in direction of the tape over the life of the drive compared with the worst
case life expectancy in a clean environment.
60
Command View TL GUI
Load/Unload LifeThe percentage of remaining drive load/unload life based on the number
of load/unload cycles over the life of the drive compared with worst case life expectancy
testing in a clean environment.
Service ActionA recommendation for service based on the health criteria. More than one
service action may apply; hover over the entry with the mouse to see a tool tip containing all
recommended service actions for the drive.
Viewing Drive Health and Life

The Drive Health and Life shows the recent health history of a particular drive. Library administrator
can view health related information including a graph showing what the drive health has been
across the last several backups. In addition, you can drill down into the recent health history of
any tapes used by that drive. This helps determine if there is a problem with the drive or with a
particular tape being used by that drive.
To view the Drive Health and Life:
2. In the Navigation panel under Drives, select Health. A list of all of the drives appears.
Alternatively, in the Navigation panel under Dashboard, select Drives and Tapes Needing
Attention. A list of all drives that need attention (in a critical or warning state) appears.
3.
Click on the drive, then select ActionsProperties, or double click the row, to launch the drive
properties.
NOTE:
4.
Details links are only enabled for drives that belong to licensed libraries.
Click the Overall Health link to open the drive health graphs.
The Drive Health/Life window displays the following:
Drive Serial Number
Library Serial Number
Overall Health calculated based on the recent worst status of the drive health parameters
HeadLifeQual, LoadLifeQual, RepoLifeQual and WriteHealth
Write Health/Read Health based on the latest support ticket
Write Health tab

The Write Health tab shows the write health history of the drives for different tapes as both a graph
and a table.
Using TapeAssure
61
On the graph, the red, yellow, and green bands represent the critical, warning, and healthy status,
respectively, of the drive write health. The X-axis represents the barcode/cartridge serial number
and the Y-axis represents the write health of drive.
The table displays the barcode/cartridge serial number, the date/time, and the write health of the
drives of the tapes.
Use the Sample Time to filter the write health history for all the tapes loaded onto a drive between
the specified time intervals. In addition, each barcode/cartridge serial number is a link to the tape
write health history.
To export the report as a PDF, click Export Report at the bottom of the graph. This will allow you
to save the graph locally or email it. You can also export only the graphs or the complete report.
Life tab
A set of parameters decide the life of a drive and they deteriorate over time due to wear and tear.
Each backup leads to the generation of a Support Ticket that contains information about the quality
of the backup. These life parameters keep reducing with each backup. The Life tab shows the trend
of deterioration of the life parameters and recommends the action to be taken before the drive
becomes unusable.
The following are the life parameters of a drive and are compared to the HP recommended
specification:
DriveHeadLife the remaining headlife of the drive
DriveLoadLife the remaining load/unload life of the drive
DriveRepositionLife the remaining reposition life of the drive
A simple regression is done on the historical data that the management station has collected over
a period of time for these life parameters. As a result, there is a trend line for each parameter. The
trend line with a greater slope value indicates that the parameter is deteriorating at a faster pace
than the others and determines the life of the drive (this parameter leads to the drive being unusable
faster than the other parameters). The screen displays the trend line of the parameter that is
degrading at the fastest pace. The trend line is then extrapolated to know when this parameter
62
Command View TL GUI
would become 0 in time; based on this date, a set of recommendations are made for this drive.
There are three kinds of messages for the life of a drive:
Drive is at the end of its recommended life if any of the drives life parameters are already
less than or equal to 0 based on last sample date
Drive is nearing the end of its recommended service life when drive life trend data for
<drive serial number> indicates the drive will reach the end of its serviceable life within the
next six months
Drive is within the recommended serviceable life when drive life trend data for <drive serial
number> indicates the drive will not reach the end of its serviceable life within the next six
months
NOTE: All the analysis and recommendations are based on the date when the last support ticket
was received by the management station for a particular tape/drive.
Viewing drive performance

To access performance information for a specific drive:
2. In the Navigation panel under Drives, select Performance. A list of the tape drives in the
libraries managed by this management station appears.
3. Click on the drive, then select ActionsProperties.
4. To view the drive performance and utilization history of a particular drive, click the linked
serial number. See Viewing drive performance and utilization history (page 67).
Using TapeAssure
63
The TapeAssure drive performance tab lists:
64
Serial NumberThe serial number of the drive. This is a static value and will change if a drive
Library SN (or Hostname)The HP serial number that uniquely identifies the library. Defined
at manufacture, this is the number to quote when contacting HP support.
Media Transfer RateThe transfer rate of the data, after compression, transferred to/from the
tape since the last load.
Estimated Host Transfer RateThe estimated transfer rate of the host averaged over the data
transferred to/from the tape since the last load.
Write Compression Ratio The average write compression ratio of the data written to tape
since the last load.
Read Compression RatioThe average read compression ratio of the data read from tape
since the last load.
Last Sample TimeThe local time when the key data was written to the database.
Command View TL GUI
Viewing drive utilization

To access utilization information for a specific drive:
2. In the Navigation panel under Drives, select Utilization. A list of the tape drives in the libraries
managed by this management station appears.
3. Click on the drive, then select ActionsProperties.
4. To view the drive performance and utilization history of a particular drive, click the linked
serial number. See Viewing drive performance and utilization history (page 67).
The TapeAssure drive utilization tab lists:
Library SN (or Hostname)For drives in libraries, this column displays the serial number of
that library. For standalone drives, this column shows the hostname of the server to which the
drive is attached. Such hostname entries are highlighted with an asterisk (*).
Library Serial NumberThe HP serial number that uniquely identifies the library. Defined at
manufacture, this is the number to quote when contacting HP support.
Sample SizeThe Interface Manager samples data from the drive by retrieving key statistics
from the drive. This occurs after a tape unload, or whenever a user generates a support ticket.
A sample refers to one instance of pulling the key statistics from the drive. The sample size is
the number of times the TapeAssure feature has retrieved these key statistics within the user
selected sample time.
Utilization (%)Measure of the time that the tape drive has been pulling tape divided by the
amount of time that the tape drive has been powered on. Use this for measuring utilization
from the hardware standpoint.
Last Sample TimeThe local time when the key data was written to the database.
When a management station is reconnected to the network after more than 24 hours offline, the
utilization panel display can be inaccurate. The TapeAssure data queued up on active drives and
libraries arrives in bulk. To display a more accurate utilization, select ActionsChoose Sample
Time, and choose the next longest time frame (7 days or more).
Using TapeAssure
65
Choosing a sample time

To choose the time frame for the data samples:
1. Open the Select Sample Time window. This window can be opened from several places within
CVTL. The sample times available depend on which feature the window was opened from.
You will see one of the following windows:
66
Command View TL GUI
2.
3.
Select the sample time for the data to be retrieved from the current date and time range.
Last 24 Hours (not available for some features)
Last 7 Days and Week (not available for some features)
Last Month
Last Three Months
Last Six Months
Last Year
Custom Range: Provide a start date and end date; the start date and end date are
pre-populated with the previous month date and current date, respectively. The data will
be retrieved from 12:00 a.m. on the start date to 11:59 p.m. on the end date. The custom
range should be at least one month long.
Click OK.
Viewing drive performance and utilization history

The drive performance and utilization history panel displays the drive serial number, drive type,
library serial number, and sample time. The default sample time is one month. To view the drive
performance and utilization history of a drive, use one of the following procedures:
1. Navigate to the Drive Utilization or the Drive Performance tab.
2. Click the linked serial number. The Drive Performance and Utilization History page opens and
contains three tabs: Drive Performance, Drive Utilization, and Utilization Analysis.
Or:
1. Navigate to the Tape Utilization tab.
2. Click the linked serial number. The Tape Performance and Utilization History page opens and
contains three tabs: Tape Capacity, Tape Unloads, and Tape Performance.
3. On the Tape Capacity or the Tape Performance tab, click the drive serial number link. The
Drive Performance and Utilization History page opens and contains three tabs: Drive
Performance, Drive Utilization, and Utilization Analysis.
If the drive has not been utilized over the selected time period, no data is shown in the graphical
view.
Using TapeAssure
67
Drive Performance tab

In the Drive Performance tab, information about drive performance over the last several backups
is shown. There are two bar graphs for each day representing the native transfer rate and the host
transfer rate.
The X-Axis displays the tape's serial number and date. The serial number is a link that launches
the Tape Performance and Utilization Dialog that defaults to the Tape Performance tab. The Y-Axis
displays the transfer rate in MB/s with values ranging from 0 to 400.
Hovering over or clicking a host transfer rate data point on the graph displays a tool tip that shows
the tape serial number, barcode, and the date and time. On the Host transfer rate graph it also
shows the estimated host rate in MB/sec and the compression ratio. On the Native transfer rate
graph it also shows the native transfer rate in MB/sec.
68
Command View TL GUI
Beneath the graph, the following utilization data is shown in a table:
Barcode/serial number
Date/time
Estimated host transfer rate
Write compression ratio
Read compression ratio
Native transfer rate
Drive Utilization tab

In the Drive Utilization tab, the default time scale is Daily Average. The Daily Average scale shows
a bar graph of drive utilization per day over the selected period of time.
On the bar graph, the X-axis shows the days the drive is utilized and the Y-axis shows the drive
utilization percentage.
Using TapeAssure
69
Hovering over a data point displays a tool tip with the date and percentage of time the drive was
accessing the tape.
70
Date when the drive is utilized
Percentage Utilized how much time is been spent by the drive to pull a tape
Command View TL GUI
You can choose a new time frame for the data samples. See Choosing a sample time (page 66)
for details. To choose the time scale, click the Time Scale drop-down list on the Utilization tab and
select Per Support Ticket; information about how the drive is being utilized between two support
tickets is displayed in a line graph.
You can zoom into this graph to see yearly, monthly, weekly, and daily information.
The X-axis displays the time period; it shows the date accordingly as you zoom in and zoom out.
The Y-axis, the utilization percentage, starts from 0 to 100, with the interval of 20.
Hovering over a data point displays a tool tip with the utilization percentage (time spent pulling
a tape) and the date. The date is in MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM AM/PM format.
At the top of the main graph, a preview-graph is shown to help you visualize which part of the
total graph you are viewing by zooming. The slider will be placed below the preview-graph, which
can be used to zoom the graph yearly, monthly, weekly and daily. The date will change on the
X-axis accordingly. The minimum time period that can be zoomed in is one day. The end of the
slider displays the dates relevant for the period as they are being changed. The sliders will not
cross over.
Utilization Analysis tab
On the Utilization Analysis tab, you can select up to three drives to compare their utilization. To
generate the graph:
Using TapeAssure
71
1.
The Drive Selection section, the Select Drives table shows each library; click a library to see
the drives listed for it. Select the drives of interest and use the >> button to move them to the
Selected Drives table. You can remove a drive from the Selected Drives table using the <<
button.
2.
In the Time Scale section, you select the filter criteria (known as the computational argument)
for use in the comparison. When you choose one of the following, additional selection criteria
are provided:
72
Day of Week select a start and end date, select the days of the week of interest, then
select the time period for each day.
Command View TL GUI
3.
Daily Average this is the default. You can select the start and end dates.
Monthly Average select the start and end month and the years.
Quarterly Average select the start and end quarters and the years.
Click Plot Chart. The utilization trends are shown for the selected drives in a line graph. Beneath
the line graph, the information is displayed in a table. You can change the computational
argument by clicking Change Selection above the graph.
Using TapeAssure
73
4.
To export the report as a PDF, click Export Report at the bottom of the graph. This will allow
you to save the graph locally or email it.
NOTE:
Exporting the graph to a PDF converts the 3D bar graph to a 2D line graph.
Viewing the Performance Advisor graph

The Performance Advisor graph is a single view to get the entire picture of drive in terms of
performance and utilization for the given library and within the time frame. This helps to visualize
the status of drives regarding how they are performing and how they have been utilized for the
given time period. You can also get details for each drive and analyze details of performance and
utilization for each day for the given time interval.
To plot the Performance Advisor graph:
2. In the Navigation panel, select Performance Advisor.
3. Select the serial number of the library from the drop down box. Select the sample time from
the options provided, or create a custom range.
NOTE: The serial number of a library only appears in the drop down list if the TapeAssure
Advance License is available in the management station for that library.
4.
Click Plot Chart. The Performance Advisor graph for the selected library appears. The
Performance Advisor graph appears if there is TapeAssure data available for the particular
library for the time interval selected.
The Performance Advisor graph measures performance along the X-axis and utilization along the
Y-axis. The graph is divided into four different zones:
74
High Utilization High Performance: the drives that are at 70% and above of utilization and
performance
High Utilization Low Performance: drives that are highly utilized but their performance is
low (less than 50% of the maximum speed of writing)
Command View TL GUI
Low Utilization High performance: drives that have high performance but low utilization
(less than 50%)
Low Utilization Low Performance: drives that are neither utilized to their potential nor able
to perform to their maximum stipulated capacity
All drives which have utilization and performance values will be plotted as data points and listed
as the legend to the right of the graph. Hovering over each data point brings up a tool tip showing
how each drive performed in terms of utilization and performance in the give time interval; the
tool tip lists:
Drive serial Number the serial number of the drive. This is a static value and will change if
a drive has been replaced. Use this serial number when contacting HP support.
Drive Type the drive type including generation and interface type.
Performance (%) the performance of the drive over the time period calculated as a percentage
value.
Host Transfer Rate transfer rate of the host averaged over the data transferred to/from the
tape since the last load.
Max Transfer Rate the maximum specified native transfer rate of the drive.
Utilization (%) utilization of the drive over the time period calculate as a percentage value.
From the graph you can do several things:
Change the sample time click the Sample Time link; see Choosing a sample time (page 66)
for details on changing the sample time. You can also get there from ActionsChange sample
time or ActionsChange library and sample time.
Return to the Performance Advisor selection page by clicking the Back to selection page link.
Change the library by selecting a new library from the Library name drop down list, by
ActionsChange library, or by ActionsChange library and sample time.
NOTE: The performance advisor graph can be viewed only for the libraries having a TapeAssure
Advanced license. If there are no libraries with the Advanced License, the following message is
displayed:
NOTE: For a chosen library in given time interval, two or more drives might have exactly same
utilization and performance values. In these cases, the data points will overlap. Click these points
to launch the top-most drive detailed graph, or click the library in the legend to launch the individual
drive detailed graph.
Viewing the Collection Status

The TapeAssure Collection Status displays the libraries that are registered with the Management
Station listed by library type. It also lists those libraries managed by other management stations.
To view the Collection Status:
2. In the Navigation panel, select Collection Status.
Using TapeAssure
75
The Collection Status provides three help links for:
Configuring ESL, EML, ESL G3, or MSL6480 libraries to send TapeAssure data to this
Management Station
Configuring MSL libraries to send TapeAssure data to this Management Station
Configuring Standalone Drives for TapeAssure
Viewing drive performance and utilization graph

The drive performance and utilization graph shows performance and utilization information for a
particular drive for each day during the time interval selected. The bar graph shows three bars for
each day: native transfer rate and host transfer rate (for performance), and utilization. Beneath
the graph, the data is shown in a table.
To plot the graph, click any data point in the Performance Advisor graph or click on any of the
legends listed on the right. The Drive Performance and Utilization graph is displayed.
76
Command View TL GUI
Hovering over each bar provides the following information:
Native transfer rate
Date The date for which the native transfer rate is calculated.
Native Transfer Rate The transfer rate of the data, after compression, transferred to/from
the tape for that particular day.
Host Transfer rate
Date The date for which the host transfer rate is calculated.
Estimated Host Transfer Rate The estimated transfer rate of the host averaged over the
data transferred from the host for that particular day.
Compression Ratio The weighted average of write and read compression ratio of the
data written/read to tape for that particular day.
Utilization
Date The date for which the utilization is calculated.
Percent time spent pulling tape Measure of the time that the tape drive has been pulling
tape divided by the amount of time that the tape drive has been powered on. Use this
for measuring utilization from the hardware standpoint.
The tabular view lists all of the information above. It also provides a Sample Time link that launches
a window that allows you to select a different sample time to plot; see Choosing a sample time
(page 66) for details.
Click Export Report to export the graph as a PDF file either downloaded locally or sent by email.
Viewing detailed LTO drive information

The Drive Properties page contains detailed information about the identity, health, environment,
performance, and usage of a tape drive, along with detailed information about the last tape loaded
into the tape drive.
To open the Drive Properties page for a specific drive:
1. Select the TapeAssure tab.
2. In the Navigation panel under Drives, click Performance, Health, or Utilization to access a list
of the drives enrolled this management station.
3. Click on the drive, then select ActionsProperties.)
The default tab is whichever item was selected in the Navigation tree to list the drives. For
example, if you clicked on Performance, the Drive Properties page will open to the Performance
tab.
Using TapeAssure
77
At the top of the dialog box, above the tabs, the following information appears:
Table 18 Viewing Drive Properties
Item
Description
Drive Identification
The serial number of the drive.
Health
The current status of the drive.
Serial Number
The serial number of the drive. This is a static value and

will change if a drive has been replaced. Use the serial
number when contacting HP support.
Last Loaded Tape
The serial number and barcode of the last tape loaded

into the drive.
Last Sample Time
The time at which the last sample was taken.
This information remains visible when any tab is selected.

4.
Click the Overview tab.

The Overview page appears.
Figure 7 Drive Properties window Overview tab
Information provided on the Overview page is explained in Table 19.

Table 19 Information available from the Drive Properties window Overview tab
Item
Description
Identification
78
Drive Type
The drive type including generation and interface type.
Serial Number
The serial number of the drive. This value will change

if a drive has been replaced. Use the serial number
when contacting HP support.
Firmware Revision
The version of drive firmware the drive is currently

operating with.
Firmware Personality
An identifier that distinguishes the firmware among

multiple possible variants.
Command View TL GUI
Table 19 Information available from the Drive Properties window Overview tab (continued)
Item
Description
Configuration
5.
Data Compression
Usually set by the backup application. If enabled, the

drive will perform hardware data compression. Refer
to the backup application to configure data compression
for backups.
Media Removal
Usually set by the backup application. If prevented then

the tape cannot be removed from the drive. Normally,
media removal is enabled after the backup is complete
but if the backup aborts it is possible that media removal
will still be prevented. Refer to HP support documentation
for resolution.
Negotiated SCSI Burst Rate property
The negotiated SCSI data rate.
Click the Health tab.

The Health page appears.
Figure 8 Drive Properties window Health tab
Information provided on the Health page is explained in Table 20 (page 79).

Table 20 Information available from the Drive Properties window Health tab
Item
Description
Read/Write health (last loaded tape)

Write Health
A measure of the amount of tape used to write high

quality data to the last loaded tape with the amount of
data written to the tape since it was last loaded.
Even if the warning is reported, the data will still have
been written at high quality (unless the drive reported
an error) but more tape was used than recommended
by HP. A warning will normally trigger an alert. If
Using TapeAssure
79
Table 20 Information available from the Drive Properties window Health tab (continued)
Item
Description
appropriate, maintenance recommendations are made,
such as to clean the drive and/or replace the tape. HP
recommends the use of HP media for maximum
confidence.
Read Health
A measure of the ease with which data was read back

from the most recently loaded tape with the amount of
data read from the tape since it was last loaded.
Even if the warning is given, the data will have been
read back correctly (unless the drive reported an error)
but more error correction was required than
recommended. Note that a warning will normally trigger
an alert. If appropriate, maintenance recommendations
are made such as to clean the drive and/or replace the
tape. HP recommends the use of HP media for maximum
confidence.
Drive Life
Head Life
An estimate of the percentage of remaining head life

based on the amount of tape passed over the head
compared with worst case life expectancy testing in a
clean environment. HP recommends HP media for
increased head life.
If a life warning is shown, the drive should be replaced
at the next maintenance period. HP recommends HP
media for increased head life.
Reposition Life
An estimate of the percentage of remaining reposition

life based on the number of changes in direction of the
tape over the life of the drive compared with the worst
case life expectancy in a clean environment. HP
recommends HP media for increased reposition life.
media for increased reposition life.
Load/Unload Life
An estimate of the percentage of remaining drive

load/unload life based on the number of load/unload
cycles over the life of the drive compared with worst
case life expectancy testing in a clean environment. HP
recommends HP media for increased load/unload life.
media for increased load/unload life.
Device Analysis
Result
6.
Click the Environment tab.

The Environment page appears.
80
Command View TL GUI
The results of the last analysis of the drive.
Figure 9 Advanced LTO Drive Properties Environment tab
Information provided on the Environment page is explained in Table 21 (page 81).

Table 21 Information available from the Drive Properties window Environment tab
Item
Description
Internal Temperature
Current Temperature
The current temperature reported by the sensor located

on the drive controller board. The current temperature
value will be significantly higher than ambient
temperature but dependent on it, as well as drive usage
and air flow. The algorithm that assesses whether the
drive is in specification takes account of the location of
the sensor and uses that to estimate the thermal
conditions of the tape path.
If a warning is shown, the airflow for the drive should
be improved. If this cannot be corrected, contact HP
support. Note that a warning will normally trigger an
alert.
Max Temperature (since last power cycle)
The maximum operational temperature reported by the

sensor located on the drive controller board since the
last power cycle with an assessment of whether the
maximum temperature of the tape path is within
specification. The maximum temperature value will be
significantly higher than ambient temperature but
dependent on it as well as drive usage and air flow.
The algorithm that assesses whether the drive is in
specification takes account of the location of the sensor
and uses that to estimate the thermal conditions of the
tape path.
alert.
Using TapeAssure
81
7.
Click the Performance tab.

The Performance page appears.
Figure 10 Drive Properties window Performance tab
Information provided on the Performance page is explained in Table 22 (page 82).

Table 22 Information available from the Drive Properties window Performance tab
Item
Description
Data Transfer
Estimated Host Transfer Rate
The estimated transfer rate of the host averaged over

the data transferred to/from the tape since the last load.
Media Transfer Rate
The actual, measured native transfer rate with that drive

and tape.
Maximum Media Transfer Rate
The Maximum Media Transfer Rate is determined by

the drive type and represents the maximum native
transfer rate specified for that drive type.
Compression
8.
Write Compression Ratio
The average write compression ratio of the data written

to tape since the last load.
Read Compression Ratio
The average read compression ratio of the data read

from tape since the last load.
Click the Usage tab.

The Usage page appears.
82
Command View TL GUI
Figure 11 Drive Properties window Usage tab
Information provided on the Usage page is explained in Table 23 (page 83).

Table 23 Information available from the Drive Properties window Usage tab
Item
Description
Usage Statistics
Power On Time
Total power on time of the drive since it was

manufactured.
Tape Pulled
Total tape pulled through the drive expressed in terms

of the equivalent number of full volume writes or reads.
Load/unload Cycles
Total number of tape loads for the drive since it was

new.
Percent Tape Loaded
A comparison of the time the tape was in the drive with

the time since the time it was loaded and the following
tape load expressed as a percentage. For example, if
the time between the two tape loads was 4 hours and
this tape was in the drive for the first hour of that time
then the tape loaded percent will be 25%. Use this for
measuring utilization of the drive from the application
standpoint.
Duty Cycle
Duty cycle of the drive since the last tape load. This is
a comparison of the time the drive has been active with
the time since the last tape load expressed as a
percentage. For example, if the last tape load was 4
hours ago and the drive has been active for 3 hours
since then, the duty cycle will be 75%. Use this for
measuring utilization from the hardware standpoint.
Power Cycles
Number of drive power cycles since the drive was

manufactured.
Using TapeAssure
83
Table 23 Information available from the Drive Properties window Usage tab (continued)
9.
Item
Description
Cleans
Number of times the drive has been cleaned since it

was manufactured.
Firmware Upgrades
The number of times the drive has been updated with

firmware.
Click the Last Loaded Tape tab.

The Last Loaded Tape page appears.
Figure 12 Drive Properties window Last Loaded Tape tab
Information provided on the Last Loaded Tape page is explained in Table 24 (page 85).
84
Command View TL GUI
Table 24 Information available from the Drive Properties window Last Loaded Tape tab
Item
Description
Identity
Barcode
The reference defined within the user environment to

identify the cartridge. This is the most useful reference
for normal use as it should be visible within the
application and is usually found on a printed label on
the front of the cartridge. It is different from the cartridge
serial number, which is defined at manufacture and
used by HP support. Click the hyperlink on the barcode
itself to access the LTO Tape Properties window for the
specific tape. See Table 26 (page 89).
Serial number
The serial number that uniquely identifies the last

cartridge loaded in the drive and which is defined
during the manufacture of that cartridge. Reference this
number when contacting HP support. It can be found
on the bottom of the cartridge though it may be difficult
to read. The cartridge may also have a barcode, which
is defined within the user environment and not usable
by HP support.
Format
The data format supported by the cartridge.
Capacity
The native (post compression) capacity of the cartridge

in GB. The pre-compressed capacity is also given
assuming a 2:1 compression ratio, which is an estimate
for 'typical' data. The actual capacity of the cartridge
will vary depending on the compression ratio of the
data written.
Vendor
The manufacturer of the cartridge.
Configuration
WORM
Indicates whether this is a WORM cartridge - Write

Once Read Many. Data written to these cartridges
cannot be overwritten or erased.
Encrypted Data
Indicates whether the cartridge contains encrypted data

or not.
Health
Worst case data (entire tape)
The amount of tape used to write to the tape. This

measurement is averaged across the entire tape.
Data written by last drive
The amount of tape used to write high quality data to

the last loaded tape.
Even if a warning is reported, the data will still have
an error). The warning lets you know that more tape
was used to write the data than is recommended by HP.
A warning will normally trigger an alert.
If appropriate, maintenance recommendations are
made, for example to clean the drive and/or replace
the tape.
Life
Read/Write Life
An assessment of whether the cartridge read/write life

remaining is within specification followed by an estimate
of the remaining cartridge read/write life.
Based on the amount of tape pulled over drive heads
compared with HP recommended tape life (normally
expressed in terms of 'full volume equivalents' which is
Using TapeAssure
85
Table 24 Information available from the Drive Properties window Last Loaded Tape tab
(continued)
Item
Description
the volume of data needed to completely fill a tape). If
a life warning is shown, the cartridge should be retired
An estimate of the percentage of remaining read/write
life of the cartridge. Based on the amount of tape pulled
over drive heads compared with HP recommended tape
life (normally expressed in terms of full volume
equivalents,which is the volume of data needed to
completely fill a tape). When this figure reaches 0%,
the cartridge should be retired.
Load/Unload Life
An assessment of whether the cartridge load/unload

life remaining is within specification followed by an
estimate of the remaining load/unload life.
Based on the number of load/unload cycles compared
with HP recommendation. If a life warning is shown,
the cartridge should be retired at the next maintenance
period. HP recommends HP media for increased
load/unload life.
An estimate of the percentage or remaining load/unload
life of the cartridge based on the number of
loads/unloads compared with HP recommendation.
When this figure reaches 0%, the cartridge should be
retired.
Usage
Native Capacity
The maximum capacity of the tape.
Native Capacity Used
The amount of data stored on the tape.
Native Capacity Remaining
The capacity remaining on the tape after the exclusion

of the used capacity.
Total Tape Pulled
The total tape pulled expressed in terms of the equivalent

number of full-volume writes or reads.
Load/Unloads
The number of load and unload operations the drive

has performed over the life of the drive.
Temperature
Maximum internal drive temperature
The maximum operational temperature of the sensor

located on the controller board of the drive the tape
was loaded in followed by an assessment of whether
this temperature is within specification.
The temperature value will be significantly higher than
ambient temperature but dependent on it, as well as on
drive usage and air flow. The algorithm that assesses
whether the drive is in specification takes account of the
location of the sensor and uses that to estimate the
thermal conditions of the tape path. A warning reported
here should be considered as a warning that the
temperature of the tape path has exceeded
recommended limits and the airflow of the drive should
be investigated.
alert for the drive at the time so the alert log can be
checked to identify the drive.
86
Command View TL GUI
Using the Tapes Content panel

The Content panel displays tape information and enables you to change the status of a tape by
performing the following procedure:
1. Select the TapeAssure tab.
2. In the Navigation panel under Data Tapes, click Content to access a list all of the tapes in the
libraries that are enrolled in the management station.
The Content panel displays the following information for each drive:
Tape StatusThe current status or availability of a tape. Possible values are Available,
Vaulted and Retired. Available tapes are those currently residing in a tape library and
available for use.
BarcodeThe external barcode on the tape cartridge.
Tape Serial NumberThe serial number that uniquely identifies the tape cartridge. Defined
by the tape manufacturer.
Library SN (or Hostname)For tapes in libraries, this column displays the serial number
of that library. For tapes being used by standalone drives, this column shows the hostname
of the server to which the drive is attached. Such hostname entries are highlighted with
an asterisk (*).
Cartridge TypeThe vendor ID and data format supported by the cartridge.
FormatThe data format supported by the cartridge.
PartitionedIndicates whether the cartridge has been partitioned or not.
Partition 0 Native Capacity (Free/Total) The maximum capacity of partition 0 of the

tape.
Partition 1 Native Capacity (Free/Total)The maximum capacity of partition 1 of the

tape.
Encrypted DataIndicates whether the cartridge contains encrypted data or not.
WORMIndicates whether this is a WORM cartridgeWrite Once Read Many. Data

written to these cartridges cannot be overwritten or erased.
NOTE: In the Library SN column, an * marks hostnames with standalone drives. Other entries
are tape library serial numbers.
Using TapeAssure
87
3.
To search for a specific tape:

a. Select ActionsSearch to display the Search dialog box.
b.
Type or select the appropriate search criteria. For example, type the appropriate
information in the Tape Serial Number or Barcode field.
Use more than one of the criteria to further narrow the search. For example, select the
appropriate library from the Choose Library field and select Yes in the Choose Partitioned
field to display only partitioned tapes in the specified library.
Click OK.
4.
You can change the status of tapes to Available, Vaulted, or Retired to indicate intent, and to
have Command View TL display the tapes closer to the top (available) or bottom (vaulted,
then retired) of the list. This will help make the list easier to use bacause the Available tapes,
the tapes you will work with most often, will remain at the top of the list. To change the status
of one or more tapes:
NOTE: The status of a vaulted or retired tape remains until you change it back manually, or
until a support ticket is created for that tape. At that point, the status is reset to Available.
5.
To view properties of a specific tape, click on or check the box next to the tapes, then select
ActionsProperties.)
NOTE: Although you can choose more than one tape, the Properties action will display
information for the most recently-selected tape only .
The LTO Tape Properties dialog box appears, and displays the Health tab.
88
Command View TL GUI
At the top of the dialog box, above the tabs, the following information appears:
Table 25 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties dialog box
Item
Description
Tape identification
Identifies the tape cartridge ID and media format.
Health
The current status of the drive.
Cartridge ID
Identifies the tape by serial number and barcode.
Media Format
Identifies the data format supported by the tape.
Last Used Drive
Identifies the most recent drive in which the tape was

used.
Last Sample Time
This information remains visible when any tab is selected.

6.
Click the Overview tab to view the general information about the selected tape.
Table 26 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties window Overview tab
Item
Description
Status
For tapes in libraries, this column displays the serial

number of that library. For tapes being used by
standalone drives, this column shows the hostname of
the server to which the drive is attached. Such hostname
entries are highlighted with an asterisk (*).
In Drive?
Indicates whether the tape is in a drive or not.
Identity
Barcode
The external barcode on the tape cartridge.
Using TapeAssure
89
Table 26 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties window Overview tab (continued)
Item
Description
Serial Number
The serial number that uniquely identifies the tape

cartridge. Defined by the tape manufacturer.
Format
Identifies the data format supported by the tape.
Vendor
The manufacturer of the cartridge.
Capacity
Configuration
7.
Encrypted Data
Indicates whether the cartridge contains encrypted data

or not.
WORM
Indicates whether this is a WORM cartridgeWrite

Once Read Many. Data written to these cartridges
cannot be overwritten or erased.
Click the Health tab to view the following information about the selected tape.
Table 27 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties window Health tab
Item
Description
Health
Effective Capacity (Average)
The average quality of write operations for a tape,

based on one write pass of the tape (in either the
forward or reverse direction).
Effective Capacity (Worst Case)
The lowest value for write operations of the tape, based

on one write pass.
Life
90
Command View TL GUI
Table 27 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties window Health tab (continued)
Item
Description
Load/Unload Life

load/unload life.
retired.
Read/Write Life

Maximum internal drive temperature
8.
The maximum operational temperature of the sensor that

is located on the controller board of the drive in which
the tape was loaded, and whether that temperature is
within specifications.
Click the Performance tab to view the following information about the selected tape.
Using TapeAssure
91
Table 28 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties window Performance tab
Item
Description
Data Transfer
Estimated Host Transfer Rate
The estimated transfer rate of the host averaged over

the data transferred to/from the tape since the last load.
Media Transfer Rate
The transfer rate of the data, after compression,

transferred to/from the tape since the last load.
Compression
9.
92
Write Compression Ratio
The average write compression ratio of the data written

to tape since the last load.
Read Compression Ratio
The average read compression ratio of the data read

from tape since the last load.
Last Sample Time
Click the Usage tab to view the following information about the selected tape.
Command View TL GUI
Table 29 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties window Usage tab
Item
Description
Usage
Native Capacity
Native Capacity Used
The amount of data stored on the tape.
Load/Unloads
The number of load and unload operations the drive

has performed over the life of the drive.
Load/Unload Life

load/unload life.
retired.
Read/Write Life

Using TapeAssure
93
Table 29 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties window Usage tab (continued)
Item
Description
Last Sample Time
10. Click the Last Used Drive tab to view the following information about the selected tape.
Table 30 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties window Last Used Drive tab
Item
Description
Identity
94
Barcode
The external barcode on the tape cartridge. Click on

the barcode itself to access the LTO Tape Properties
window for the specific tape. See Table 26 (page 89).
Serial number
The serial number that uniquely identifies the tape

cartridge. Defined by the tape manufacturer.
Drive Type
The type of drive last used, including generation and

interface type.
For tapes in libraries, this column displays the serial

number of that library. For tapes being used by
standalone drives, this column shows the hostname of
the server to which the drive is attached. Such hostname
entries are highlighted with an asterisk (*).
Firmware Revision
The version of drive firmware the drive is currently

operating with.
Command View TL GUI
(continued)
Item
Description
Firmware Personality
An identifier that distinguishes the firmware among

multiple possible variants.
Configuration
Data Compression
Usually set by the backup application. If enabled, the

drive will perform hardware data compression. Refer
to the backup application to configure data compression
for backups.
Media Removal (application controller)
Usually set by the backup application. If prevented then

the tape cannot be removed from the drive. Normally,
media removal is enabled after the backup is complete
but if the backup aborts it is possible that media removal
will still be prevented. Refer to HP support documentation
for resolution.
Read/Write health (last loaded tape)

Write Health
A measure of the amount of tape used to write high

quality data to the last loaded tape with the amount of
data written to the tape since it was last loaded.
Even if the warning is reported, the data will still have
an error) but more tape was used than recommended
by HP. A warning will normally trigger an alert. If
appropriate, maintenance recommendations are made,
such as to clean the drive and/or replace the tape. HP
recommends the use of HP media for maximum
confidence.
Read Health
A measure of the ease with which data was read back

from the most recently loaded tape with the amount of
data read from the tape since it was last loaded.
Even if the warning is given, the data will have been
read back correctly (unless the drive reported an error)
but more error correction was required than
recommended. Note that a warning will normally trigger
an alert. If appropriate, maintenance recommendations
are made such as to clean the drive and/or replace the
tape. HP recommends the use of HP media for maximum
confidence.
Drive Life
Head Life
An estimate of the percentage of remaining head life

based on the amount of tape passed over the head
compared with worst case life expectancy testing in a
clean environment. HP recommends HP media for
increased head life.
media for increased head life.
Reposition Life
An estimate of the percentage of remaining reposition

life based on the number of changes in direction of the
tape over the life of the drive compared with the worst
case life expectancy in a clean environment. HP
recommends HP media for increased reposition life.
media for increased reposition life.
Using TapeAssure
95
(continued)
Item
Description
Load/Unload Life
An estimate of the percentage of remaining drive

load/unload life based on the number of load/unload
cycles over the life of the drive compared with worst
case life expectancy testing in a clean environment. HP
recommends HP media for increased load/unload life.
Usage Statistics
Power On Time
Total power on time of the drive since it was

manufactured.
Tape Pulled
Total tape pulled through the drive expressed in terms

of the equivalent number of full volume writes or reads.
Load/Unload Cycles
Total number of tape loads for the drive since it was

new.
Percent Tape Loaded
A comparison of the time the tape was in the drive with

the time since the time it was loaded and the following
tape load expressed as a percentage. For example, if
the time between the two tape loads was 4 hours and
this tape was in the drive for the first hour of that time
then the tape loaded percent will be 25%. Use this for
measuring utilization of the drive from the application
standpoint.
Duty Cycles
Duty cycle of the drive since the last tape load. This is
a comparison of the time the drive has been active with
the time since the last tape load expressed as a
percentage. For example, if the last tape load was 4
hours ago and the drive has been active for 3 hours
since then, the duty cycle will be 75%. Use this for
measuring utilization from the hardware standpoint.
Power Cycles
Number of drive power cycles since the drive was

manufactured.
Cleans
Number of times the drive has been cleaned since it

was manufactured.
Firmware Upgrades
The number of times the drive has been updated with

firmware.
Internal Temperature
Current Temperature
The current temperature reported by the sensor located

on the drive controller board. The current temperature
value will be significantly higher than ambient
temperature but dependent on it, as well as drive usage
and air flow. The algorithm that assesses whether the
drive is in specification takes account of the location of
the sensor and uses that to estimate the thermal
conditions of the tape path.
alert.
Max Temperature (since last power cycle)
96
Command View TL GUI
The maximum operational temperature reported by the

sensor located on the drive controller board since the
last power cycle with an assessment of whether the
(continued)
Item
Description
maximum temperature of the tape path is within
specification. The maximum temperature value will be
significantly higher than ambient temperature but
dependent on it as well as drive usage and air flow.
The algorithm that assesses whether the drive is in
specification takes account of the location of the sensor
and uses that to estimate the thermal conditions of the
tape path.
alert.
11. Click Close to exit the Drive Properties window.
Viewing tape health

The TapeAssure tape health panel lists:
Tape StatusThe current status or availability of a tape. Possible values are Available, Vaulted
and Retired. Available tapes are those currently residing in a tape library and available for
use.
Library SN (or Hostname*) For tapes in libraries, this column displays the serial number of
that library. For tapes being used by standalone drives, this column shows the hostname of
the server to which the drive is attached. Such hostname entries are highlighted with an asterisk
(*).
Overall HealthAn Overall Health icon and a details link allow you to view the Tape Health
and Life graphs and tabular data.
Read/Write Life (%Life Remaining)Remaining Read/Write life of the cartridge as a

percentage.
Load/Unload Life (%Life Remaining)Remaining Load/Unload life of the cartridge as a

percentage of its recommended life.
Max Internal TemperatureMaximum temperature encountered by the cartridge during its

lifetime (while in a drive).
Effective CapacityA measure of the amount of tape used to write high quality data to the
tape over its lifetime. Even if a warning is reported, the data will still have been written at
high quality (unless the tape reported an error), though more tape was used to do so than
recommended by HP. Note that a warning will normally trigger an alert. If appropriate,
maintenance recommendations are made, such as checking for Write Quality problems with
drives, or retiring the tape.
Service ActionA recommendation for service based on the health criteria. More than one
service action may apply; hover over the entry with the mouse to see a tool tip containing all
recommended service actions for the drive.
NOTE: In the Library SN column, an asterisk (*) marks hostnames with standalone drives. Other
entries are tape library serial numbers.
Using TapeAssure
97
For information on searching for a specific tape, see Searching for a specific tape (page 107).
Viewing Tape Health and Life

The Tape Health and Life shows the recent health history of a particular tape. Library administrator
can view health related information including a graph showing what the tape health has been
across the last several backups over multiple drives. In addition, you can drill down into the recent
health history of any drives that used that tape. This helps determine if there is a problem with the
tape or with a particular drive that has been using it.
To view the Viewing Tape Health and Life:
2. In the Navigation panel under Data Tapes, select Health. A list of all of the tapes appears.
Alternatively, in the Navigation panel under Dashboard, select Drives and Tapes Needing
Attention. A list of all tapes that need attention (in a critical or warning state) appears.
3.
4.
Click on the tape, then select ActionsProperties, or double click the row, to launch the tape
properties.
Click the Overall Health link to open the tape health graphs.
The Tape Health/Life window displays the following:
Tape Barcode/Serial Number
Overall Health calculated based on the recent worst status of the tape health parameters
TapeRWLifeQual, Load/UnLoad Life, Max Internal Temperature, and Effective Capacity
Effective Capacity/Max Internal Temperature based on the last backup
Write Health tab

The Write Health tab shows the write health history of the tapes across the last several backups
and over multiple drives as both a graph and a table.
On the graph, the red, yellow, and green bands represent the critical, warning, and healthy status,
respectively, of the tape write health. The X-axis represents the drive serial number and the Y-axis
represents the effective capacity of the tape.
98
Command View TL GUI
The table displays the drive serial number, the date/time, and the effective capacity of the tape.
Use the Sample Time to filter the write health history for the tape loaded onto multiple drives between
the specified time intervals. In addition, each drive serial number is a link to the drive write health
history.
to save the graph locally or email it. You can also export only the graphs or the complete report.
Life tab
A set of parameters decide the life of a tape and they deteriorate over time due to wear and tear.
Each backup leads to the generation of a Support Ticket that contains information about the quality
of the backup. These life parameters keep reducing with each backup. The Life tab shows the trend
of deterioration of the life parameters and recommends the action to be taken before the tape
becomes unusable.
The following are the life parameters of a tape and are compared to the HP recommended
specification:
TapeLoadLife the remaining load/unload life of the cartridge as a percentage
TapeReadWriteLife the remaining read/write life of the cartridge as a percentage
A simple regression is done on the historical data that the management station has collected over
a period of time for these life parameters. As a result, there is a trend line for each parameter. The
trend line with a greater slope value indicates that the parameter is deteriorating at a faster pace
than the others and determines the life of the tape (this parameter leads to the tape being unusable
faster than the other parameters). The screen displays the trend line of the parameter that is
degrading at the fastest pace. The trend line is then extrapolated to know when this parameter
would become 0 in time; based on this date, a set of recommendations are made for this tape.
There are three kinds of messages for the life of a tape:
Tape is at the end of its recommended life if any of the tapes life parameters are already
less than or equal to 0 based on last sample date
Tape is nearing the end of its recommended service life when tape life trend data for <tape
serial number> indicates the tape will reach the end of its serviceable life within the next six
months
Tape is within the recommended serviceable life when tape life trend data for <tape serial
number> indicates the tape will not reach the end of its serviceable life within the next six
months
Using TapeAssure
99
NOTE: All the analysis and recommendations are based on the date when the last support ticket
was received by the management station for a particular tape/drive.
Viewing tape utilization
The TapeAssure tape utilization panel lists:
Tape StatusThe current status or availability of a tape. Possible values are Available, Vaulted,
and Retired. Available tapes are those currently residing in a tape library and available for
use.
Library Serial NumberFor tapes in libraries, this column displays the serial number of that
library. For tapes being used by standalone drives, this column shows the hostname of the
server to which the drive is attached. Such hostname entries are highlighted with an asterisk
(*).
Loads/Unloads (In Sample Time)The number of times this tape has been loaded into a drive
in the specified time period.
Data Written (In Sample Time) The amount of data written to the tape during the selected
time window.
Data Read (In Sample Time)The amount of data read from the tape during the selected time
window.
Capacity Used (At last sample)Amount of the native capacity that contains data.
Last Sample TimeThe time at which the last sample was taken.
To view the media performance and utilization history of a particular tape, click the linked serial
number. See Viewing the tape utilization and performance history (page 101).
When a management station is reconnected to the network after more than 24 hours offline, the
utilization panel display can be inaccurate. The TapeAssure data queued up on active drives and
libraries arrives in bulk. To display a more accurate utilization, select ActionsChoose Sample
Time, and choose the next longest time frame (7 days or more). See Choosing a sample time
(page 66) for details.
Viewing the tape utilization and performance history

The tape utilization and performance history panel displays the media format, drive type, library
serial number, and sample time. The default sample time is one month. To view the tape utilization
and performance history of a tape, use one of the following procedures:
1. Navigate to the Tape Utilization tab.
2. Click the linked serial number. The Tape Utilization and Performance History page opens and
contains three tabs: Tape Capacity, Tape Unloads, and Tape Performance.
Or:
1. Navigate to the Drive Utilization or the Drive Performance tab.
2. Click the linked serial number. The Drive Performance and Utilization History page opens and
contains three tabs: Drive Performance, Drive Utilization, and Utilization Analysis.
3. Click the linked tape serial number. The Tape Utilization and Performance History page opens
and contains three tabs: Tape Capacity, Tape Unloads, and Tape Performance.
If the tape has not been utilized over the selected time period, no data is shown in the graphical
view.
Tape Capacity tab
The Tape Capacity tab displays a bar graph showing how much tape is being used (the percentage
full) by a particular drive. The X-axis is the drive serial number; each serial number is a link to the
Drive History page with the Drive Performance tab selected. The Y-axis is the number of uploads.
Using TapeAssure
101
Hovering over a bar shows a tool tip of the drive serial number, date, and percentage of the tape
full.
Beneath the graph, a table displays the serial number of the drive where the tape was used, the
date/time, and the percentage full.
Tape Unloads tab
The Tape Unloads tab provides a bar graph showing how many times the tape is loaded and
unloaded. The X-axis is the date on which the tape was unloaded, and the Y-axis is the percentage
full from 0 to 100 in increments of 20.
Hovering over a bar shows a tool tip of the date and number of unloads.
Beneath the graph is a table showing the date the tape was unloaded in the drive and the number
of unloads.
Tape Performance tab
The Tape Performance tab, information about how the tape performed historically with each drive
is shown.There are two bar graphs for each day representing the native transfer rate and the host
transfer rate.
The X-Axis displays the tape's serial number and date. The serial number is a link that launches
the Drive Performance and Utilization dialog that defaults to the Drive Performance tab. The Y-Axis
displays the transfer rate in MB/s.
Using TapeAssure 103
Hovering over or clicking a host transfer rate data point on the graph displays a tool tip that shows
the tape serial number, barcode, and the date and time. On the Host transfer rate graph it also
shows the estimated host rate in MB/sec and the compression ratio. On the Native transfer rate
graph it also shows the native transfer rate in MB/sec.
Serial number
Date/time
Estimated host transfer rate
Write compression ratio
Read compression ratio
Media transfer rate
to save the graph locally or email it.
NOTE:
Exporting the graph to a PDF converts the 3D bar graph to a 2D line graph.
Launching the Newly Added Tapes graph

The Newly Added Tapes graph allows you to view the number of new tapes used per time period
plotted over a longer time period. New tapes means any tapes that have been added to this
Command View TL Management Station (MS). This could include tapes that have never been used
or used tapes that are new to this MS in the user-defined time range. There are a number of uses
for this information:
Knowing a run-rate for tapes added so you know when to place orders for new tapes
Planning and budgeting for additional tapes
Seeing patterns of the tapes being added in a month or week
Keeping control of the total tapes that are used in the data center/library
Analyzing if the number of tapes used is in line with the data that is written
To launch the Newly Added Tapes graph, in the Navigation panel select TapeAssureData
TapesNewly Added. This opens the graph showing data for Last One Year by default.
NOTE: This shows the newly added tapes only for the libraries having a TapeAssure Advanced
License. If there are no libraries with the Advanced License, the following message is displayed:
On the graph:
The Newly Added graph (left vertical axis, in blue) is a column graph showing the number of
new tapes added over the selected time period (the default is One Year). If there is less than
two years of data, the graph is grouped by weeks; if there is less than two years of data, the
graph is grouped by month and year.
The Total Added graph (right vertical axis, in green) is a line graph showing the total number
of tapes added over the selected time period (the default is One Year). If there is less than
two years of data, the graph is grouped by weeks; if there is less than two years of data, the
graph is grouped by month and year.
Slider and Zoom Effect: a small replica of the original graph is shown at the top. Use the slider
at the bottom to select a particular portion of the graph to zoom into. This is reflected in the
bigger graph, and the horizontal axes adjusts accordingly to analyze the data for a smaller
time period.
Tool Tips: Hover over the preview graph or the actual graph to see tool tip that shows the
week (less than two years of data) or month (more than two years of data) start date of the
data.
You can change the sample time from the top bar (under the Actions menu) using the predetermined
times or by setting a custom range. In addition, you can select a specific library from the drop-down
box.
The top bar also allows you to refresh, print, and export to PDF the graph. The Actions menu allows
you to refresh the graph and export the report.
NOTE: Although the start and end dates of the graph run for the entire week or month, only the
data within the selected time period is retrieved. For example, in the week labeled 09/04/2011
to 09/10/2011, if the selected time period begins on 09/08/2011 then only data for the 8th,
9th, and 10th is contained in that week.
If the selected time period is greater than 104 weeks, the data in the graph is grouped by months.
Otherwise, it is grouped in weeks.
Figure 13 Sample Time Range is Less than Two Years
Figure 14 Sample Time Range is More than Two Years
Searching for a specific tape

To search for a specific tape:
1. Select ActionsSearch to display the Search dialog box.
2. Type or select the appropriate search criteria. For example, type the appropriate information
in the Tape Serial Number or Barcode field.
Use more than one of the criteria to further narrow the search. For example, select the
appropriate library from the Choose Library field, select Cartridge type and Media vendor
field to display specified tapes.
3.
Click OK.
Viewing information about the Cleaning Tapes

Information about cleaning tapes is compiled and reported by TapeAssure. To access the cleaning
tapes information or to change the status of a cleaning tape, in the Navigation panel, under
Cleaning Tapes, select Life.
The Life screen lists all cleaning tapes, and the following information:
Tape StatusIndicates whether the tape is Available or Retired.
BarcodeThe external barcode on the cleaning tape cartridge.
Tape Serial NumberThe serial number that uniquely identifies the cleaning tape cartridge.
Defined by the tape manufacturer.
Library SNThe HP serial number that uniquely identifies the library.
Drive SNThe serial number that uniquely identifies the drive in which the cleaning tape is
currently located.
Last UsedThe time at which the cleaning tape was last used.
Cleans RemainingIndicates the number of times the cleaning tape can be successfully used
to perform a cleaning.
Status DescriptionBased on the number of uses remaining for the cleaning tape, appropriate
messages are displayed in this field. If there are 5 or fewer uses remaining on the cleaning
tape, the message indicates the tape should be replaced soon. If there are no uses remaining,
the message indicated the tape must be replaced now.
You can change the status of cleaning tapes to Retired to indicate intent, and to have Command
View TL display the tapes closer to the bottom of the list. This makes the list easier to use, as the
Available tapes, the tapes you work with most often, remain at the top of the list. To change the
status of a cleaning tape:
1. Select the box next to the appropriate cleaning tape or tapes.
If no tape is selected, the Change Tape Status Error dialog box displays. Click OK to clear
the dialog box, then select a tape or tapes.
2.
Click ActionsChange Tape StatusRetired.
NOTE: The status of a retired cleaning tape remains until a support ticket is created for that tape.
At that time, the status is automatically reset to Available unless there are 0 cleanings remaining
on the tape.
TIP: To apply a filter to a group of drives, type the pattern filter criteria in the filter text box
provided on the toolbar and click Apply the filter string entered at left.
For example, to search for LTO-5 cartridges, enter LTO-5 in the filter text and click Filter.
To clear the filter, click Clear filter string.
Exporting Library Data to CSV via TapeAssure

You can export the TapeAssure data collected by the current management station to a
comma-separated-value file (.csv) and then use that data to generate charts and reports with a
spreadsheet program or custom scripts.
To export TapeAssure data:
2. Click OperationsExport Library Data to CSV and then click ActionsExport to CSV.
3. Read the information, then click Next.
4. In the Select Libraries section, do one of the following:
Select Export everything present in the MDS database.
Select Choose libraries currently managed by the management station, then select the
box or boxes next to the appropriate libraries in the table.
Use the Select All or Clear All buttons, if needed.
5.
In the Select Time Frame section, select the time frame for the export, either by selecting a time
period in the For field, or by specifying a time frame in the Date Range field.
6. Click Next.
7. Browse to a location for the exported data to be placed.
8. Accept the file name suggested in the File Name field or specify a new one.
9. Make the appropriate choice in the Files of Type field.
10. Click Next.
11. Verify the information in the Export Library Data Summary, then click Finish.
12. Click OK in the Data Export Successful dialog box.
Exporting TapeAssure panels as PDF files

The following TapeAssure panels can be exported as PDF files for offline analysis:
Dashboard
Performance Advisor
Collection status
Drives (Health, Performance, Utilization)
Data Tapes (Content, Health, Utilization, Newly added)
Cleaning Tapes life
Specific drive performance and utilization
Drive health and life
Tape health and life
Drive performance and utilization history
Tape utilization and performance history
Drives and tapes needing attention
Library Tape Assure Tabular view (Overview and Usage)
Moves per library
Unused slots per library
To generate PDF reports:

1. Navigate to the specific panel for which you want a report.
2. Do one of the following:
3.
Click the Export button on the button bar
Select ActionsExport Report
Click Export Report on the panel (available only in pop-up panels)
Choose the export options.
4.
110
Export type:
Select Export Complete Report for detailed report (default)
Select Export Chart Only to save only charts
Save or Email:
Select Save to Local System to save the report locally (default)
Select Send a Copy as Email to email the report
Press Ok to continue.
Command View TL GUI
5.
If you selected Save to Local System, click Ok when asked to save the file locally.
If you selected Send a Copy to Email, enter the additional details and click Ok.
Email Sent can be customized using the Customize email checkbox.
You can save for future use all the email addresses entered using the Save email addresses
checkbox.
Additional items to note:
Export report will export only the graphs that have a minimum of three data points. In the
exported PDF file, graphs with less than the minimum will show the message, Data not
available/Insufficient data.
The default file names are:
Complete report: TA__<Feature>_<Drive/Lib/Tape

identifier>_HHMM_MMDDYYY.pdf
Charts only: TA_<Feature>_<Drive/Lib/Tape

identifier>_HHMM_MMDDYYY_charts.pdf
Ensure the file is saved with the .pdf extension when saving to local system.
If there is a problem saving the PDF file to the local system, a message is displayed to choose
a different location.
If you selected both Save to Local System and Send a Copy to Email, you will be prompted
to save the file locally first and then email.
SMTP must be configured to send PDF report as email.
The Save email addresses checkbox saves the email IDs on the local system and will not be
shared across browsers or other systems.
Using TapeAssure
111
Scheduling a Library Data Export via TapeAssure

You can schedule data to be exported from a specific library one time or on a recurring schedule.
To schedule a data export:
2. In the Navigation panel under Operations, select Export to CSV.
3. Select ActionsSchedule Library Data Export.
The Schedule Library Data Export dialog box appears.
Figure 15 Viewing the Schedule Library Data Export dialog box
4.
5.
6.
Enable the scheduler if it is not already enabled.

Select the time at which the save will occur.
Select the start and end dates. Select No End Date for a one time report or to have reports
exported for an indefinite time period.
7. Select a repeat interval.
8. If you selected a Weekly repeat interval, select the day of the week for the report.
9. In the Select Destination Path section, select the destination directory for the reports, either by
selecting the Default Path option, or by selecting New Path and typing the appropriate
destination directory in the field.
10. Click OK.
11. Click OK again, in the Scheduler configuration Successful dialog box.
Analyzing TapeAssure data from CSV files using the TapeAssure Analysis Template
The TapeAssure Analysis Template uses data exported from Command View TL to create graphs
and tables that help backup administrators answer important questions about drive and media
health, performance, and utilization. Over thirty pre-defined graphs and tables display write and
read margin, host and native data transfer rates, megabytes read and written, write and read
compression ratios, drive unloads, drive utilization percentages, and media capacity. These metrics
can be analyzed by drive, by tape, and over timeby day, week, day of week, month, or week
of yearto satisfy a variety of user needs.
NOTE: The only file opened and operated on by the Template is a user-selected Tickets.csv file.
No other information is gathered, and no changes are made to your computer, registry, or Office
settings.
112
Command View TL GUI
HP StoreEver Command View TL version 2.5 or later is required to export TapeAssure data for use
in the Template. TapeAssure data can be gathered from the following HP tape libraries: EML
E-Series, ESL E-Series, MSL G3, 1/8 Autoloader. Selected standalone tape drives are also supported
through the TapeAssure Service driver, available from http://www.hp.com/go/tapeassure.
The TapeAssure Analysis Template is a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet with embedded macros. Two
versions are available: one for Excel 2003 and the other for Excel 2007 or 2010. In Excel 2007
and 2010, a custom TapeAssure tab and ribbon menu are included for easy access to all graphs
and start-up options.
Macro security settings must be configured to allow user-selected macros to run.
To configure macro security in Excel 2003:
1. From the main menu bar, select ToolsMacroSecurity.
2. Choose the Medium setting, then click OK.
3. Close and reopen Excel and the Template. The settings take effect.
To configure macro security settings in Excel 2007:
1. Click the Office button, usually in the upper left corner, and select Excel Options.
2. Select Trust Center and click the Trust Center Settings button.
3. In the Trust Center window, select Macro Settings, click Enable all macros, then click OK.
4. Close and reopen Excel and the Template. The settings take effect.
To configure macro security settings in Excel 2010:
Look for the Security Warning bar just below the menu ribbon and click the Enable Content
button. The settings take effect without needing to close or reopen Excel.
To create graphs and tables using the TapeAssure Analysis Template:
1. Export your collected TapeAssure data from Command View TL. See Exporting Library Data
to CSV via TapeAssure (page 108) or Scheduling a Library Data Export via TapeAssure
(page 112).
NOTE: Each Tickets.csv file contains data collected from a single library, or in the case of
standalone tape drives, from a single host. Data on all drives and tapes within that library (or
collected by that host) are contained in one Tickets.csv file. The library serial number is provided
as part of the file name so that, for example, TapeAssure data from a library with serial number
US124357 would be stored in the US124357_Tickets.csv file. In the case of standalone tape
drives, the name of the host collecting TapeAssure data is used as part of the file name. For
example, TapeAssure data from a host named myTapeHost would be stored in the
myTapeHost_Tickets.csv file.
2.
3.
Open the TapeAssure Analysis Template (.xls or .xlsm) file. If prompted, select Enable Macros
(in Excel 2003). If additional prompts or messages appears, refer to the Minimum Requirements
section of the HP StoreEver Command View TL TapeAssure Analysis Template white paper,
available at http://www.hp.com/support/cvtl.
Follow the instructions on the opening screen of the template, use the Help tab to view answers
to frequently asked questions on how to get started with the Template, and see the HP StoreEver
Command View TL TapeAssure Analysis Template white paper, available at http://
www.hp.com/support/cvtl for more uses of this template.
Backing up the TapeAssure database

You can schedule a backup of the TapeAssure database one time or on a recurring schedule. A
TapeAssure database backup file can be used to restore the database after a failure.
When you restore a previously-saved database file of the same Command View TL version, the
current database and associated data is first saved as a backup database file then is overwritten.
All data that was added to the current database after the restore file was saved will be lost. A
restore action cannot be undone; however, you can restore the (automatically-saved) current
database if necessary. If the restore operation fails, the current database is not changed.
Using TapeAssure
113
NOTE:
A management station can only have one scheduler running.
Restoring an older version of the Command View TL TapeAssure database is not supported.
To schedule a one-time or recurring TapeAssure backup:
2. In the Navigation panel under Operations, select Save/Restore Database.
The Save/Restore Database window appears. If no backups have been saved, actions that
can be taken from this window are listed. If backups have been saved, the list of backups is
shown.
3.
Select ActionsScheduled Backup of Database.

The Scheduler to Save Database dialog box appears.
4.
5.
6.
Enable the scheduler if it is not already enabled.

Select the time at which the save will occur.
Select the start and end dates. Select No End Date for a one time report or to have reports
exported for an indefinite time period.
7. Select a repeat interval.
8. If you selected a Weekly repeat interval, select the day of the week on which to save the
report.
9. Select the destination directory for the reports, either by selecting the Default Path option, or
by selecting New Path and typing the appropriate destination directory in the field.
10. In the Retention Policy section, select the number of backup files (15) to be retained.
11. Click OK.
12. Read the text in the Scheduler configuration Successful dialog box, then click OK.
To stop the scheduler, clear the Enable Scheduler box in Scheduler to Save Database window.
Restoring a TapeAssure database file

When you restore a previously-saved database file, the current database and associated data is
first saved as a backup database file then is overwritten. All data that was added to the current
database after the restore file was saved will be lost. A restore action cannot be undone; however,
you can restore the (automatically-saved) current database if necessary. If the restore operation
fails, the current database is not changed.
To restore an existing TapeAssure database file:
The Save/Restore Database window appears. If no backups have been saved, actions that
can be taken from this window are listed. If backups have been saved, the list of backups is
shown.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
114
Click ActionsRestore Database.

In the Restore Database dialog box, if the file was saved to the devault location, it is listed
under Default Path. Select the file name and click Next.
If the file was saved to an alternate location, click to select Alternate Path. The Select TapeAssure
Database File dialog box appears. Select the appropriate path and click the backup file to
be restored, then click Next.
Read the cautionary message in the Restore Database window, select the box to indicate that
you have read the warning, then click Finish.
Read the text in the Restore Database confirmation dialog box, then click Yes.
Click OK in the Restore Database Success dialog box.
Command View TL GUI
NOTE:
Restoring an older version of the Command View TL TapeAssure database is not supported.
Saving or copying a database backup file

Existing backup files can be copied to another location and renamed using the following procedure:
The Save/Restore Database window appears. If no backups are listed, there are no backups
saved. See Backing up the TapeAssure database (page 113) to begin saving backup copies
of the database. If backups have been saved, the list of backups is shown.
3.
4.
From the list of backups available, click to select the backup to be saved.
Select ActionsSave Backup File As.
The Save dialog box appears.
5.
6.
Select the destination location, either verify that the file name is correct or type a name into
the File Name field, and click Save.
Read the text in the Save Successful dialog box, then click OK.
The original backup file remains unchanged, and the copy of the file is saved to the specified
location and file name.
Using data verification

The data verification feature provides an automated process to validate media readability and
data integrity on your backup tapes. By quickly identifying the degrading media and notifying
select users via email, events, and reports, data verification helps you avoid failures in your data
restores. In addition, the data verification process scans tapes as a background process without
interfering with your running applications.
Table 31 and Table 32 list the drive and tape compatibility with data verification.
Table 31 Drive compatibility
Type
Minimum Tape Generation
Maximum Tape Generation
Partition contains only LTO5 drives
LTO3
LTO5
Partition contains only LTO6 drives
LTO4
LTO6
Partition contains both LTO5 and LTO6 LTO3

drives
LTO6
Table 32 Tape compatibility

Type
Compatible with Data Verification?
Compatible with Drive Assessment?
Cleaning types
No
No
Partitioned tapes
No
No
Backup tapes
Yes
Yes
Encrypted tapes
No
Yes
WORM tapes
Yes
No
Table 33 shows the average time taken for different data verification test options in LTO-5 and
LTO-6 tapes.
115
Table 33 Average time for data verification tests

Tape Generation
Test Option
Data Verified
Time Taken (average)
LTO-6
Quick
39 GB
5 minutes
LTO-6
Moderate
500 GB
55 minutes
LTO-6
Full
2.5 TB
5 hours
LTO-5
Quick
38 GB
5 minutes
LTO-5
Moderate
300 GB
45 minutes
LTO-5
Full
1.5 TB
4 hours 30 minutes
NOTE: The data verification feature requires a Data Verification license. You must install the
Command View TL license and Data Verification license for at least one tape library. See Adding
a license key (page 32) for details on installing a license.
Configuring the libraries to use data verification

For data verification to function, you must enable CVTL user on each library that will use it.
1. Launch the ESL G3 Library Management Console.
2. Go to SetupNetwork ConfigurationNetwork Security Settings. This opens the Security
Settings window.
3. Enable the CVTL user if it is not already enabled.
4. Click OK.
Creating the data verification partition

You must create a data verification partition on the library that will use data verification. Tapes
will reside in the data verification partition as they are being tested.
1. In the Launcher window, click the Data Verification tab.
2. In the navigation panel under Data Verification, select Control Panel.
3. Select the library on which to create the data verification partition.
4. Select ActionsCreate DV Partition. This launches the Create Data Verification Partition wizard.
NOTE: The Create DV Partition menu option is only enabled if the selected library does not
already have a data verification partition. The Service status will be Not Configured. You
can also launch the wizard by clicking the linked Service status for that library.
The wizard will only launch if the library has the following prerequisites:
5.
6.
116
One LTO5 or LTO6 drive
Six available storage slots
Six available I/E slots
Click Next.
Select the Drive Domain from the drop-down menu. Currently only LTO5 and LTO6 are
supported.
Command View TL GUI
NOTE:
The partition name is automatically assigned as DVP and cannot be changed.
The wizard does not support creating a mixed mode of LTO5 and LTO6 drives on one library.
However, you can create this using the ESL G3 Library Management Console.
7.
8.
Click Next.
Enter the number of drives, storage slots, and I/E slots the partition will use. The quantity
available is provided.
9. Click Next.
10. Confirm your selections and click Finish. A success message is shown when the data verification
partition is created.
117
NOTE: When recreating a data verification partition, you must remove the current partition before
creating the new one.
Mixed partition is not supported by CVTL. Mixed partition can be created by Library Management
Console.
Deleting the data verification partition

You can only delete the data verification partition when data verification is not running; the Service
status must be Stopped.
2. In the navigation panel under Data Verification, select Control Panel.
3. Select the appropriate library.
4. Click Stop Service.
5. Select ActionsDelete DV Partition.
6. On the confirmation window click Yes. A success message is shown when the data verification
partition is deleted.
Viewing the Data Verification Control Panel

The Control Panel provides an overview of the libraries with a Command View TL and Data
Verification license; see Using license keys (page 144) to install the licenses. It also allows you to
enable or disable data verification for a particular library.
In the Launcher window, click the Data Verification tab. The Control Panel opens by default and
lists the libraries by serial number with a qualified data verification license. For each library it lists
the total number of slots available in the data verification partition, total number of mail slots
available in the data verification partition, total number of drives in the data verification partition,
total purchased license quantity, number of data verification licenses available, and the current
status of the data verification engine.
NOTE: If the data verification partition is modified from the Library Management Console, you
must restart the data verification service to reflect the changes in the Test Setup Details screen.
Ensure that all drives assigned are not loaded with tapes before starting the service.
If the data assessment results are poor or fair, an email notification is sent. To configure email
notifications for data verification, see Setting up data verification email notifications (page 126).
118
Command View TL GUI
Starting and stopping the data verification service

For
1.
2.
3.
each library, you can start and stop the data verification service.
In the Launcher window, click the Data Verification tab. The Control Panel opens by default.
Select the row of the library on which to start or stop the service.
Click the start or stop button in the app bar as appropriate.
Setting the default verification type

For each library, you can specify the default verification type used when a tape from that library
is tested.
1. In the Launcher window, click the Data Verification tab. The Control Panel opens by default.
2. Select the library on which to create the data verification partition.
3. Select ActionsChange default settings. This opens the Change Default Settings window.
4. Select the default verification type:
5.
Full Data Verification is carried out for all the data on the tape.
Moderate 20% of the data written on the tape is verified (in a sequential way)
Quick Two wraps of data written on the tape is verified
Click OK.
Deleting the data verification test logs

For
1.
2.
3.
all libraries, you can delete the data verification test log files that are older than 30 days.
In the Launcher window, click the Data Verification tab. The Control Panel opens by default.
Select ActionsDelete DV test logs. This opens a confirmation/warning window.
Click Yes to clear the detailed data verification logs.
Viewing the detailed data verification information for each library

1.
2.
In the Launcher window, click the Data Verification tab.

In the navigation panel under Data Verification, select Control Panel.
119
3.
Click the linked library serial number to view the Test Setup Details screen for that library.
The Test Setup Details screen has three tabular windows. You can maximize/minimize each
window using the button in the top right corner.
Tapes in Partition lists the tapes present in the data verification partition; see Viewing
tapes that are present in the data verification partition (page 121).
Tapes under Verification lists the tapes currently being verified; see Viewing tapes
that are currently under data verification (page 122).
Tapes/Drives Queued for Verification lists the tapes currently in the data verification
queue; see Viewing tapes that are queued for data verification (page 122).
NOTE: If the data verification partition is modified from the Library Management Console, you
must restart the data verification service to reflect the changes in the Test Setup Details screen.
Ensure that all drives assigned are not loaded with tapes before starting the service.
If the data assessment results are poor or fair, an email notification is sent. To configure email
notifications for data verification, see Setting up data verification email notifications (page 126).
You can run a maximum of six drive assessment tests, data verification tests, or a combination of
both at one time.
Viewing tapes that are present in the data verification partition

The Tapes in Partition section of the Test Setup Details screen lists the tapes present in the data
verification partition.
A warning symbol next to the barcode in this window means the tapes are not supported by data
verification. See Table 31 (page 115) for compatible tapes.
You can use the Tapes in Partition window to mark known good tapes for use with the drive
assessment test:
1. Select the tapes known to be good; use Ctrl+select to select multiple tapes at a time.
2.
3.
Click the Mark/Unmark button (

Click OK.
) on the app bar. A confirmation/warning box appears.
Click the linked previous verification result to see the details of the last verification test.
121
NOTE: The Tapes in Partition window may be empty on its initial launch. Starting the data
verification service for the selected library will synchronize all the necessary data from the library.
This window may list more tape cartridges than listed in the PoliciesManage Tapes view. No
action is required; in time the two views will be consistent.
Viewing tapes that are currently under data verification

The Tapes under Verification section of the Test Setup Details screen lists the tapes currently
undergoing data verification.
Viewing tapes that are queued for data verification

The Tapes/Drives Queued for Verification section of the Test Setup Details screen lists the tapes in
the queue for data verification.
122
Command View TL GUI
Viewing drives that are present in the data verification partition

You can view the drives in the data verification partition from the Test Setup Details screen. Select
ActionsDrive Assessment Test or click Drive Assessment Test on the app bar to open the Drive
Details window listing the drives in the data verification partition. Select the drive from the list.
indicates the drive is in healthy condition.
indicates that three consecutive data assessment tests on this drive have failed. You should
run the drive assessment test on this drive.
indicates the drive is in critical state and will no longer be used for drive and data
assessment tests. Contact HP Support for further assistance.
You can click Add to queue and the system will queue the selected drive for the drive assessment
test using the tape you select from the Select Tapes drop-down box.
NOTE: An email notification is sent when the data verification fails three times in a row on a
particular drive. A similar email is sent when the drive assessment test fails on a particular drive
to notify you that the drive will no longer be used; contact HP Support for further assistance. To
configure email notifications for data verification, see Setting up data verification email
notifications (page 126).
123
124
Command View TL GUI
NOTE:
The drive assessment test takes, on average, 20 minutes to complete for a drive.
Running the drive assessment test will overwrite or delete all the data on the tape.
Adding, removing, and changing tapes from the queue

From the Test Setup Details screen you can make the following changes:
Add tapes to the queue by either selecting them in the Tapes in Partition window and clicking
Add to queue or by dragging and dropping the tapes into the Tapes/Drives Queued for
Verification window. Then click Save in the Tapes/Drives Queued for Verification window.
The tapes get queued with the default verification type specified.
Remove tapes from the queue by selecting them in the Tapes/Drives Queued for Verification
window and clicking Remove from queue. Then click Save in the Tapes/Drives Queued for
Verification window.
Change the verification type of tapes by selecting them and then selecting an option from the
Verification type drop down box. Then click Save in the Tapes/Drives Queued for Verification
window. This changes the type for this test but does not change the default type.
Stop data verification for a particular tape by selecting it from the Tapes under Verification
window and clicking Abort.
Configuring the data verification policy

The data verification policy definition allows you to select the tapes you want CVTL to track for
data verification.
2. In the navigation panel under Policies, select Configure Tapes. A list of tapes known to the
management station appears showing the appropriate library serial number, cartridge bar
code, cartridge type, and policy applicable.
NOTE:
3.
Tapes may be listed more than once if the tape is moved from one library to another.
Select a tape and use the Set Policy drop-down box at the top of the screen to determine the
policy for how often data verification is performed on that tape. You can select multiple tapes
by holding the Ctrl key while selecting.
Use ActionsRemove Policy to remove the policy and ActionsExport Report to export the Configure
Tapes table.
Selecting the tapes for verification

1.
In the Launcher window, click the Data Verification tab.

125
2.
3.
4.
In the navigation panel under Policies, select Tapes for verification. A list of tapes due for data
verification appears. These are tapes that have a policy for data verification and they have
reached or exceeded that policy time period. The table includes:
Barcode The barcode of the tape cartridge.
Verification date The date and time the last data verification test was performed.
Last Result The last data verification test result.
Policy name The policy applied to this particular tape.
Days overdue The number of days elapsed from the date the tape exceeded its policy.
Action Recommended A message based on the location of the cartridge is shown. If

the cartridge is in the data verification partition, the message is Move to Queue. If the
cartridge is outside the data verification partition, the message is Move to DV
Partition.
Click Queue Tapes. This opens a window displaying the tapes that are already in the data
verification partition.
Select the tapes that you want to test and click OK. This moves them to the queued state for
testing. Once tested, the results are available on the Results window (see Viewing the test
results for Data Verification (page 127)) and via email if you set up the email notification (see
Setting up data verification email notifications (page 126)).
You can also select the tapes to test from the Test Setup Details screen; see Adding, removing,
and changing tapes from the queue (page 125).
Setting up data verification email notifications

Data verification email notifications allow you to receive email alerts when data verification
determines that data should be migrated to a new tape because the tape is bad. You configure
the data verification notification at the library level. When you receive a data verification email
notification, the subject line is cartridge migration notification. The body of the email lists the
serial number of the library, the bar code of the tape requiring data migration, the total amount
of data verified (in MB), the run time of the test (in minutes), and the verification result.
NOTE: You must have permanent CVTL and data verification licenses to enable data verification
email notification. Perform any SMTP configurations before enabling data verification email
notifications.
1.
2.
126
In the Launcher window, navigate to the Administration panel.

Select ActionsEnable DV E-mail Notification. This opens the DV Email Notification wizard.
Command View TL GUI
3.
Click Next to set up the email options.
4.
5.
Select the libraries that require email notifications.

Enter to and from email addresses for the notifications. You can enter multiple addresses
in the Alternative To E-mail Address field by separating them with a semi-colon (;).
Click Next.
Select the Alert category. Additional categories will be available in a future release.
Click Next.
Confirm your selections and click Finish.
6.
7.
8.
9.
The data verification Email Notification panel will be available on the

AdministrationManagement Station screen.
Disabling data verification email notification

1.
2.
3.
In the Launcher window, navigate to the Administration panel.

Select ActionsDisable DV E-mail Notification. This opens the data verification Email
Notification wizard.
Click Yes in the confirmation window.
Viewing the test results for Data Verification

The test verification results page lists the latest results of the tapes tested by data verification.
2. In the Data Verification section of the Navigation panel, select Data Verification under Test
Results.
127
The information includes:
Barcode The serial number that uniquely identifies the tape as defined by the manufacturer.
Click the linked barcode to see historical test results for this tape. The verification results history
screen shows the same information as the data verification results screen excluding the Barcode
and Cartridge Type columns.
Click the linked result to see the result details.
128
Cartridge Type The vendor ID and data format supported by the tape cartridge.
Library SN The HP serial number that uniquely identifies the library. Defined at manufacture,
this is the number to quote when contacting HP support.
Drive SN The serial number of the drive. This is a static value and will change if a drive
Total Data verified (MB) The amount of data read on the tape during the data verification
test.
Read Margin The ease with which the data was read back from the tape by the drive.
Read Margin Percentage Read margin expressed as a percentage where 100% indicates
a minimal amount of error correction and using a sliding scale down to 0% indicating the
maximum amount of error correction and retries as recommended by HP.
Test run time (mins) The time it took to run the data verification test.
Result The data verification test result. This will be Test Passed, Test Failed, Test Passed with
Warnings, Test Aborted, or Test Incomplete.
Result details The reason for failure if the tape failed.
Verification date The date and time when the data verification test was performed.
Command View TL GUI
From the results page you can release the data verification license for a selected tape to free up
that license for use. Use ActionsRelease License.
NOTE: Releasing a data verification license will remove the data verification history of that tape.
However, if the test failed with a Move to Drive error the license was not used and the Release
License option will only clear the database.
Viewing the drive assessment results

The drive assessment results page lists the tapes with the latest drive assessment test results.
2. In the Results section of the Navigation panel, select Drive Assessment.
Click the linked result to see the result details.

The information includes:
Drive SN The serial number of the drive. This is a static value and will change if a drive
Click the linked drive serial number to see historical drive assessment results for this tape. The
drive assessment results history screen shows the same information as the drive assessment
results screen excluding the Drive SN column.
Library SN The HP serial number that uniquely identifies the library. Defined at manufacture,
this is the number to quote when contacting HP support.
Barcode The serial number that uniquely identifies the tape as defined by the manufacturer.
129
Cartridge Type The vendor ID and data format supported by the tape cartridge.
Test run time (mins) The time it took to run the drive assessment test.
Result The drive assessment test result. This will be Test Passed, Test Failed, or Test Aborted.
Verification date The date and time when the data verification test was performed.
Working LTO4 and later tape drives

LTO4 and later tape drives offer direct FC connectivity to the SAN. See Changing the connection
properties of advanced LTO4 tape drives (page 131) for information on changing the configuration
of the tape drive's FC ports.
The Interface Manager card and the library robotics controller work together to ensure that the
library's LTO4 and later tape drives maintain the same World Wide Names (WWN), host mapping
configuration, and speed and topology configuration when a tape drive is replaced. This enables
the backup configuration to continue unchanged after the replacement.
By default, only port A is presented through Secure Manager. You must create a custom device
map to present port B.
Adding an LTO4 and later tape drive to a library

Tape libraries with LTO4 and later tape drives use a different library architecture than tape libraries
that only contain LTO2 and LTO3 tape drives. Adding the first LTO4 and later tape drive to a
library requires additional steps, such as installing the internal network switch and inserting LTO4
or later tape drive media. In addition, the library firmware must be updated to support LTO4 and
later tape drives, and LTO2 and LTO3 tape drives must be updated to the most recent firmware to
avoid problems if an LTO4 or later tape cartridge is accidentally loaded into an LTO2 or LTO3
tape drive.
See the poster included with the tape drive for detailed drive installation instructions.
TIP: If the tape library already contains other LTO4 and later tape drives, the new drive can be
installed without powering off the library.
Replacing an LTO2 or LTO3 tape drive with an LTO4 or later tape drive
Command View TL versions 2.5 and newer include a wizard to assist in migrating the settings
from the original tape drive to the new tape drives. By using this wizard, library and drive settings,
such as port topology and speed, partitions, and host mappings in Secure Manager, are retained
for the new drive.
To replace an LTO2 or LTO3 tape drive with an LTO4 or later tape drive:
1. Remove the old tape drive and install the new tape drive following the instructions on the
upgrade guide that came with the new tape drive.
NOTE: Older versions of the upgrade guide include an instruction to restore system defaults.
Ignore that step and continue the installation process with the following steps.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
In the Support tab, select Drive Upgrade. The Drive Upgrade tab will display drives that have
been replaced and are awaiting configuration.
Right-click Actions and select Launch Drive Upgrade Wizard.
Click Next.
Click Next.
The wizard displays the drives it found that have been replaced.
If the list is correct, click Next.
If any drives are missing from the list, verify that they have been correctly installed and
are powered on. Click Refresh to update the list.
The wizard displays the upgrade process. Click Next when the upgrade is complete.
Click Finish.
Changing the connection properties of LTO4 and later tape drives

The connection properties for LTO4 and later tape drives include:
World Wide Name (not editable)
Connection Type (editable)
Port Mode (not editable)
Hard AL-PA (editable only if the port connection type is set to Direct Attach)
Speed (Gbps) (editable)
Only the connection type and speed of the ports can be set manually. The remaining items are
configured automatically by the tape drive.
NOTE: Hard AL-PA can be edited only if the Connection Type is Direct Attach. To apply the
changes to all of the tape drives, enable the combo box Apply the setting to All Advanced LTO
Drives.
To edit the FC host port settings:
2. In the left panel, select Drive Connection Properties. A list of connections appears in the right
panel.
3. In the right panel, select an FC host port, and then select ActionsEdit Drive Connection
Settings.
The Port Connection Settings dialog box appears.
Working LTO4 and later tape drives
131
4.
5.
6.
7.
Set the Port Connection Type to one of the following:
AutosenseUse this connection type when connecting the tape drive's FC port to an FC
switch or directly to a Host Bus Adapter (HBA) on a backup server. The software will
choose the appropriate option.
Fabric (SAN) AttachUse this connection type when connecting all FC host ports to an
FC switch.
Direct AttachUse this connection type when connecting all FC host ports directly to a
Host Bus Adapter (HBA) on a backup server.
Set the Port Speed. Use the maximum speed that your SAN infrastructure supports. Select
Auto-Negotiate to have the software determine the fastest speed possible.
Click OK to save the changes.
Confirm that you want to reboot in the Reboot Warning dialog box.
Using SNMP alerts

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a well-defined standard for reporting device
information through a network. The Interface Manager card has a built-in SNMP agent that supports
queries to MIB-II in addition to SNMP traps/alerts.
Command View TL lets you change the following common SNMP settings:
Trap DestinationsIP addresses of hosts or applications that need to receive SNMP alerts/traps
from the Interface Manager card. A trap receiver is an SNMP-enabled machine on the LAN
that decodes and logs SNMP traps. Up to eight trap destinations can be specified.
Community StringPlain-text community string or password required by SNMP clients to read

or write SNMP MIB values.
Adding an SNMP trap

To add a new SNMP trap entry:
1. If necessary, obtain the required network settings from your network administrator.
132
Command View TL GUI
3.
4.
In the left panel, select SNMP Alerts. The current SNMP traps appear in the right panel.
Select ActionsAdd Trap Entry.
The SNMP Trap Entry dialog box appears.
5.
Enter the Trap Destination and Community String, and then click OK.
Editing an SNMP trap

To edit an existing trap entry:
2. In the left panel, select SNMP Alerts. The current SNMP traps appear in the right panel.
3. Do one of the following:
In the right panel, double-click a trap entry.
In the right panel, select the trap entry to be modified, and then select ActionsEdit Trap
Entry.
The SNMP Trap Entry dialog box appears.
4.
Modify the Trap Destination and Community String as necessary, and then click OK.
Removing an SNMP trap

To remove an existing trap entry:
2. In the left panel, click SNMP Alerts. The current SNMP traps appear in the right panel.
3. In the right panel, select the trap entry that you want to remove, and then select
ActionsRemove Trap Entry.
4. Confirm that you want to delete the SNMP trap.
Using SNMP alerts
133
Saving the configuration of the library

The Save/Restore feature enables you to save configuration information of the Interface Manager
card and interface controllers. The information saved includes library settings (name, contact
information), connection properties, advanced feature settings (host access, partitioning), and
SNMP alert settings. A saved configuration stores the settings of all the features on the Configuration
tab. It does not save firmware versions or data on tape cartridges.
CAUTION: For firmware versions I231 or previous, saving and restoring the configuration must
be done with the same version of the Interface Manager firmware. For example, you cannot save
the configuration with Interface Manager firmware version I230, upgrade to version I231, and
then restore the configuration.
For firmware versions I240 and later, you will always be able to restore configurations up to two
firmware revisions back.
NOTE: Save the configuration of the system after any change to the physical configuration of
the library. A successful restore will not occur if the configuration file contains references to a
physical configuration that no longer exists.
Saving the current configuration

1.
2.
3.
In the Library window, click the Configuration tab.

In the left panel, select Save/Restore.
Select ActionsSave Current Configuration.
4.
5.
6.
After reviewing the summary information, click Next.

To confirm, click Save.
Select a location and enter a filename in the File Name box and click Finish or Save. The
configuration file is saved as a ZIP file.
Restoring a configuration
1.
134
Command View TL GUI
2.
3.

Select ActionsRestore Configuration.
4.
5.
6.
Select the configuration file that you want to restore.

Browse to the file and click Open. The configuration file appears.
Read the warning and select the check box acknowledging that you realize that restoring a
previous configuration overwrites the current configuration.
Click OK. The Interface Manager card reboots with the new settings.
7.
Viewing a saved configuration

1.
2.
3.

Select ActionsView Saved Configuration.
Saving the configuration of the library
135
4.
5.
Browse to the file and click Open. The configuration file appears.
When done reading, click Close.
Rebooting components
CAUTION: Rebooting a component terminates any operations that the component might be
performing. To avoid loss of data, make sure that all backup jobs or other operations have
completed before attempting to reboot any component.
Rebooting a single component

NOTE: Depending on the library type, number of slots, tape cartridge locations, and whether
the tape cartridges have barcodes, rebooting a library can take 20 to 45 minutes. If you choose
to remotely reboot the library, allow sufficient time for the reboot to complete before attempting to
manage or configure the library. Components that can be rebooted as a single component are:
interface controllers, the interface manager, and tape drives.
To reboot a single component:
1. In the Library window, click the Operations tab.
2. In the left panel, select Reboot. The list of components appears in the right panel. If any
components need updating, Yes appears in the Reboot Required column.
3. In the right panel, select the component that you want to reboot, and then select
ActionsReboot Selected Component.
4. Confirm that you want to reboot the component in the confirmation warning dialog.
Rebooting the Interface Manager and all controllers

To reboot the Interface Manager and all controllers:
3. Select ActionsReboot Interface Manager and All Controllers.
4. Confirm that you want to reboot all the components in the confirmation warning dialog.
Rebooting all components that require a reboot

To reboot all components that require a reboot (that is, all components that say Yes in the Reboot
Required column):
3. Select the Interface Manager component or one of the Interface Controller components to
enable the Actions menu.
4. Select ActionsReboot All Required Components.
5. Confirm that you want to reboot all the components in the confirmation warning dialog.
Moving tape cartridges

CAUTION: Whenever possible, move media using your backup application. The move media
functionality of Command View TL is provided as an alternate means of moving media if you
encounter a problem with your backup application or with the library. After using Command View
TL to move media, you must re-inventory the library from within your backup application so that
the library and backup application remain synchronized.
136
Command View TL GUI
To move media:
2. In the left panel, click Media Management. A list of the locations of all the tape cartridges
appears in the right panel.
3. To launch the Move Media wizard, select ActionsMove Media.
Source Media page of the Move Media wizard appears.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
On the first page of the Move Media wizard, select the source location, and then click Next.
The selected source should be FULL, if it is not a validation error occurs. The Next button
remains disabled and is enabled only if the selected source media is full.
On the second page, select the destination location, and then click Next. The destination must
be EMPTY or a validation error occurs. The Next button remains disabled and is enabled only
if the selected destination media is empty.
If the selected source and destination are incompatible then a warning message immediately
occurs.
On the third page, verify that the source and destination locations are correct and read the
warning. If you are satisfied with your choices, click the check box to indicate that you
understand the warning, and then click Next to proceed with the move. If you are not satisfied
with your choices, click Back to make changes, or click Cancel to exit the wizard without
performing the move.
The final page of the wizard displays progress information. When the move is successfully
completed, click Finish to complete the wizard.
If an error occurs, the appropriate error message displays in the wizard page. Click Finish to
close the wizard.
Updating the firmware with the Firmware Update wizard

HP recommends that you always use the latest firmware for all the components in the library.
Command View TL provides a convenient Firmware Update wizard to help you manage firmware
revisions.
CAUTION: Make sure that all applications that access the library or drives are shut down until
the firmware update is complete. Do not interrupt the firmware update process. Stopping this
program or powering down the component during the update could cause the component to be
inoperable and require physical repair.
137
NOTE:
Review the downloading instruction in the release notes before upgrading the firmware.
Command View TL 3.5.00 cannot upgrade any libraries with i240 or older Interface Manager
firmware. Upgrade to 2.8.00 then install the bundle. Once the installation of 2.8.00 is
complete, install Command View TL 3.5.00.
If upgrading or downgrading the ESL E-Series library from a revision less than 4.86, download
and install revision 4.86 to the ESL E-Series library before you download the latest ESL E-Series
library code. Otherwise the smart media or Daughter card will need to be replaced.
You must be at the I232 and 2.32 firmware bundle or higher before proceeding with the
upgrades to the I273 and 3.1.00 firmware bundle. If at a revision lower than I232 or 2.32
firmware bundle first migrate to I232 and 2.32 firmware bundle to proceed. You have to be
at i250 or above to download with Command View TL 3.1.00.
If the EML library is below 1200 download 1200 first. Then if the EML library is below 1407
download 1407 first. Otherwise the RLC might need to be replaced.
To update the Interface Manager card firmware:

2. In the left panel, select Firmware Update. A list of components appears in the right panel. If
any components need updating, Yes appears in the Update Available column.
3. Select ActionsLaunch Firmware Update Wizard.
The welcome screen of the Firmware Update wizard appears.
4.
138
Read the warning, and then click Next. The Selection page of the Firmware Update wizard
appears.
Command View TL GUI
5.
Decide whether to enable firmware downgrades. By default, firmware downgrades are not
enabled. Only newer firmware versions can be uploaded to your hardware. To enable firmware
downgrades, you must enter the factory password. For more information, see Using factory
overrides (page 142).
If you need to enable firmware downgrades (for example, if a newer firmware version is
causing problems and you want to revert back to an older version that was known to work
properly), select Allow Firmware Downgrades.
6.
7.
8.
Choose one of the following options:
Use HP web services to determine optimal updates for the

libraryCommand View TL will check the HP Support website for all compatible
firmware files. If you select Ensure firmware information is up to date
(recommended), Command View TL downloads the latest list of supported hardware with
current firmware revisions and saves it locally on the management station. This list is
updated every 24 hours on the HP Support website, so checking this option makes sure
that Command View TL is up-to-date on all the latest firmware revisions.
Choose local firmware file(s)Choose firmware files that are stored locally.
Click Add to browse to the firmware file(s). To select multiple files in the same
directory, hold down Ctrl while selecting the files. Click Select to return to the Firmware
Selection Method window.
Click Next to display the Device Selection screen which lists all the components available for
updating.
Select the check box next to any device that needs updating.
IMPORTANT: If the dialog shows that the Interface Manager card and other components
require updating, update the other components first. Then, start the process again to update
the Interface Manager card. You cannot update the other components and the Interface
Manager card at the same time.
9.
For each selected device, select the appropriate firmware revision from the drop-down box
in the right column.
10. Click Next to display the Firmware Update Summary screen.
11. Confirm the firmware update selections and select I understand that this update will cause
currently running backups to fail.
139
12. Click Next to display the Firmware Update Progress window. This window displays the progress
of the firmware update. Click Hide Details to hide the progress by component. When complete,
a dialog box displays the status of the update.
If there are any errors during the firmware update, the update will stop and leave your
configuration settings intact. Contact Support for assistance.
13. Click OK to close the Update Complete dialog box.
14. Click Finish to exit the wizard.
Updating the firmware from version I1xx to version I2xx

Because the format of the firmware file has changed, you must use different procedures to update
the Interface Manager card firmware depending on whether you are changing minor revisions
(I1xx to I1xx or I2xx to I2xx) or major revisions (I1xx to I2xx). You must update a major revision
with the Command View TL GUI (see Updating the firmware with the Firmware Update
wizard (page 137)). You can update a minor revision with the Command View TL GUI (see Updating
the firmware with the Firmware Update wizard (page 137)) or with the CLI (see Updating the
firmware with the CLI (page 186)).
IMPORTANT:
Only versions I182 or higher can upgrade to version I200.
IMPORTANT: The Interface Manager firmware version I200 and above is not available for the
ESL9000 Series library. The ESL9000 Series library must remain at the latest I182 version.
IMPORTANT: After upgrading to version I200, you will not be able to view support tickets that
you generated with version I1xx.
When you update the firmware from version I1xx to version I2xx, the Firmware Update wizard
migrates your configuration settings including:
Support information
Library settings
Interface Manager settings
Network settings
SNMP settings
License information
Partitions
Secure Manager
In the first step, the Firmware Update Wizard copies the configuration settings to a database file.
In the second step, the Firmware Update Wizard copies the database file to the I200 Interface
Manager card. Depending on the complexity of your configuration, the firmware update may take
up to 1 hour.
Restoring factory defaults

The Restore Factory Defaults screen provides a way to restore factory default settings for the Interface
Manager card and selected interface controllers. Consider the following when restoring factory
default settings:
If you reset the Interface Manager card, another dialog box opens for you to choose which
configuration data should be retained and which data should be reset. The following types
of configuration data can be retained:
Network settings (HP recommends retaining network settings if they are already configured
properly)
SNMP settings
Trace and event logs
Selecting the check box causes the corresponding data to be retained. HP recommends that
you back up the Interface Manager card configuration using the Saving the configuration of
the library (page 134) before restoring the Interface Manager card factory defaults.
The host mapping configuration data of each interface controller is synchronously stored on
both the interface controller and on the Interface Manager card. If you reset an interface
controller, the Interface Manager card restores the mapping configuration to the interface
controller when the interface controller reboots. If you reset all devices, the mapping
configuration is lost and you will have to reconfigure mapping.
NOTE: The library will timeout after 60 minutes if the network settings are not saved. If you do
not save the settings before the session terminates, you will have to remove the library and add it
again.
Restoring factory defaults for one component

1.
2.
3.
4.

In the left panel, select Restore Factory Defaults. A list of components appears in the right
panel.
In the right panel, select the component that you want to restore, and then select
ActionsRestore Selected Component.
Confirm that you want to restore the factory defaults.
Restoring factory defaults for all components

1.
2.
3.

In the left panel, select Restore Factory Defaults. A list of components appears in the right
panel.
Select ActionsRestore Defaults on All Components.
The Restore IM to Factory Defaults wizard appears.
Restoring factory defaults
141
4.
5.
Select which Interface Manager card settings to keep, and then click Next. HP recommends
that you keep all settings if they are currently configured correctly.
Read the warning, and if you agree, select the check box, and then click Finish.
Using factory overrides

Some Command View TL features are available only when enabled with a factory password. The
password is intended to prevent inexperienced users from accessing functionality that can be
particularly harmful to their system if used improperly. These features include:
Firmware DowngradeAllows you to downgrade firmware revisions. The device product ID

and revision string sequence must match.
Factory DetailsAllows you to select the factory detail level when generating or viewing a
support ticket.
Two types of passwords can be used. Temporary passwords enable users to perform the above
actions on a one-time basis. Support personnel passwords (for internal HP use only) enable all of
the above options and are permanent. To obtain a factory password, contact your support provider
or call center. To enter the factory password:
1. In the Command View TL window, click the Administration tab. The current setting for factory
overrides appears.
142
Command View TL GUI
2.
Select ActionsEnable Factory Overrides. The Factory Overrides dialog box appears.
3.
4.
Contact HP Technical Support to obtain the factory password.

Enter the factory password, and then click OK. Assuming the factory password is valid, you
are now able to access the password-protected functions of Command View TL.
Disabling factory overrides

To disable factory overrides:
1. In the Command View TL Launcher window, click the Administration tab.
The current setting for factory overrides appears.
2.
Select ActionsDisable Factory Overrides.

The Confirmation dialog box appears for removing the factory overrides password.
3.
Click OK to remove the factory overrides password.
Disabling factory overrides
143
3 Advanced features in the GUI

Using license keys
The Interface Manager card in EML and ESL E-series tape libraries supports optional features that
require a Secure Manager license. A single Secure Manager license enables Advanced Host
Access, Library Partitioning, and the Secure Key Manager (SKM) or Enterprise Secure Key Manager
(ESKM).
Advanced Host AccessGives the library administrator control over which robotics or drives
within a library may be accessed by the various backup hosts on the SAN.
Library PartitioningEnables the library administrator to divide the physical library into multiple,
logical libraries.
HP StorageWorks Licensed Capacity UpgradeWith certain tape libraries, additional capacity

can be licensed as needed. The Licensed Capacity Upgrade feature enables you to enter a
license key to unlock this additional capacity.
Key ManagerEnables you to encrypt data on LTO4 and later tapes with LTO4 and later
drives.
TapeAssure AdvancedSupports the ESL G3, MSL6460, and MSL libraries and AutoLoaders.
This license provides an intuitive, easy to use dashboard and advance analytic features for
performance, health, and utilization related to drives and cartridges.
NOTE: The ESL G3 and MSL6480 TapeAssure Advanced license requires one permanent
Command View TL License for ESL G3/MSL6480 for that library.
Data VerificationSupports the ESL G3 library. This license is used for verifying the data
quality of the cartridge. Each cartridge uses up one license on the first use for the data
verification; subsequent use by the same cartridge does not use up the license again.
To use these features you must buy and install license keys.
1. Purchase the licenses. You may have already purchased the additional licensable features
when you ordered the library. If not, visit https://h30580.www3.hp.com/poeticWeb/
portalintegration/hppWelcome.htm or contact your HP authorized reseller for purchasing
information.
After purchasing the licenses, you receive one or more Software Entitlement Certificates that
show the HP order number, the product number and name, and the quantity ordered.
2.
Obtain the license keys. Fill out the required information and follow the instructions on the
Software Entitlement Certificates to obtain your license keys. HP generates the license key
based on the HP order number and the serial number of the library in which the key will be
installed. HP provides you with the license keys via whichever method you specified on the
Software Entitlement Certificate (online, e-mail, or fax).
NOTE: You must use Command View TL to install each license key for the library having the
serial number used to obtain the key. The license cannot be installed for a different library.
3.
Use Command View TL to install the license key(s) for your library. This step is described in
detail in Adding a license key (page 32).
Configuring host HBA access with HP Secure Manager

Secure Manager gives the library administrator control over which devices in the library (drives
and robotic controller) may be accessed by the various backup hosts on the SAN. Access can be
configured for each FC port on a Host Bus Adapter (HBA). Each port of a dual-port HBA must be
configured separately.
There are two levels of Secure Manager implemented with the Interface Manager card:
Basic Secure ManagerDoes not require a license key and is automatically activated. With
basic Secure Manager, you can configure whether or not a host HBA can access the library.
However, basic Secure Manager does not enable you to control whether this host HBA can
see individual components within the library. Basic Secure Manager provides an all or nothing
level of control.
Advanced Secure ManagerRequires a license key before it can be used. Advanced Secure
Manager provides the same functionality as basic Secure Manager, but adds more granular
control over access. With advanced Secure Manager, you can configure which robotics and
drives in the library each host HBA is able to access. This level of control effectively partitions
the library resources into user-defined zones or Access Control Groups that can be allocated
to certain host HBA FC ports on the SAN, thus reducing the possibility of access conflicts and
errors.
A valid license key is required to use Advanced Secure Manager. See Using license keys (page 144)
for more information.
About Access Control Groups (ACG)

To make host access as flexible and scalable as possible, Command View TL 3.0.0 and later
makes use of Access Control Groups. An Access Control Group contains a collection of devices
(robotics and drives) and a collection of host HBAs in the SAN that are granted access to those
devices. Only those host HBAs that are granted access, as part of an Access Control Group, can
discover and use the robotics and tape drives. An Access Control Group can contain as few as
one host HBA and one drive, or as many hosts or devices as desired. Each EML and ESL E-Series
must have at least one Access Control Group defined.
NOTE: Once a host HBA is added to an Access Control Group, it is no longer available to other
Access Control Groups. Host HBAs can only be part of one ACG.
Creating an Access Control Group

To create an Access Control Group:
1. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab, then select Host Access from the left panel.
2. In the right panel, select ActionsAdd Access Control Group.
The Add Access Control Group wizard appears.
3.
Enter a name for the ACG and click Next.
145
4.
Select the robotics or drives to be added to the ACG, then click Next.
NOTE: If you are using Basic Secure Manager, all the devices in the library will be selected
and the wizard will be grayed out. Your single ACG will have full access to all devices in the
library.
If you are using Advanced Secure Manager (license required), individual devices can be
selected, and more than one ACG can be created.
To separately configure each FC Port or LUN for each device, click Customize Port/LUN
settings at the bottom of the wizard screen. When checked, individual FC Ports and LUNs
can be selected for each device.
NOTE: For LTO3 and earlier tape drives, the FC port/LUN combinations must be unique for
each device, and this is validated when completing the next step. For LTO4 and later tape
drives, select FC Port 0 if the FC cable is connected to port A on the tape drive or FC Port 1
if the FC cable is connected to port B. The LUN will always be 0 for LTO4 and later drives.
146
Advanced features in the GUI
5.
In the Select Host page of the Add Access Control Group wizard, click Add Known Host.
A list of previously-added or automatically-discovered hosts and HBAs appears.

To include a host/HBA in this ACG, click the box next to its name. To locate a host/HBA by
Name, WWN, or SID, simply begin typing in the Filter box to display only host and HBAs
that match your filter criteria.
6.
If the host HBA you want to add does not appear in the list, click Add New Host button, then
fill in the host/HBA name and WWN information, and click OK.
147
7.
8.
148
If you want to completely remove a host/HBA from the available list, check the box to the left
of one ore more hosts, and click Remove Host.
If you want to change the host/HBA name to a more user-friendly alias, click the box next to
a single host and click Edit Host, then enter the new name, and click OK.
9. When all host selections and changes have been made, click Next.
10. Review your choices on the Configuration screen, and click Finish.
11. The Host Access Progress screen displays operation progress. When 100% is reached, click
OK.
Editing an Access Control Group

To edit an Access Control Group:
149
1.
In the Library window, click the Configuration tab, then select Host Access from the left panel.
2.
In the right panel, click on the Access Control Group you want to edit, then select ActionsEdit
Access Control Group.
The Edit Access Control Group wizard appears.
3.
150
Follow the wizard prompts to edit the Access Control Group's name, device list, and host list.
All configuration options available in the Add Access Control Group wizard are also available
in the Edit Access Control Group wizard.
151
4.
Click Finish to complete the wizard or Cancel to cancel your changes.
Removing an Access Control Group

To remove an Access Control Group:
1. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab. In the left panel, select Host Access from
the left panel.
2. Remove already created ACGs by doing one of the following:
3.
In the right panel, select the ACG you want to remove, and select ActionsRemove Access
Control Group.
In the right panel, select Actions-Remove all ACG to remove all created ACGs.
Click YES on the confirmation dialog and return to the Library window.
Synchronizing host access settings

If you have made interface controller host access changes directly through the interface controller
Telnet or serial interface instead of using the Interface Manager card or Command View TL, the
interface controller will be out of sync with the Interface Manager card. You must then synchronize
the settings which reapplies the Interface Manager card settings to the interface controllers.
2. In the right panel, select ActionsSynchronize Secure Manager Settings.
Viewing the device map

The device map shows how a particular host HBA sees the configuration within a library. The host
HBA Properties dialog shows the device map.
Previously created Access Control Groups (ACG) with the list of the host HBAs that currently
have access to the library appear in the right panel.
152
2.
In the right panel, select an ACG by doing one of the following:
In the right panel, double-click the ACG for which you want to see the device map.
In the right panel, double-click the ACG for which you want to see the device map, and
select ActionsProperties.
The Host/HBA Properties dialog appears.

The device map displays all of the devices in the library in the first column. The second and
third columns display the FC port and LUN information respectively for the corresponding
device, as it appears to that host HBA. If the library is partitioned the fourth column displays
the partition information in which the device is present.
Partitioning a library
Using the advanced version of Secure Manager (license required), you have the option of
partitioning the physical library into multiple logical libraries.
When partitioning a library, consider the following:
If you choose not to partition your library, that is not equivalent to having a library with one
large partition. Although you could create one large partition, doing so does not have any
benefit. You should either create two or more partitions, or not partition the library at all.
If you choose to partition your library, you must assign each of the library resources to a
partition. Any devices that are not assigned to a partition cannot be seen by backup software.
A partition must contain at least one drive and one slot. Mailslots are optional.
Creating and deleting partitions affects host access configuration. Deleting a partition removes
mapping information for that partition.
When you add or remove partitions in a library that is enrolled with the SKM or ESKM, you
must also add or remove the key generation policy for that partition using the SKM or ESKM
Management Console software. (For instructions, see the appropriate user guide.) Until this
policy is updated, the key management status for the tape drives in the affected partition will
appear as critical (red) on the Health Summary screen. After you update this policy, it is
applied the next time media is loaded into the tape drive, which will clear the critical status.
Only the security user can change this policy (see (page 22) and Changing library
passwords (page 34)).
Adding a partition
To add a partition to your library:
2. In the left panel, select Partitioning. The right panel displays the existing partitions in the
library, if any.
3. Select ActionsAdd Partition.
153
4.
Follow the instructions in the wizard to create the new partition. Review your choices and click
Finish.
NOTE: Some devices may not be available to add to the partition depending on your library
configuration, or if those devices are already assigned to another partition.
Removing a partition
To remove a partition from your library:
library, if any.
3. In the right panel, select a partition, and then select ActionsRemove Selected Partition.
CAUTION: When you remove a partition, any devices that were in that partition must be
reassigned to the remaining partitions on the library. Devices are unavailable until they are
reassigned to another partition. If you remove all partitions, the library reverts to a
non-partitioned state and all devices are available. Any time you add or remove partitions,
you must reconfigure host access. For more information, see Configuring host HBA
access (page 144).
4.
Confirm that you want to remove the partition.
Removing all partitions

To remove all partitions from your library:
library, if any.
3. Select ActionsRemove All Partitions.
CAUTION: When you remove a partition, any devices that were in that partition must be
reassigned to the remaining partitions on the library. Devices are unavailable until they are
reassigned to another partition. If you remove all partitions, the library reverts to a
non-partitioned state and all devices are available. Any time you add or remove partitions,
you must reconfigure host access. For more information, see Configuring host HBA
access (page 144).
4.
Confirm that you want to remove all partitions.
Extending a partition
You can add drives, mailslots, or slots to an existing partition.
IMPORTANT: Extending a partition will not enable you to change the partition element address
of elements already in the partition. Therefore, all new components added to the partition must
have a larger element address than the last element (of a particular type) in the partition. For
example, if a library has 6 tape drives and a partition currently contains Drive 3 and Drive 4. You
may extend the partition to contain drive 5 and 6, but you may not add Drive 1 or Drive 2.
1.
2.
3.

In the left panel, select Partitioning. The right panel displays the existing partitions in the
library, if any.
In the right panel, select the partition that you want to add to, and then select ActionsExtend
Partition.
155
4.
Follow the instructions in the wizard to add drives, mailslots, or slots. Review your choices,
and then click Finish.
Upgrading capacity
Some HP StoreEver tape libraries enable you to license additional capacity as needed. The following
HP StoreEver tape libraries support the Licensed Capacity feature:
ESL322e
ESL286e
EML 71e
Capacity upgrades for ESL E-Series libraries

In the ESL E-Series libraries, slots are grouped into panels. When you purchase one of these
libraries, panels one, two, and three are enabled by default. You can purchase up to three
additional licenses to upgrade the capacity of the library. The first license enables panel four, the
second license enables panel five, and the third license enables panels six and seven. To upgrade
capacity, follow the steps in the sections:
Using license keys (page 144)
Adding a license key (page 32)
Enabling capacity upgrades (page 157)
(page 157) shows the layout of the slot panels in an ESL E-Series tape library and how those panels
are named.
156
Figure 16 Capacity upgrades for ESL E-Series tape libraries
1. Upper left panel (enabled at the factory)
2. Middle left panel (enabled at the factory)
3. Lower left panel (enabled at the factory)
4. Upper right panel (available for capacity upgrade)
5. Middle right panel (available for capacity upgrade)
6. Lower right panel (available for capacity upgrade)
7. Back wall (available for capacity upgrade)
Capacity upgrades for EML E-Series libraries

You can upgrade the EML 71e library from 71 slots to 103 slots. You need to purchase a license
to do this upgrade. To upgrade capacity, follow the steps in the sections:
Using license keys (page 144)
Adding a license key (page 32)
Enabling capacity upgrades (page 157)
Figure 17 (page 157) shows the layout of the slots.

Figure 17 Capacity upgrades for EML tape libraries
1. 71 slots in the 8U base module (enabled at the factory) 2. 32 slots in the 4U base module (available for capacity
upgrade)
Enabling capacity upgrades

Licensing the additional capacity is a two step process:
1. Obtain and install the license key as described in Using license keys (page 144).
Upgrading capacity
157
2.
Activate the newly licensed capacity as follows:

a. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab.
b. In the left panel, select Licensed Capacity. A list of the available capacity upgrades appears
in the right panel.
NOTE: The Licensed Capacity item in the left panel is only visible with libraries that
support the Licensed Capacity feature.
c.
In the right panel, select a capacity upgrade that lists Pending in the State column, and
then select ActionsEnable Pending Capacity.
The State column is updated and the newly-licensed capacity is now available.
Encrypting data with the HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM)

or HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM)
To encrypt data, you must have the following items:
Advanced Secure Manager (license required)
LTO4 and later tape drive
LTO4 or later tape cartridge
An HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM) or an HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager

(ESKM) appliance installed on your network. See the appropriate installation guide to install
the SKM or ESKM.
If encryption is enabled for an LTO4 and later tape drive and a write request occurs, the ETLA tape
library retrieves metadata from the drive and cartridge. This metadata includes the cartridge type,
158
a unique media identifier, and the media barcode. This metadata is used to create a unique key
name. The library then requests a key from the SKM or ESKM, based on the key generation policy
for that library or partition. The library obtains its key generation policies (one per partition) from
the SKM or ESKM when it logs in. The available policies are Key per Tape, Key per Partition, and
No Encryption. The SKM or ESKM returns the key to the library over an SSL connection. The key,
and the key name, are forwarded to the LTO4 and later tape drive. This key is used on all
subsequent write operations, until the cartridge is unloaded. The key retrieval occurs in a very short
period of time, and the entire process is transparent to the backup application. If a later backup
session appends data to the tape, the same key will be retrieved and used to encrypt the appended
data.
The LTO4 and later tape drive compresses the data prior to encrypting it. Encryption does not
increase the size of the data on the tape. Furthermore, encryption does not affect the performance
of the drive. All encryption is performed using AES-256 keys.
During a read operation, the library retrieves the key name from the tape, and requests that key
from the SKM or ESKM. The key is returned over SSL, forwarded to the LTO4 and later tape drive,
and is used on all subsequent read operations until the cartridge is unloaded.
Figure 18 Data encryption process
1. Backup domain server
2. Backup clients
3. Backup media server
4. Read/write request
5. LTO4 and later tape drives
6. LTO4 and later tape cartridges
7. ETLA library
8. Metadata
9. Encrypted key
10. LAN
11. SSL socket
12. SKM or ESKM
NOTE: When encryption is enabled, HP strongly recommends that all cartridges have high quality
barcodes, and the tape library is configured to enable a barcode length of 6 or more characters.
The cartridge barcode is useful for later matching an encryption key with a cartridge. For example,
if a tape is lost then the barcode can be used to identify the key associated with that cartridge.
Encrypting data with the HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM) or HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM)
159
Enrolling libraries with the SKM or ESKM

Each of the ETLA libraries that you want to use to encrypt data must be enrolled with the SKM or
ESKM. You perform this enrollment as part of the installation of the SKM or ESKM. To install the
SKM or ESKM, see the installation and replacement guide that shipped with your SKM or ESKM.
Selecting the SKM or ESKM as the key manager

You will have selected the SKM or ESKM as your key manager as part of the SKM or ESKM
installation. However, you might need to perform this procedure again if you changed the key
manager to be your backup application and you now want to change it back. To select a key
manager, use the Key Management Setup Wizard. This wizard establishes communication between
the library and the SKM or ESKM by setting up the certificate authority and certificates on the
library, entering the user name and password that the library uses to log on to the SKM or ESKM,
and entering the IP addresses of the SKM or ESKM appliances. The wizard will verify the connectivity
to the SKMs or ESKMs when all the data has been provided.
NOTE: You perform some of the steps in this procedure with the SKM or ESKM Management
Console software. Make sure you have access to it before beginning.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
You must log into Command View TL as a security user to change the key manager. See
Starting Command View TL (page 21).
In the Launcher window, click the Devices tab. A list of your current libraries appears.
Double-click the library for which you want to change the key manager.
Click the Configuration tab.
In the left panel, select Key Management.
NOTE: The Key Management command will only appear if you have Advanced Secure
Manager (see Using license keys (page 144)) and LTO4 and later tape drives installed in your
library (in the Library window, click the Status tab, then in the left panel, click Advanced LTO
Drives).
6.
7.
Select ActionsSelect Key Manager Type.

Select HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager to select SKM or HP Enterprise Secure Key
Manager to select ESKM, then click Next. The welcome screen appears.
8.
Read the information on the screen, and click Next. Page 1 of the wizard appears.
161
9.
Follow the remaining instructions in the wizard. When you have completed the wizard, the
key manager information will appear in the right panel of the Key Management window.
Un-enrolling SKM or ESKM and reverting to the backup application as the key
manager
You can stop using the SKM or ESKM and start using the backup application as the key manager
at any time.
CAUTION: Changing key managers will delete the certificates and configuration for the SKM or
ESKM. To re-enable the SKM or ESKM as your key manager, you must run the Key Management
Setup Wizard again. See (page 160).
162
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Drives).
6.
Select ActionsUn-enroll Key Manager. The welcome screen appears.
Encrypting data with the HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM) or HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM) 163
7.
Read the information on the screen, and click Next. Page 1 of the wizard appears.
By default this will un-enroll the enroll key manager and set it to backup software.
8.
9.
Read the text in the Reboot Warning, then click Next.

Verify the information, then click Next.
When you have completed the wizard, the key manager will be un-enrolled and Backup
Software is selected as Key Manager and appears in the right panel of the Key Management
window.
Changing the login on an SKM or ESKM

Use this procedure to change the user name and password that the library uses to log into the SKM
or ESKM.
IMPORTANT: You must also change the user name and password for the library in the SKM or
ESKM Management Console software.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Drives).
6.
Select ActionsUpdate Key Manager Configuration. The welcome screen appears.
7.
Read the information on the screen, and click Next. The login page appears.
8.
Type the current user name and password, and click Next. The tier #1 information screen
appears.
165
9.
Click Next without making any changes to the tier information. Follow the remaining instructions
in the wizard.
Changing the tier information for an SKM or ESKM

Tiers are a way to indicate which SKM or ESKM appliances a library should contact first when it
needs to get an encryption key. For example, to avoid network performance issues, you might
want a library to access local SKM or ESKM appliances before remote SKM or ESKM appliances.
To specify this, you would enter the local SKM or ESKM appliances in tier 1 and the remote SKM
or ESKM appliances in tier 2. The library will try to get a key from any of the SKM or ESKM
appliances in tier 1 first. If none of the SKM or ESKM appliances in tier 1 respond, it will move to
tier 2. If you add or remove an SKM or ESKM from your network, you will need to update the tier
information by running the Key Management Setup Wizard and selecting Update Key Manager
Configuration and running the Key Management Setup Wizard.
Adding or deleting addresses or hostnames for SKM or ESKM appliances

To add or delete addresses or hostnames for any SKM or ESKM appliances:
1. You must log into Command View TL as a security user to change the key manager. See
2. In the Launcher window, click the Devices tab. A list of your current libraries appears.
3. Double-click the library for which you want to change the key manager.
4. Click the Configuration tab.
5. In the left panel, select Key Management.
Drives).
6.
Select ActionsUpdate Key Manager Configuration. The welcome screen appears.
7.
Read the information on the screen, and click Next. The login page appears.
8.
Type the current user name and password, and then click Next. The tier #1 information page
appears.
Verify the existing information for tier #1 is correct.
If you have more than one tier, and you are making changes to tier #2 or tier #3, verify the
existing information of tier #2 and tier #3 is correct.
Type the appropriate SSL port number for nodes in the tier in the SSL Port Number for nodes
field.
Enter the IP addresses or hostnames for any SKM or ESKM appliances that were added.
Delete the information for any SKM or ESKM appliances that were removed.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
167
14. Click Next. Follow the remaining instructions in the wizard.
Adding a tier to the Key Manager Configuration

To add a tier to the Key Manager Configuration:
1. Perform steps 19 of Adding or deleting addresses or hostnames for SKM appliances.
2. Click Add Tier.
3. Type the SKM or ESKM Node Address for each node on the tier.
4. Verify the information is correct, then click Next.
5. At the Reboot Warning wizard, read the warning, then click Next.
6. Verify the information, then click Next. When you have completed the wizard, the key manager
tier information will get updated and Key Manager with new tier information will appear in
the right panel of the Key Management window.
Deleting a tier from the Key Manager Configuration

To delete a tier from the Key Manager Configuration:
NOTE: Tiers must removed from highest to lowest. For example, if there are three tiers defined,
tier 2 cannot be removed until after tier 3 is removed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Perform steps 19 of Adding or deleting addresses or hostnames for SKM appliances.

All tiers are listed in the same wizard.
Remove the node addresses from the tier to be removed.
Click Remove Tier.
The tier information will be removed.
5.
6.
Read the Reboot Warning dialog box, then click Next.

Confirm the information, then click Next. When you have completed the wizard, the key
manger tier information will get updated and Key Manager with updated tier information will
appear in the right panel of the Key Management window.
Updating certificates or the certificate authority for an SKM or ESKM

When a certificate expires, you must enter information for a new certificate. Also use this procedure
to change the certificate authority.
2. In the Launcher window, click the Devices tab. A list of the current libraries appears.
Drives).
6.
Select ActionsUpdate Key Manager Certificate. Select one of the following:
Update Certificate Authority Certificate
Update Library Certificate
Update Both Certificates
The welcome screen appears.
7.
Click Next. Follow the remaining instructions in the wizard. For more detailed information,
see the appropriate SKM or ESKM installation and replacement guide.
Changing library partitions after initial SKM or ESKM setup

When you add or remove partitions in a library that is enrolled with the SKM or ESKM, you must
also add or remove the key generation policy for that partition using the SKM or ESKM Management
Console software. (For instructions, see the SKM or ESKM user guide.) Until this policy is updated,
the key management status for the tape drives in the affected partition will appear as critical (red)
on the Health Summary screen. After you update this policy, it is applied the next time media is
loaded into the tape drive, which will clear the critical status. Only the security user can change
this policy (see (page 22) and Changing library passwords (page 34)).
Verifying connectivity from the library to SKM or ESKM

To verify connectivity from the library to the SKM or ESKM:
library. (To verify if LTO4 and later tape drives are installed, navigate to the Library window,
click the Status tab, then in the left panel, click Advanced LTO Drives).
6.
7.
Select ActionsVerify Key Manager Connectivity. The welcome screen appears.

Read the information on the screen, and click Next.
8.
Verify that the configuration is correct, then click Next.
169
9.
When the Update and Verification Operation Complete dialog box appears, read whether
the operation completed successfully or not, then click Finish.
Transferring current HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM) enrollment settings

to an HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM)
This procedure will transfer an existing SKM enrollment to a new ESKM cluster. The ESKM cluster
must be installed and operational prior to upgrading from SKM to ESKM.
IMPORTANT: Any of the SKM cluster keys, CAs, and certifications that you want to re-use on the
replacement ESKM cluster must have already been backed up and restored to the new ESKM
cluster before starting this procedure.
See HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager Installation and Replacement Guide that came with your
ESKM.
To upgrade from SKM to ESKM:
170
3.
4.
5.
Double-click the library on which you want to change the key manager.
Drives).
6.
Select Actions+Transfer current SKM enrollment settings to ESKMReuse SKM Certificate

Authority and client certificate.
If Create new Certificate Authority and client certificate is selected, then certificates generated
when SKM was installed will be deleted, and the upgrade will proceed as a new enrollment.
See Selecting the SKM or ESKM as the key manager (page 160).
7.
8.
Read and follow the text on the screen that appears, then click Next.
Enter the library user name and password in the appropriate fields, then click Next.
Tier information appears.
9. If appropriate, select the box to reuse pre-existing SKM tiers.

10. If appropriate type the appropriate SSL port number for nodes in the tier in the SSL Port Number
for nodes field.
11. Type the IP addresses or hostnames for any nodes that were added.
12. Delete the information for any nodes that were removed.
13. If appropriate, add a tier to the Key Manager Configuration using the following procedure:
1. Click Add Tier.
2. Type the ESKM Node Address for each node on the tier.
3. Click Next.
4. Verify the information is correct, then click Next.
5. At the Reboot Warning dialog box, read the warning, then click Yes.
171
NOTE: The Interface Manager must be rebooted for this operation to take effect.
However, the drives and the tape library are not rebooted.
6.
When the Update and Verification Operation Complete message appears, read whether
the operation was completed successfully, then click Finish.
14. If appropriate, delete a tier from the Key Manager Configuration using the following procedure:
1. All tiers are listed in the same wizard.
2. Remove the node addresses from the tier to be removed.
3. Click Remove Tier.
The tier information will be removed.
4.
5.
6.
7.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Read the warning in the Remove Tier dialog box, then click Next to continue.
Read the Reboot Warning dialog box, then click Yes.
When the Update and Verification Operation Complete message appears, read whether
the operation was completed successfully, then click Finish.
Use the procedures in Changing the tier information for an SKM or ESKM (page 166)
to make other changes to the ESKM configuration, as needed.
After the information is complete, click Next.

Verify the information in the Key Management Setup Summary dialog box, then click Next.
Read the message in the Reboot Warning dialog box, then click Next.
When the Update and Verification Operation Complete message appears, read whether the
operation was completed successfully, then click Finish.
Using support tickets

Command View TL uses an integrated version of HP StoreEver L&TT to generate a support ticket.
In the event of a hardware problem, a support ticket can provide vital information to help in
diagnosing and resolving the problem.
When a support ticket is generated, the program collects configuration information and executes
a Device Analysis test on the selected device or devices. This information can then be viewed,
saved, or sent via e-mail to HP Support for assistance.
NOTE: A support ticket for a drive contains a drive margin report and is the only way to get that
information.
A support ticket is saved as a ZIP file that Command View TL uses when you save or e-mail the
support ticket (see (page 177) and Sending a support ticket by e-mail). The ZIP file contains a *.ltd
file for each selected device. You can extract and view a *.ltd file with L&TT versions 4.2 and
later.
Generating a support ticket

1.
2.
3.
172

In the left panel, select Support Ticket. A list of the support tickets that you have generated
Select ActionsLaunch Support Ticket Wizard. The welcome screen of the wizard appears.
4.
Click Next. Page 1 of the wizard appears.
5.
Enter a name for the new support ticket and select the components you want included in the
support ticket. The Cached Support Ticket (Timestamp) column lists whether a cached support
ticket is available and, if so, the time it was generated. (Support tickets for tape drives are
generated and cached whenever a tape cartridge is ejected.) Clicking the ... button displays
more information about a cached support ticket.
NOTE:
later.
Cached support tickets will no longer be available in Command View TL 2.6 and
173
174
6.
Click Next. Page 2 of the wizard appears.
7.
Read the note, select the check box to confirm, and click Next. The progress screen appears.
8.
When the support ticket is complete, click Finish. The new support ticket appears in the right
panel.
Viewing a support ticket

Support tickets appear in a separate window. To view a support ticket:
2. In the left panel, select Support Ticket. A list of the support tickets that you have generated
3.
In the right panel, select a component under the name of the support ticket, and then select
ActionsView Selected Support Ticket.
The support ticket appears in a separate window.
NOTE: If you have a popup blocker, it will prevent the new window from appearing. You
can either set your popup blocker to enable pop-ups on this site or hold the Ctrl key while
selecting the View Selected Support Ticket command.
175
4.
Click the plus (+) and minus () signs to expand and collapse sections of the support ticket.
Use the standard navigation keys (Home, End, Page Up, Page Down, and the arrow keys),
the Windows scroll bars, and the mouse to navigate through the document. To view different
amounts of information, in the drop-down box, you can change the level of detail shown to
Highlights, Normal, More details, or Everything.
NOTE: The detail level of the support ticket is set to Everything by default. Entering the factory
password enables you to select the Factory detail level. For more information about factory
passwords, see Using factory overrides (page 142).
Saving a management station log

To save the management station log for the support ticket:
1. In the library window, click the support ticket.
2. Click ActionsSave Management Station Logs as.
3. Enter the location and file name with the extension .zip.
4. Click Save to save the management station log zip file.
This zip file will have the management station logs which can be extracted and viewed. The
management station logs in the support ticket can be saved to a local machine.
176
Saving a support ticket

To save a support ticket to a different location or with a different name. For example, you can save
a support ticket on a client so that it can be opened with L&TT.
2. In the left panel, select Support Ticket. A list of the support tickets that you have generated
3.
Enter a path and filename, and click Save. The file is saved as a ZIP file.
Sending a support ticket by e-mail

To send a support ticket by e-mail:
NOTE: Before Command View TL can e-mail a support ticket, you must have an SMTP server.
See Changing the e-mail settings (page 28).
1.
2.

Using support tickets 177
3.
178
Enter your information on the pages of the E-mail Support Ticket wizard. If this is an ongoing
support case, select the Send to support provider in reference to an open case option and
enter the case reference number in the appropriate field. If this is a new support request, select
the Send to support provider to request support by e-mail option. Enter the product number
and product serial number in the appropriate fields. When you have completed the wizard,
click Finish. The ZIP file that was created when you generated the support ticket is sent to HP
Support.
Removing a support ticket

1.
2.

3.
To confirm that you want to remove the support ticket, click Yes.
179
4 Command View TL CLI

In addition to the Command View TL GUI, the Interface Manager card can be managed via a
command line interface (CLI). The CLI provides commands to perform all necessary management
functions.
This chapter explains how to initiate a CLI session, the structure of the CLI, and basic navigational
techniques. For a comprehensive listing of CLI commands, see (page 190).
Accessing the CLI

You can access the CLI either through a direct RS-232 connection, or by using Telnet or SSH over
the LAN. You can have multiple sessions open at the same time (serial, Telnet or SSH, or Command
View TL). If a write operation is in progress in one session, subsequent write operations for that
library from other sessions will be denied.
SerialUses a CLI and connects directly to the Interface Manager card through an RS232
serial interface rather than through the LAN.
TelnetUses the same CLI as the serial interface, but requires the IP address of the Interface
Manager card to initiate the session. This IP address can be set through the Interface Manager
card serial interface or cascade port or, on ESL E-Series and EML E-Series libraries, through
the library OCP. The advantage of using Telnet over the serial interface is that users can Telnet
from any client machine that is on the LAN; a separate serial connection is not needed.
NOTE: If you use Telnet to change the IP address of the Interface Manager card, you must
log in to a new Telnet session with the new IP address.
The Telnet service may be disabled by the admin user. If the Telnet service has been disabled,
it can only be re-enabled with a Serial connection. See set inet telnet (page 206).
SSHThis protocol uses the same CLI as the Telnet and serial interfaces, but over a more
secure channel. Different SSH client applications are available for various operating systems.
When connected via SSH, use it in the exact way you would use Telnet.
Starting a serial session

1.
2.
3.
Connect the management station or other PC or laptop to the Interface Manager card using
the serial cable shipped with the Interface Manager card.
Start a terminal emulation program on the PC that you connected to the Interface Manager
card in Step 1. A variety of programs can be used, but HyperTerminal, included with Microsoft
Windows operating systems, is the most common. To start HyperTerminal, select Start+All
ProgramsAccessoriesCommunicationsHyperTerminal.
Set the communications settings as follows:
Port Speed: 9600
Data Bits: 8
Parity: none
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: none
4.
At the login prompt, use the following default information:
Username: cliadmin
Password: clipwd
NOTE: After initially logging in, you should change your password using the set mgmt
password (page 210) command. This command starts an interactive procedure for changing
the password.
Starting a Telnet session

You can start a Telnet session with the Interface Manager card in one of two ways:
Through the LANUse any PC on the LAN, including the management station, to Telnet into
the Interface Manager card using the network IP address. See Telnetting through the LAN.
Through the Cascade portConnect a PC to the Interface Manager card via the cascade port
and Telnet into the Interface Manager card using the cascade IP address. See Telnetting
through the cascade port.
Any time you can connect via Telnet, you can connect via SSH. SSH uses the same CLI as the
Telnet and serial interfaces, but over a more secure channel. Different SSH client applications are
available for various operating systems. When connected via SSH, use it in the exact way you
would use Telnet.
Telnetting through the LAN

From any PC on the LAN, including the management station, do the following:
1. Open a command prompt and enter the following command:
telnet name
where name is either the IP address or hostname of the Interface Manager card.
2.
Username: cliadmin
Password: clipwd
the password.
Telnet and serial interfaces, but over a more secure channel. Different SSH client applications
are available for various operating systems. When connected via SSH, use it in the exact way
you would use Telnet.
Telnetting through the cascade port

The cascade port of the Interface Manager card has a dedicated IP address that is hardcoded into
the Interface Manager card and is completely separate from the network IP address. The cascade
port provides a backdoor method for accessing the Interface Manager card and making
configuration changes, such as getting or setting the network IP address.
Accessing the CLI
181
1.
Connect a standard RJ-45 Ethernet cable from the network port of the PC or laptop to the
cascade port of the Interface Manager card.
Figure 19 Telnetting through the cascade port
2.
Open a command prompt and enter the following command:

telnet 192.168.2.1
NOTE: The above IP address is hardcoded into the Interface Manager card and is completely
separate from the network IP address.
Username: cliadmin
Password: clipwd
the password.
Telnet and serial interfaces, but over a more secure channel. Different SSH client applications
are available for various operating systems. When connected via SSH, use it in the exact way
you would use Telnet.
Command syntax structure

The command prompt has the following format:
/command_level >
The variable command_level indicates the current command level. For example, when you first
log in to the CLI with your CLI username and password, you see the following root-level prompt:
/ >
The root command level offers all of the basic and operational commands. To change command
levels, enter any command that is available from the current command level. For example, from
the root command level, if you enter the set command to change to the set command level, the
following prompt shows:
/set >
All of the set commands are directly available at this level.
Using command sequences

You can change to any command level by specifying a sequence of command levels. A command
sequence contains each command level name separated by a space. For example, to get to the
mode command level of the set command level, you could either enter set mode from the root
command level or mode from the set command level:
182
Command View TL CLI
/ > set mgmt

/set/mgmt >
- or / > set
/set > mgmt
/set/mgmt >
To execute a command that is available at a particular command level, either change to that
command level and enter the command, or enter a command sequence followed by the command
name. For example, if you were at the root command level and wanted to use the clock command
available at the show mgmt command level, you could do either of the following (in this example,
output of the clock command has been omitted):
/ > show mgmt clock
/ >
- or / > show mgmt
/show/mgmt > clock
/show/mgmt >
NOTE: Executing a command does not change the current command level, except in the case
of changing the Interface Manager mode. Refer to Interface Manager mode (page 184) for more
information.
Abbreviating commands
All commands can be abbreviated provided that the abbreviation is unique. For example, from
the root command level, se mo is equivalent to set mode. However, se m is ambiguous because
m at the root command level could mean either mgmt or mode.
Device numbering conventions

In some instances, Command View TL numbers devices differently from how they are numbered
on the tape library front panel. For example, if the library contains eight drives, the ESL9000 Series
library front panel refers to those drives as drive 0 through 7. Command View TL refers to the same
drives as drive 1 through 8.
Table 34 (page 183) shows the device numbering conventions used by Command View TL and by
the library front panel (when applicable).
Table 34 Device numbering conventions, CLI
Device
Command View TL
ESL9000 Series front

panel
ESL E-Series front

panel
EML E-Series front

panel
Drives
One-based
Zero-based
One-based
One-based
Drive clusters
n/a
n/a
Zero-based
n/a
Slots
One-based
Zero-based
n/a
One-based
FC interface
controllers
One-based
n/a
n/a
One-based
FC host port numbers
Zero-based2
n/a
n/a
n/a
SCSI bus numbers
Zero-based2
n/a
n/a
n/a
Command syntax structure 183
Drive clusters in the ESL E-Series libraries are zero-based, although they are not referred to from the front panel of the
library.
The zero-based numbering of the FC ports and SCSI busses corresponds to the numbers that are printed on the actual
hardware.
Navigating the CLI

The CLI is case-sensitive. Enter all commands and keywords in lower case. User-defined strings,
such as names or descriptions, may be any case including mixed case. Case information for
user-defined strings is preserved in the configuration.
The CLI provides the following basic commands:
Table 35 Basic commands
Command
Description
show
Displays configuration, status, and log information.
set
Sets or changes configurable values.
map
Contains commands to map hosts to all drives.
unmap
Contains commands to unmap hosts from all drives.
save
Saves the current configuration or logs.
restore
Restores saved or factory default configurations.
download
Downloads firmware.
reboot
Reboots devices.
create
Contains commands to create hosts for mapping purposes.
move
Move media between drives, slots, and mail slots.
synch
Contains commands to synchronize the mapping.
replace
Launches part replacement wizards.
remove
Launches the remove host wizard.
clear
contains commands to clear various Interface Manager characteristics
Table 36 (page 184) shows additional operating commands provided by the CLI.
Table 36 Operational commands
Command
Description
home
Moves to the root command level.
up
Moves up one command level.
help
Displays help text for a particular command.
exit
Terminates the current management session.
The CLI also provides a command history that stores the last ten entered commands. Use the up
and down arrow keys to scroll through the list of previous commands. For a complete listing of CLI
commands, see (page 190).
Interface Manager mode

The Interface Manager mode setting specifies how the FC interface controllers are configured. In
Automatic mode, the host port connection settings will be configured the same across all FC interface
controllers in the library. In Manual mode, the host port connection settings for each FC interface
controller can be configured differently. For example, one host port can be configured for Fabric
Attach and another can be configured for Direct Attach.
CAUTION: HP strongly recommends that you leave the Interface Manager mode set to the default
setting of Automatic.
To change the Interface Manager mode, enter the following command:
set mode [ auto] | [manual]
When switching between modes, the current command level is changed to the root command level
for that mode. When changing from Manual mode to Automatic mode, many of the manual
configuration changes made in Manual mode will be lost.
Common CLI functions

The following list provides quick links to several of the most common functions performed in the
CLI.
Configuring a library (page 185)
Configuring the FC interface controllers (page 185)
Monitoring device status (page 186)
Updating the firmware with the CLI (page 186)
Generating support tickets with the CLI (page 187)
Using Secure Manager functions (page 188)
Configuring a library
Use the following commands to configure library properties:
set system contact assetnumber (page 219)
set system contact email (page 219)
set system contact location (page 219)
set system contact name (page 219)
set system contact pager (page 220)
set system contact phone (page 220)
show system info (page 246)
show system status (page 247)
Use the following commands to configure TCP/IP settings:
set network dhcp (page 216)
set network ipaddress (page 216)
Configuring the FC interface controllers

Use the following commands to configure the port settings:
set interface hostport alpa (page 207)
set interface hostport connection (page 208)
set interface hostport mode (page 208)
set interface hostport speed (page 208)
Common CLI functions 185
Monitoring device status

The CLI provides several commands to monitor device status. The status shown is a snapshot of
device status at the moment the command was executed. After the CLI shows the status, it does not
refresh. To refresh the status information, execute the command again.
Use the following commands to show the status of the corresponding device:
NOTE: In this command, mgmt refers to the Interface Manager card, interface refers to the
interface controllers, and library refers to the library robotics controller.
show drive status (page 224)
show interface status (page 233)
show library status (page 237)
show mgmt status (page 240)
show robotics status (page 243)
Updating the firmware with the CLI

You can use the CLI to update the firmware of the Interface Manager card and other library
hardware.
IMPORTANT: You cannot update firmware from version I1xx to I2xx with the CLI. Because the
format of the firmware file has changed, you must use different procedures to update the firmware
depending on whether you are changing minor revisions (I1xx to I1xx or I2xx to I2xx) or major
revisions (I1xx to I2xx). You must update a major revision with the Command View TL GUI. You
can update a minor revision with the Command View TL GUI or with the CLI.
This procedure involves three steps:
1. Acquire the latest firmware from http://www.hp.com and save it to a temporary location.
2. Use FTP or SFTP to transfer the firmware file to a temporary storage area in the Interface
Manager card memory.
a. Open a command shell on any PC connected to the LAN.
b. Navigate to the directory where the firmware you downloaded in Step 1 is located.
c. Enter the following command, as appropriate, depending on whether you are using FTP
or SFTP:
ftp ipaddress
where ipaddress is the IP address of the Interface Manager card.
or
sftp ipaddress@sftp
d.
Log in with the following credentials:
User name: ftp or sftp, as appropriate.
Password: Use your e-mail address to log in via FTP, or use sftp to log in via SFTP.
After logging in a command shell opens, displaying the anonymous FTP/SFTP directory.
e.
f.
g.
If necessary, use the ls command to list the contents of the FTP/SFTP directory.
Enter the bin command to turn on binary transfer mode.
Enter the following command to copy the firmware file to the temporary location in the
Interface Manager card's memory:
put [filename]
where filename is the filename of the firmware file.

h.
3.
Use the quit command to logoff the FTP/SFTP session.
Execute one of the following commands to download the firmware file from the Interface
Manager card memory to the appropriate device:
download drive (page 192)
download interface (page 193)
download library (page 194)
download mgmt (page 194)

NOTE: In this command, mgmt refers to the Interface Manager card, interface refers
to the interface controllers, and library refers to the library robotics controller.
NOTE: Firmware files have a special header that prevents them from being downloaded
to the wrong type of device. If the Interface Manager card detects an incorrect firmware
type when you execute any of the download commands, it notifies you of the problem
and deletes the firmware file from the temporary storage location in the card memory.
Generating support tickets with the CLI

The Interface Manager card can generate a support ticket for various library components.
You can generate a support ticket for drives, FC interface controllers, the library itself, and the
Interface Manager card. The command used specifies the type of support ticket to be generated.
CAUTION: Each time a support ticket is generated, it uses the same filename
(supportticket.zip) and overwrites the previous support ticket.
1.
Execute one of the following commands, depending on the type of support ticket to be created:
save drive lttsupportticket See save drive lttsupportticket (page 202).
save interface lttsupportticket See save interface lttsupportticket (page 202).
save library lttsupportticket See save library lttsupportticket (page 202).
save mgmt lttsupportticket See save mgmt lttsupportticket (page 203).

NOTE: In this command, mgmt refers to the Interface Manager card, interface refers
to the interface controllers, and library refers to the library robotics controller.
The Interface Manager card generates the file supportticket.zip and stores it in a
temporary location in the Interface Manager card memory.
2.
Use FTP/SFTP to retrieve the supportticket.zip file and copy it to a location on your PC
or network:
a. On any PC connected to the LAN, open a command shell.
b. Navigate to the directory that you want to store the support ticket in.
c. Enter one of the following commands, depending on whether you are using FTP or SFTP:
ftp ipaddress
or
sftp ipaddress@sftp
Common CLI functions
187
d.
Log in with the following credentials:
User name: ftp or sftp, as appropriate
Password: Use your e-mail address to log in via FTP, or sftp to log in via SFTP.
After logging in, a command shell opens displaying the anonymous FTP/SFTP directory.
e.
f.
g.
If necessary, use the ls command to list the contents of the FTP/SFTP directory.
Enter the bin command to turn on binary transfer mode.
Enter the following command to copy the firmware file to the temporary location in the
Interface Manager card memory:
get supportticket.zip
The file is copied to the directory you navigated to in Step 2.b.
h.
3.
Enter the quit command to logoff the FTP/SFTP session.
Use HP StoreEver L&TT software to view the support ticket. The support
ticketsupportticket.zip contains a st.ltd file that you can extract and view in L&TT
versions 4.2 and later. You can download L&TT from the HP website:
http://www.hp.com/support/tapetools
See the documentation included with L&TT for instructions on how to view a support ticket.
Using HP Secure Manager functions

Secure Manager gives the library administrator control over which drives in the library can be
accessed by the various backup hosts on the SAN. There are two levels of Secure Manager
implemented with the Interface Manager card:
Basic Secure ManagerDoes not require a license key and is automatically activated. With
basic Secure Manager, you can configure whether or not a particular Host Bus Adapter (HBA)
can access the library. However, basic Secure Manager does not enable you to control whether
a particular host HBA can see individual robotics or drives within the library. Basic Secure
Manager provides an all or nothing level of control. Basic Secure Manager is accessible
through the CLI.
Advanced Secure ManagerRequires Command View TL to use and is not available through
the CLI. See Configuring host HBA access (page 144) for more information.
Accessing Basic Secure Manager through the CLI

You can use the CLI to map a Host Bus Adapter (HBA) of a backup host to the library. When you
map a host, you give it full access to the entire library. When you unmap a host, you deny it access
to the entire library.
To map a host:
1.
Use the following command to show a list of all hosts that are known by the system:
show host info
This command lists all known hosts and assigns each one a host number. You need the host
number to map the host.
The Interface Manager card keeps track of all hosts that attempt to access the library. Some
hosts in the SAN might not be recognized by the Interface Manager card. If a host that you
need to map is not recognized by the system, use the following command to add the host:
create host [nodewwn] [hostname]
The arguments for the create host command are as follows:
nodewwnSpecify the node world wide name. World wide names are specified as 16
hex digits. For example, 1234567890ABCDEF is a well-formed world wide name. This
operand is required.
hostnameSpecify the name of the host. The host name may contain letters, numbers,
and '_' characters. The maximum length for a host name is 19 characters. This operand
is required.
After creating a new host, use the show host info command to determine the host
number of the new host.
2.
Use the following commands to map or unmap a host, respectively. For each command, enter
the host number determined in Step 1.
map host (page 195)
unmap host (page 247)
Common CLI functions 189
5 CLI Command Reference

The following commands are available to all users. Click a command name in the table to jump
to the description of that command.
clear station
create host
download drive
download interface
download library
download mgmt
map host
move media
reboot interface
reboot library
reboot mgmt
replace interface
remove host
restore interface defaults
restore system config
restore system defaults
save drive lttsupportticket
save interface lttsupportticket
save library lttsupportticket
save ltt
save mgmt lttsupportticket
save system config
set drive hostport mode
set drive hostport speed
set host name
set inet ftp
set inet telnet
set interface beacon
set interface clearwwnmismatch
set interface hostport alpa
set interface hostport connection
set interface hostport mode
set interface hostport speed
set mgmt clock
set mgmt ntp
set mgmt password
set mgmt timezone
set mgmt wwnstate
set mode
set net v6 dhcpv6
set net v6 ipaddress
set net v6 ipversion
set net v6 manual
set net v6 stateless
set network config
set network dhcp
set network ipaddress
set network snmpcommunity
set network snmptrap (page 217)
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
show
drive serialnumber
drive status
drive type
firmware available
firmware revisions
host access
host info
host name
host sparselunmap
inet
interface access
interface beacon
interface hostport alpa
interface hostport connection
interface hostport mode
interface hostport speed
interface info
interface name
interface revision
interface status
interface wwninfo
library access
library info
library interface
library name
library productid
library revision
library sensors
library serialnumber
library status
library topology
license
media
mgmt clock
mgmt info
mgmt log detail
mgmt log event
mgmt revision
mgmt status
mgmt timezone
mgmt wwnstate
mode
net info
inet
network dhcp
network ipaddress
network snmpcommunity
partition
robotics status
set ssh hostkeys (page 218)

show station (page 244)
set supportticket disable
set supportticket enable
set system contact assetnumber
set system contact email
set system contact location
set system contact name
set system contact pager
set system contact phone
set system name
show drive access
show drive hostport
show drive info
show drive interface
show drive productid
show drive revision
show ssh hostkeys (page 243)

show supportticket cache
show supportticket policy
show supportticket statistics
show system contact assetnumber
show system contact email
show system contact location
show system contact name
show system contact pager
show system contact phone
show system info
show system name
show system status
synch secmgr
unmap host
clear station
Description
Clears any management station registered with the Interface Manager. Use
this command when removing a library from its primary management station.
Syntax
clear station
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To unregister the library associated with this Interface Manager from any
management station:
/>clear station
Management station cleared.
See also
To get a management station to be the primary management station close Command View TL and
restart the service.
1. Close the Command View TL browser.
2. Right-click on My Computer and select Manage.
3. Click Services and Applications, then Services.
4. Select the Command View TL service.
5. Click Restart the service.
6. Reopen the Command View TL program.
create host
Description
Creates a reference to a HBA. This should only be used for hosts not currently
connected to any interfaces. If the specified host has already been created
using the specified node world wide name and port world wide name, no
changes are made. If there already exists a host with the specified host name,
no changes are made.
Syntax
create host node_wwn node_wwpn host_name
Availability
All users and mode
Operands
node_wwn
Specify the node world wide name. World wide names are
specified as 16 hex digits. For example,
1234567890ABCDEF is a well-formed world wide name.
This operand is required.
clear station
191
Examples
node_wwpn
Specify the node world wide port name. World wide port
names are specified as 16 hex digits. For example,
1234567890ABCDEF is a well-formed world wide name.
host_name
Specify the name of the host. The host name may contain
letters, numbers, and '_' characters. The maximum length for
a host name is 19 characters. This operand is required.
To create the host with node world wide name 10000E002020C69, world
wide port name FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF, and named myhost1:
/>create host 100000E002020C69 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF myhost1
Committing configuration done
See also
unmap host
set host name
show host name
download drive
Description
Downloads the images of a firmware file to one or more interfaces.

Firmware files can be retrieved from the Internet using HP StoreEver L&TT.
Before using this command, a firmware file must have been transferred to the
Interface Manager card's firmware repository via FTP/SFTP. See Updating
the firmware with the CLI (page 186) for more information.
Syntax
download drive
Availability
All users and mode
Operands
None
Examples
To download the firmware repository file to all drives:

Welcome to the Interface Manager Command Line Interface.
Type 'help' at the prompt for context-sensitive help.
/>download drive
You may enter 'q' at any time to quit.
Download code to Ultrium 2-SCSI drive HU10542VK4
(default: n):y
1. /im/xfer/LTT_Ultrium_2-SCSI_K620_OEM3.frm
Enter the number of the firmware file to use: 1
Download code to Ultrium 2-SCSI drive HUM4C00492
(default: n):y
1. /im/xfer/LTT_Ultrium_2-SCSI_K620_OEM3.frm
Download code to Ultrium 3-SCSI drive HU10509A3B
(default: n):n
Download code to Ultrium 2-SCSI drive HU10542W12
(default: n):n
(default: n):n
Download code to Ultrium 2-SCSI drive HU10542VJB
(default: n):n
Download code to Ultrium 2-SCSI drive HU10542VJ3
(default: n):n
Download code to Ultrium 2-SCSI drive HU10542VJL
(default: n):n
Download code to Ultrium 2-SCSI drive HU10542W0V
(default: n):n
Download code to Ultrium 2-SCSI drive HU10542VJ1
(default: n):n
(default: n):n
K620 ? Enter 'y' or 'n'
L58S ? Enter 'y' or 'n'
Download code to Ultrium 3-SCSI drive HU105089K6 L58S ? Enter 'y' or 'n'
(default: n):n
Task: Downloading drives.
Task % Complete: 0
Device
% Complete Errors Status
---------- ---------- ------ -------------------Drive 1
0
false
Waiting...
Drive 2
0
false
Waiting...
Task % Complete: 9.5
Device
% Complete
---------- ---------Drive 1
19
Drive 2
0
.
.
.
Task % Complete: 100
Device
% Complete
---------- ---------Drive 1
100
Drive 2
100
See also
Errors
-----false
false
Status
-------------------HU10542VK4 Sending chunk 25 of 27
Waiting...
Errors
-----false
false
Status
-------------------Firmware update complete
Firmware update complete
download interface
download mgmt
download interface
Description
Downloads the images of a firmware file to one or more FC interface

controllers.
Interface Manager card firmware repository via FTP/SFTP. See Updating the
firmware with the CLI (page 186) for more information.
CAUTION: Downloading firmware forces a reboot of the interface. Ensure
that no backup jobs are in progress before running this command.
Syntax
download interface
Availability
All users and mode
Operands
None
Examples
To download the firmware repository file to three different interface controllers

simultaneously:
/>download interface
Download code to HP NS E2400-160 IFC? Enter 'y' or 'n' (default: n):y
1. /im/xfer/LTT_HP_E2400-160_590c.frm
2. /im/xfer/LTT_HP_E2400-4G_590c.frm
3. /im/xfer/LTT_HP_E2400FC_590c.frm
Download code to HP NS E2400FC IFC? Enter 'y' or 'n' (default: n):y
Download code to HP NS E2400FC-4G IFC? Enter 'y' or 'n' (default: n):y
Task: Beginning download operations.
Task % Complete: 0
Device
------------------ ---------- ------ -------------------100000e00202621b
0
none
Waiting...
100000e00202d2b4
0
none
Waiting...
100000e002030a71
0
none
Waiting...
Task: Downloading interface controllers.
Task % Complete: 0
Device
% Complete Errors
------------------ ---------- ------
Status
--------------------
download interface
193
100000e00202621b
100000e00202d2b4
100000e002030a71
0
0
0
none
none
none
.
.
.
Task: Downloading interface controllers.
Device
% Complete Errors
------------------ ---------- -----100000e00202621b
100
none
100000e00202d2b4
100
none
100000e002030a71
100
none
See also
Transferring firmware to device

Status
-------------------Complete.
Complete.
Complete.
download drive
download library
download mgmt
download library
Description
Downloads the image of a firmware file to the library.

CAUTION: Downloading firmware forces a reboot of the library and all its
devices. Ensure that no backup jobs are in progress before running this
command.
Syntax
download library
Availability
All users and mode
Operands
None
Examples
To download firmware to the library:

/>download lib
Download code to EML E-Series library? Enter 'y' or 'n' (default: n):y
1. /im/xfer/LTT_HP_EML_E-Series_1120.frm
Task: Downloading library.
Task % Complete: 0
Device
---------- ---------- ------ -------------------Library
0
none
Waiting...
Task % Complete: 1.88
Device
% Complete
---------- ---------Library
1.88
.
.
.
Device
% Complete
---------- ---------Library
100
See also
Errors
-----none
Status
-------------------Transferring image to the device.
Errors
-----none
Status
-------------------Complete.
download drive
download interface
download mgmt
download mgmt
Description
194
CLI Command Reference
Downloads the image of a firmware file to the Interface Manager card.
CAUTION: Downloading firmware forces a reboot of the Interface Manager
card. Ensure that no backup jobs are in progress before running this command.
Syntax
download mgmt
Availability
All users and mode
Operands
None
Examples
To download firmware to the Interface Manager card:

/>download mgmt
Download code to INTRFC-MGR01 interface manager? Enter 'y' or 'n'
1. /im/xfer/imax_fw_I200.frm
Task: Waiting...
Task % Complete: 10
Device
---------- ---------- ------ -------------------IM
10
none
Checking firmware integrity.
Task: Waiting...
Task % Complete:
Device
---------IM
20
% Complete
---------20
Errors
-----none
The Interface Manager is rebooting.
See also
(default: n):y
Status
-------------------Rebooting Interface Manager
The CLI is closing.
download drive
download interface
download library
map host
Description
Provides a host with access to all of the current drives.

CAUTION: Using this command could force a reboot of some interfaces.
Ensure that no backup jobs are in progress before running this command.
Syntax
map host host_num[force]
Availability
All users and mode
Operands
host_num
Specify the host number. This operand is required.
[force]
An optional parameter; when force is specified, there will be

no prompt asking if you really want to map the host.
Examples
To give host 1 access to all drives:

/>map host 1
Caution: Mapping hosts could force a reboot of some interfaces
and will terminate all backup operations involving the rebooting
interfaces.
Do you really want to map the host? y
See also
unmap host
set host name
show host name
map host 195
move media
Description
Moves media between drives, slots, and mail slots.
Syntax
move media destination source
Availability
All users and mode
Operands
destination, source
Examples
The media locations are specified using a

media location type code and the logical
address of the location. For instance:
DnDrive at logical address n
MnMailslot at logical address n
SnStorage slot at logical address n
To move media from storage slot 10 to drive 1:

/>move media S10 D1
To move media from drive 1 to mail slot 1:

/>move media D1 M1
To move media from mail slot 1 to storage slot 10:

/>move media M1 S10
See also
show media
reboot interface
Description
Reboots one or more interfaces. After entering this command, you are prompted
to input whether you are sure you want to reboot the interfaces.
CAUTION: Ensure that an interface is not involved in any backup operations
before rebooting it.
Syntax
reboot interface interface_num [force]
Availability
All users and manual mode only
Operands
interface_num
Specify the interface number. All of the interfaces may

be rebooted by specifying all for this operand. This
[force]
Specify force to skip the prompt asking if you are sure

you want to reboot the interface(s). This operand is
optional.
Examples
To reboot interface 1:
/>reboot interface 1
Caution: Rebooting interfaces could take up to XX seconds and will
terminate all backup operations involving the rebooting
interfaces.
Do you really want to reboot the interface(s) (y/n)? y
Rebooting interfaces..done
To reboot all interfaces, skipping the reboot prompt:

/>reboot interface all force
See also
reboot library
reboot mgmt
196
reboot library
Description
Reboots the library. After executing this command, the CLI session is lost and
must be reestablished.
CAUTION: To avoid loss of data, ensure that all backup jobs have completed
before executing this command.
Syntax
reboot library [force]
Availability
Operands
[force]
Examples
To reboot the library:
Specify force to skip the prompt asking if you are sure you want
to reboot the Interface Manager card. This operand is optional.
/>reboot library
To reboot the library, skipping the reboot prompt:

/>reboot library force
Rebooting the Interface Manager
See also
reboot interface
reboot mgmt
reboot mgmt
Description
Reboots the Interface Manager card. After entering this command, you are
prompted to input whether you are sure you want to reboot the Interface
Manager card.
CAUTION: To avoid loss of data, ensure that all backup jobs have completed
before executing this command.
Syntax
reboot mgmt [force]
Availability
Operands
[force]
Examples
To reboot the Interface Manager card:
/>reboot mgmt
Caution: Rebooting the Interface Manager could take up to XX
seconds, and you will have to log on again to use the CLI.
Do you really want to reboot the Interface Manager (y/n)? y
To reboot the Interface Manager card, skipping the reboot prompt:

/>reboot mgmt force
See also
reboot interface
reboot library
remove host
Description
Step-by-step wizard that guides you through the removal of a host node. The
wizard displays the hosts that are available for removal from the Interface
Manager. Only hosts that are not mapped appear.
Syntax
remove host
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
reboot library
197
Examples
/>remove host
Current hosts available for removal:
Caution if the SID is non-zero, the host may be logged in to one or more interface
controllers.
(Note: If a host is currently mapped, it will not be displayed in the following list.)
Host #
-----1
2
WW Node Name
-----------------1234567890abcdee
1234567890abcdef
WW Port Name
-----------------1234567890abcdee
1234567890abcdef
Current Name(Alias)
-------------------1234567890abcdee
1234567890abcdef
SID
------0h
0h
Enter a host number to remove or 'q' to quit:1

Do you really want to remove the host '1234567890abcdee'?
Enter 'y' to continue or 'q' to quit: y
Removing host.
Removing host WWNN: 1234567890abcdee, WWPN: 1234567890abcdee from 100000e002034d9a, port
# 0
Removing host WWNN: 1234567890abcdee, WWPN: 1234567890abcdee from 100000e002034d9a, port
# 1
Activating changes on IFC: 100000e002034d9a
Finished removing host
See also
show host access

show interface access
replace interface
Description
Step-by-step wizard that guides you through the replacement of one or more
interface controllers. Retains all settings including Secure Manager settings,
partitions, and WWNs and updates firmware revisions.
Syntax
replace interface
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
/>replace interface
The Interface Controller Replacement Wizard guides you through the interface
controller replacement procedure. You will be asked to confirm which Interface
Controllers have been removed from the library and verify that a replacement
interface controller(s) has been correctly cabled. Once the replacement Interface
Controller(s) has been identified the wizard will automatically reconfigure all
interface controller settings. These settings may include:
- Fibre Channel Port Speed
- Fibre Channel Port Mode
- Secure Manager and Partitioning settings
- Robotics (SIPP) Settings
- WWN Information
When replacing an Interface Controller it is critical that the new card is
cabled identically to the one it is replacing. Carefully document the
current cabling prior to removing the card.
The following cards on the specified library platform may be hot swapped:
- 4 Gig IFC on ESL-e
For all other card/library combinations you must power off the library
before replacing the controller(s).
Press 'C' to continue (default), or 'Q' to quit this process
>> c
At this point, please take the following steps:
1. Document the cabling currently used by the Interface Controller(s) that need
to be replaced.
2. If any of the cards to be replaced are not hot-swappable, please power down
the library prior to swapping the cards. If the library is powered down you
will need to restart this wizard after powering up the library.
3. Remove the Interface Controller(s) from the library.
4. Add the replacement Interface Controller(s) to the library.
5. Re-cable each replacement Interface Controller identically to the one replaced
(WARNING) Do not connect new FRUs to hosts until this wizard has completed.
Warning: You must identically re-cable the IFC or the IM will not be able to
re-apply the settings.
Press 'C' once the IFCs have been swapped. If you need to power down the library
press 'Q' and restart this wizard after restoring power to the library.
>> c
Locating replacement devices in the library
Calling FindReplacmentIFCs
Searching for replacement candidate for missing Interface Controller 1 out of 1

(100000e002025e2f)
Finished searching for replacement hardware
Calling GetValidReplacementIndices
IFC # Missing IFC WWN
Replacement IFC WWN
Status
----- -------------------- -------------------- ----------------1
100000e002025e2f
100000e00202a627
Ready to configure
Select 1 or more IFCs to replace, using the index in column 1. If more than
one IFC is selected, separate the indices with spaces: 1 2 4. Type 'all' to
reconfigure all cards with the identified replacement. Type 'R' to refresh
the list (for instance, after correcting a cabling error). Type 'Q' to quit
this wizard without completing the operation.
>> 1
FRU replacement has begun.
Initializing
Activity: Initiating Restore
Initializing
Activity: Restoration of connection settings to IFC 100000e002025e2f completed
successfully; Waiting for IFC to reboot to finalize settings
Initializing
Activity: Restoration of port settings to IFC 100000e002025e2f completed
successfully
Initializing
successfully
IFC Replacement operation failed - Synch failed .
IFC Replacement operation failed - Synch failed.
successfully
FRU replacement has completed.
You may now connect the FRUs that were successfully replaced to the hosts.
See also
None

Description
Restores interfaces to their factory defaults.

CAUTION: Using this command forces a reboot of the interface. Ensure that
no backup jobs are in progress before running this command.
Syntax
restore interface defaults interface_num
Availability
Operands
interface_num
Examples
To restore the factory defaults on interface 1:
Specify the interface number that will be restored to

factory defaults. All of the interfaces may be restored to
factory defaults by specifying all for this operand. This
/>restore interface defaults 1

Committing configuration...done
The interface(s) must be rebooted before the new configuration
will take effect.
To restore the factory defaults on all interfaces:

/>restore interface defaults all
The interfaces(s) must be rebooted before the new configuration
will take effect.
See also
restore interface defaults 199

Description
Restores the system configuration so that it matches the last saved configuration.
The system configuration includes the Interface Manager card, interfaces, and
licensed feature configuration.
Before using this command, the system configuration must have been saved
using the save system config command. The save system config command
creates a file called IM_save_snapshot.zip, which is saved in the ftp
directory of the Interface Manager card and Command View TL save current
configuration action creates a file name
IM_save_snapshot_<serialnumber>.zip which is saved on the server
in a user picked location. With Interface Manager firmware i273 or lower
the Command view TL save configuration file has to be renamed
IM_save_snapshot before putting it in the ftp directory. With I274 and
above the file can be both names. It also works if the CVTL file has the date
inserted before the .zip. One of these configuration files must be present in
the ftp directory before running the restore system config command.
If the saved configuration file is not named IM_save_snapshot.zip, it
must be renamed before the FTP process.
After entering this command, you are prompted to input whether you are sure
you want to restore the system configuration.
CAUTION: This command causes reboots of all interfaces and all LTO4 and
later drives, causing backup operations to terminate, so ensure that there are
no backup operations in process when this command is executed.
CAUTION: In I240 and above you can restore the configuration for two
major revisions back. For example, I270 can restore configurations saved
with I260 and I250. Saving and restoring the configuration must be done
with the same version of the Interface Manager firmware for I232 and below.
For example, you cannot save the configuration with Interface Manager
firmware version I230, upgrade to version I231, and then restore the
configuration.
Syntax
restore system config [force]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
[force]
Examples
To restore the system configuration:
to restore the system configuration to the last saved configuration.
This operand is optional.
/>restore system config

Caution: Restoring the system configuration will force a reboot
of the Interface Manager, and you will have to log on again.
Do you really want to restore the system configuration?
Enter 'y' to continue or 'n' to skip [default='n']: y
Preparing the system configuration...
Restoring the system configuration...
To restore the system configuration, skipping the prompt:

/>restore system config force
See also
save system config
NOTE: Back up the system after any change to the physical configuration of the library. A
successful restore will not occur if the configuration file contains references to a physical configuration
that no longer exists.

Description
Restores the factory defaults of the Interface Manager card and all connected
interface controllers. When restoring the factory defaults, the following Interface
Manager card settings may be optionally retained:
Network settings (IP address, subnet, and gateway). HP recommends

retaining the network settings if they are already working properly.
Management station settings
Trace and event logs
SNMP settings
Encryption settings
CAUTION: Using this command forces a reboot of the Interface Manager

card and all connected interface controllers. Ensure that no backup jobs are
in progress before running this command.
NOTE: The host mapping configuration data of each interface controller is
synchronously stored on both the interface controller and on the Interface
Manager card. When either the interface controller or the Interface Manager
card is reset, the Interface Manager card attempts to synchronize the host
mapping configuration. If you reset an interface controller, the Interface
Manager card restores the mapping configuration to the controller when the
controller reboots. If you reset the Interface Manager card, the Interface
Manager card retrieves the mapping configuration of all connected interface
controllers after it reboots. However, because this command resets all devices,
the mapping configuration is lost and you will have to reconfigure mapping.
Syntax
restore system defaults [force] [imnet] [mgmt] [logs] [snmp]

[imkma]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
[force]
[imnet]
Retains the Interface Manager card network settings (IP address,

subnet, and gateway). This operand is optional.
[mgmt]
Retains management station settings. This operand is optional.
[logs]
Retains trace and event logs. This operand is optional.
[snmp]
Retains SNMP settings. This operand is optional.
[imkma]
Retains encryption settings used for LTO4 and later tape drives.
This operand is optional.
Examples
To restore the factory defaults and retain network settings:

/>restore system defaults imnet
Caution: Restoring the system factory defaults will force a reboot
of the Interface Manager, and you will have to log on
again. Do you really want to restore the system factory defaults?
Restoring the system factory configuration...Please log in again after
the reboot.
See also
restore system defaults 201

Description
Generates an HP StoreEver L&TT support ticket for a tape drive. The Interface
Manager card places the support ticket in an anonymous FTP directory, which
can then be transferred from the Interface Manager card firmware repository
via FTP/SFTP.
Syntax
save drive lttsupportticket drive_num [force]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
drive_num
Specify a drive number. Information for the selected tape drive

appears in the support ticket. This operand is required.
[force]
Specify force to skip the prompt asking if you are sure you
want to save the support ticket for the tape drive. This operand
is optional.
Examples
To generate a support ticket for the third drive in the ESL library:
/>save drive lttsupportticket 3
Generating support ticket...done
You can get your support ticket by using anonymous FTP.
See also


Description
Generates an L&TT support ticket for a FC interface controller. The Interface

Manager card places the support ticket in an anonymous FTP/SFTP directory,
which can then be transferred from the Interface Manager card firmware
repository via FTP/SFTP.
Syntax
save interface lttsupportticket interface_num
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
interface_num
Examples
To generate a support ticket for the interface 3:
Specify an interface number. Information for the selected

FC interface controller appears in the support ticket. This
/>save interface lttsupportticket 3

Generating support ticket done
See also


Description
Generates an L&TT support ticket for a library. The Interface Manager card
places the support ticket in an anonymous FTP/SFTP directory, which can then
be transferred from the Interface Manager card firmware repository via

FTP/SFTP.
Syntax
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To generate a support ticket for the ESL library:

/>save library lttsupportticket
See also

save ltt
Description
Saves the Access Control Groups (ACG) or maps and Target Port Associations
(TPA) support ticket information in the acg.txt and tpa.txt files. The
Interface Manager card places the files in anonymous FTP/SFTP directory
(/im/xfer in the Interface Manager Flash), which can then be transferred
from the Interface Manager card firmware repository via FTP/SFTP.
CAUTION: Each time the ACG and TPA information is saved, it uses the
same filenames (acg.txt and tpa.txt ) and overwrites the previous files.
Syntax
save ltt
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To save the ACG and TPA information for the ESL library:
/>save ltt
Generating files
You can get your files by using anonymous FTP.
See also


Description
Generates an L&TT support ticket for the Interface Manager card. The Interface
Manager card places the support ticket in an anonymous FTP/SFTP directory,
which can then be transferred from the Interface Manager card firmware
repository via FTP/SFTP.
Syntax
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
save ltt 203
Examples
To generate a support ticket for the Interface Manager card:

/>save mgmt lttsupportticket
See also

save system config

Description
Saves the system configuration so that it can be restored at a later time using
the restore system config command. The system configuration includes
the Interface Manager card, interfaces, and licensed features configuration.
This command overwrites any previously saved system configuration. After
entering this command, you are prompted to input whether you are sure you
want save the system configuration.
CAUTION: In I240 and above you can restore the configuration for two
major revisions back. For example I270 can restore configurations saved with
I260 and I250. Saving and restoring the configuration must be done with the
same version of the Interface Manager firmware for I232 and below. For
example, you cannot save the configuration with Interface Manager firmware
version I230, upgrade to version I231, and then restore the configuration.
NOTE: This command saves the configuration to the
IM_save_snapshot.zip file in the FTP directory.
Syntax
save system config [force]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
[force]
Examples
To save the system configuration:
to save the current system configuration. This operand is optional.
/>save system config

Caution: Saving the system configuration will overwrite the last
saved system configuration.
Do you really want to save the system configuration (y/n)? y
Saving the system configuration...done
To save the system configuration, skipping the prompt:

/>save system config force
Saving the system configuration...done
See also
NOTE: Back up the system after any change to the physical configuration of the library. A
successful restore will not occur if the configuration file contains references to a physical configuration
that no longer exists.

Description
Sets the mode for all host ports for the drive entered or all LTO4 and later
drives.
Syntax
set drive hostport mode [drive_num] | [all] mode [alpa]
Availability
Operands
drive_num
The drive number for which to set the hostport mode. The mode
may be changed for all LTO4 and later drives by specifying
all for this operand. This operand is required.
mode
The mode, which can be: auto, hard, soft, or nport. When
mode is hard, the alpa may be specified. This operand is
required.
NOTE: The alpa value cannot be 0xEF because this is equal
to a loopid of 0, which is soft mode.
Examples
To set the mode to soft addressing on all ports on all LTO4 and later drives:
/>set drive hostport mode all soft
To set the mode to hard addressing on all ports on all LTO4 and later drives:
/>set drive hostport mode all hard
To set the mode to hard addressing and ALPA to 0xbc on all ports on all LTO4
and later drives:
/>set drive hostport mode all hard 0xbc
To set the mode to hard addressing on all ports on drive number 1:

/>set drive hostport mode 1 hard
See also

show interface hostport alpa
ALPA matrix

Description
Sets the speed for all host ports for the drive entered or all LTO4 and later
drives.
Syntax
set drive hostport speed [drive_num] | [all] speed
Availability
Operands
drive_num
The drive number for which to set the hostport speed. The
mode may be changed for all LTO4 and later drives by
specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.
speed
The value associated with the speed. This operand is required.

The speed may be:
Examples
1 for 1-gigabit (LTO4 only)
2 for 2-gigabit
4 for 4-gigabit
8 for 8gigabit (LTO5 and later)
To set the speed to 4-gigabit on all LTO4 and later drives:

/>set drive hostport speed all 4
See also
set host name

Description
Gives a host HBA a name. A name is applied to a host using the number of
that host as it appears when using the show host name all command. If
another host already has the specified name, no changes are made because
every host name must be unique. If the specified host already has a name,
set drive hostport speed 205
the new name is applied, and all resource mapping pools to which the host
had been added are updated to reflect the new name.
Syntax
set host name index host_name
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
index
Specify the number of the host to be named.
host_name
Specify the name of the host. The host name may contain
letters, numbers, and '_' characters. The maximum length for
a host name is 19 characters. This operand is required.
Examples
To set the name of host 1 to myhost1:

/>set host name 1 my_host1
See also
show host name
set inet ftp

Description
Enables or disables the FTP/SFTP service.
Syntax
set inet ftp [on] | [off]
Availability
Admin user and all modes
Operands
on
Enables the FTP/SFTP service.
off
Disables the FTP/SFTP service.
Examples
To disable the FTP/SFTP service:

/>set inet ftp off
See also
set inet telnet
set inet telnet

Description
Enables or disables the Telnet service.

NOTE: If the Telnet service is disabled, you can only re-enable it by
connecting with a serial cable to the Interface Manager.
Syntax
set inet telnet [on] | [off]
Availability
Admin user and all modes
Operands
on
Enables the Telnet service.
off
Disables the Telnet service.
Examples
To disable the Telnet service:

/>set inet telnet off
See also
set inet ftp

Description
Turns the beacon on an HP StorageWorks e2400-4Gb FC interface controller

on or off. Starts a wizard that prompts you for each interface controller that
has a beacon.
Syntax
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To turn on the beacon on interface controller 2:
/>set interface beacon

The following interfaces have beacon functionality:
Change beacon on interface 2 ? Enter 'y' or 'n' (default: n):y
Enable this beacon? Enter 'y' for on, 'n' for off (default: n):y
Change beacon on interface 3 ? Enter 'y' or 'n' (default: n):n
Change beacon on interface 4 ? Enter 'y' or 'n' (default: n):n
See Also
show interface beacon

Description
Clears the World Wide Name (WWN) mismatch on an interface controller.

All WWN information shown is for the node name/ID. For more information,
see Managing the interface controllers (page 42).
Syntax
set interface clearwwnmismatch interface_num
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
interface_num
Examples
To clear the WWN mismatch on interface controller 1:
Specify the number of the interface controller.
/>set interface clearwwnmismatch 1
See also
set mgmt wwnstate

show interface wwninfo

Description
Sets the ALPA for an interface port when the addressing mode of that port is
set to hard addressing. If the interface port mode is not set to hard addressing,
the ALPA is saved and used when the addressing mode is changed to hard
addressing.
Syntax
set interface hostport alpa interface_num port_num address
Availability
Operands
interface_num
Specify the number of the interface. The ALPA may be

changed for all interfaces by specifying all for this
operand. This operand is required.
port_num
Specify the number of the port. The ALPA may be

changed for all ports by specifying all for this operand.
address
Specify the ALPA for the interface port. The ALPA may
be either in hex notation or base 10. The hex notation
must include the leading 0x, and letter digits may be in
upper or lower case. For example, to set the ALPA to
31, this operand could be either 0x1F or 0x1f in hex
notation or 31 in base 10. This operand is required.
Examples
To set the ALPA on port 1 of interface 1 to 15:

/>set interface hostport alpa 1 1 15
See also

ALPA matrix
set interface clearwwnmismatch 207

Description
Sets the connection type for one or more interfaces. The connections are either
fabric or direct connect.
CAUTION: Using this command forces a reboot of all interfaces. Ensure that
no backup jobs are in progress before running this command.
Syntax
set interface hostport connection [fabric] | [direct]
Availability
All users and automatic mode only
Operands
[fabric] | [direct]
Examples
To set the connection type of all interfaces to fabric:
Specify the connection type as fabric or direct.

/>set interface hostport connection fabric

The interface(s) must be rebooted for this command to take effect.
See also
show interface hostport connection

Description
Sets the port mode for one or more interfaces. If the interface port mode is set
to hard addressing, the interface is given a default ALPA of 0xef (31 decimal).
Use the set interface hostport alpa command to change the ALPA
for that interface.
Syntax
set interface hostport mode [interface_num] | [all]

[port_num] | [all] [hard] | [soft] | [nport]
Availability
Operands
interface_num
Specify the number of the interface. The

mode may be changed for all
interfaces by specifying all for this
port_num
Specify the number of the port. The

mode may be changed for all ports by
specifying all for this operand. This
[hard] | [soft] | [nport]
Specify the port mode for the

interface(s). This operand may be either
hard for hard addressing, soft for
soft addressing, or nport for fabric
addressing. This operand is required.
Examples
To set the port mode of ports on all interfaces to soft addressing:

/>set interface hostport mode all all soft
See also
show interface hostport mode


Description
Sets the port speed for one or more interfaces. The available port speeds are
1, 2, or 4 Gbps. Only the HP StorageWorks e2400-4Gb FC interface controller
can run at 4 Gbps. In Automatic mode, changing the interface hostport speed
applies to all ports on all interfaces.
CAUTION: Using this command in Automatic mode forces a reboot of all
interfaces. Ensure that no backup jobs are in progress before running this
command.
Syntax
set interface hostport speed [interface_num] | [all]

[port_num] | [all] [1] | [2] | [4]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
interface_num
Specify the number of the interface. The speed may

be changed for all interfaces by specifying all for
this operand. This operand is required only in manual
mode.
port_num
Specify the number of the port. The speed may be

changed for all ports by specifying all for this
operand. This operand is required only in manual
mode.
[1] | [2] | [4]
Specify 1, 2, or 4 Gbps port speed. This operand is

required.
Examples
To set the port speed of all ports on all interfaces to 2 Gbps (this example
assumes that you are using manual mode):
/>set interface hostport speed all all 2
See also
show interface hostport speed
set mgmt clock

Description
Sets the date and time on the Interface Manager card.
Syntax
set mgmt clock time
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
time
Specify the date and time as a string in the format: mmddhhmmyy

where:
mm is the month, valid values are 01-12
dd is the date, valid values are 01-31
hh is the hour, valid values are 00-23
mm is minutes, valid values are 00-59
yy is the year, valid values are 00-37

Examples
To change the current date and time on the Interface Manager card to February
27, 2001 12:30:00:
/>set mgmt clock 0227123001
Committing configuration...done.
See also
show mgmt clock
set mgmt clock 209
set mgmt ntp

Description
Starts or stops clock synchronization via NTP or checks connectivity with NTP
servers. If starting NTP or checking connectivity, provide one to three NTP
servers.
Syntax
set mgmt ntp [[check ntp-servers] | [start

ntp-servers]stop]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
ntp-servers
The IP address or name of one to three NTP servers

separated by spaces. For example:
192.0.2.12 192.0.2.20 ntp.example.com
Examples
To check the connectivity of three potential NTP servers:

/> set mgmt ntp check 192.0.2.12 ntp.example.com bogus.example.com
Checking
Checking
Checking
Checking
for
for
for
for
connectivity with NTP server(s).

NTP server at: 192.0.2.12
NTP server at: ntp.example.com
NTP server at: bogus.example.com
Server Name
------------------192.0.2.12
ntp.example.com
bogus.example.com
NTP Responds
-----------TRUE
TRUE
FALSE
To start NTP with two NTP servers:

/> set mgmt ntp start 192.0.2.12 ntp.example.com
Beginning Start NTP Operation
Configuring
Starting NTP
Synchronizing with NTP servers
Exiting Start NTP Operation
To stop NTP:
/> set mgmt ntp stop
Beginning Stop NTP Operation
NTP successfully stopped.
See also
show mgmt clock
set mgmt password

Description
Sets the password for the current user. After using this command, the new
password must be used to log in to the CLI.
Syntax
set mgmt password
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To change the password to clipwd:

/> set mgmt password
Changing password for user cliadmin
New UNIX password: clipwd
BAD PASSWORD: it is based on a dictionary word
Retype new UNIX password: clipwd
See also
None
set mgmt timezone
210
Description
Sets the Interface Manager card time zone.
Syntax
set mgmt timezone zone
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
zone
Examples
To change the Interface Manager card time zone to that for Denver, Colorado:
Specify the time zone number that corresponds with the list that
appears. This operand is required.
/>set mgmt timezone

Number Timezone
Number Timezone
------ --------------------------------- ---------------------------63
America/Belize
94
America/Goose_Bay
64
America/Boa_Vista
95
America/Grand_Turk
65
America/Bogota
96
America/Grenada
66
America/Boise
97
America/Guadeloupe
67
America/Buenos_Aires
98
America/Guatemala
68
America/Cambridge_Bay
99
America/Guayaquil
69
America/Cancun
100
America/Guyana
70
America/Caracas
101
America/Halifax
71
America/Catamarca
102
America/Havana
72
America/Cayenne
103
America/Hermosillo
73
America/Cayman
104
America/Indiana/Indianapolis
74
America/Chicago
105
America/Indiana/Knox
75
America/Chihuahua
106
America/Indiana/Marengo
76
America/Cordoba
107
America/Indiana/Vevay
77
America/Costa_Rica
108
America/Indianapolis
78
America/Cuiaba
109
America/Inuvik
79
America/Curacao
110
America/Iqaluit
80
America/Danmarkshavn
111
America/Jamaica
81
America/Dawson
112
America/Jujuy
82
America/Dawson_Creek
113
America/Juneau
83
America/Denver
114
America/Kentucky/Louisville
84
America/Detroit
115
America/Kentucky/Monticello
85
America/Dominica
116
America/Knox_IN
86
America/Edmonton
117
America/La_Paz
87
America/Eirunepe
118
America/Lima
88
America/El_Salvador
119
America/Los_Angeles
89
America/Ensenada
120
America/Louisville
90
America/Fort_Wayne
121
America/Maceio
91
America/Fortaleza
122
America/Managua
92
America/Glace_Bay
123
America/Manaus
93
America/Godthab
124
America/Martinique
Enter the timezone number to select a timezone, 'm' to print more possible
timezones or 'q' to quit without selecting a timezone [default = 'm']: 83
See also
show mgmt timezone
set mgmt wwnstate

Description
Sets the World Wide Name (WWN) retention state for the Interface Manager
card. All WWN information shown is for the node name/ID. This command
is deprecated. For more information, see Managing the interface
controllers (page 42).
NOTE: In Command View TL versions 2.0 and later and Interface Manager
I200 and later the WWN retention state feature is always enabled.
Syntax
set mgmt wwnstate [enabled] | [disabled]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
[enabled] | [disabled]
Examples
To enable the WWN retention state of the Interface Manager card:
Specify whether to enable or disable the

WWN retention state. This operand is
required.
/>set mgmt wwnstate enabled
See also

show mgmt wwnstate
set mgmt wwnstate
211
set mode
Description
Sets the Interface Manager mode for the current user to Automatic or Manual.
Switching from Manual to Automatic mode may cause configuration changes
made while in Manual mode to be lost.
Syntax
set mode [auto] | [manual]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
[auto] | [manual]
Examples
To set the mode to Automatic:
Specify auto or manual mode as required. This

/>set mode auto

Changing mode...done
Now entering basic setup!
See also
show mode
set net v6 dhcpv6

NOTE:
To use this command, first enable IPv6 using the set net v6 ipversion command.
Description
Configures the Interface Manager card to obtain IPv6 network addresses using
the DHCPv6 protocol.
CAUTION: Resetting your IP version may cause your Telnet/SSH session to
end. You will have to log on again.
Syntax
set net v6 dhcpv6 [[on] | [off] force]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
[on] [off]
Examples
To set the IP version using the DHCPv6 protocol:

/>set net v6 dhcpv6 on
Caution: Resetting the IP version may cause your CLI
session to terminate (for a telnet/ssh user), and you
may have to log on again.
Do you really want to change the IP version to DHCPv6?
Operation status: Starting to change network.
Operation status: Finished Updating Network Settings
See also

set net v6 manual
show net info

NOTE:
212
Description
Configures the Interface Managers public network interface by adding or

removing a network address.
Syntax
set net v6 ipaddress [[add] | [remove] ipaddress]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
[[add] | [remove] ipaddress] If you use these arguments without

specifying an IP address, the system
will run a wizard prompting users for

the prefix of the address to add or
remove.
Examples
To configure the Interface Managers public network interface by adding or

removing a network address:
/>set net v6 ipaddress remove
Remove IPv6 Address: Select Address
1) 2620:0000:0a07:e00a:0001:0002:0003:0004/64
2) 2620:0000:0a07:e00a:000a:000b:000c:000d/64
Enter a selection or 'Q' to quit [default='Q']: 2
Are you sure you wish to complete this remove operation
for 2620:0000:0a07:e00a000a:000b:000c:000d?
ipAddress =2620:0000:0a07:e00a:0001:0002:0003:0004/64
See also
set net v6 dhcpv6

set net v6 manual
show net info

NOTE:
Description
Configures the Interface Manager card to use the specified IP protocol.

CAUTION: Resetting your IP version may cause your Telnet/SSH session to
end. You will have to log on again.
NOTE: The Interface Manager will obtain IPv6 addresses using stateless
address auto-configuration when IPv6 or dual stack is selected for the IP
protocol.
Syntax
set network v6 ipversion [[ip4] | [ip6] | [ dualstack]

force]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
[[ip4] | [ip6] | [
dualstack] force]
NOTE:
Examples
Dualstack enables both IPv4 and IPv6 protocols.
To set the IP version:

/>set net v6 ipversion ipv6
Caution: Resetting the IP version may cause your CLI session
to terminate (for a telnet/ssh user), and you may have to log
on again.
Do you really want to change the IP version to IPv6?
See also
set net v6 dhcpv6

set net v6 manual
213
show net info
set net v6 manual

NOTE:
Description
Configures the Interface Manager to accept a user-provided network address

for the public network interface.
Syntax
set net v6 manual [[on] |

[off] force]
NOTE:
The off argument removes all manually configured network addresses
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
[[on] | [off] force]
Examples
To configure the Interface Manager to accept a user-provided network address

for the public network interface.:
/>set net v6 manual on
Add IPv6 address. Select Prefix
1) 2620:0:a07:e00a::
2) fe80::
Enter a selection or 'Q' to quit [default='Q']: 1
Enter interface identifier. xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx, a single
'::' is allowed.
Enter a selection or 'Q' to quit [default='Q']: a:b:c:d
Caution: Changing Manual addressing may cause your CLI
session to terminate(for a telnet/ssh user), and you may have
to log on again.
Do you really want to enable Manual addressing?
ipAddress = 2620:0000:0a07:e00a:000a:000b:000c:000d/64
See also
set net v6 dhcpv6

show net info

NOTE:
Description
Configures the Interface Manager card to obtain IPv6 network addresses using
stateless address auto-configuration.
CAUTION: Changing stateless address auto-configuration may cause your
Telnet/SSH session to end. You will have to log on again.
Syntax
set net v6 stateless [[on] | [off] force]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
[[on] | [off] force]
Examples
To configure the Interface Manager to obtain IPv6 network addresses using

stateless address auto-configuration:
Force is optional and overrides any

validation processes.
/>set net v6 stateless on

Caution: Changing Stateless address auto-configuration may cause
214
your CLI session to terminate

(for a telnet/ssh user), and you may have to log on again.
Do you really want to enable Stateless address autoconfiguration?
See also
set net v6 dhcpv6

set net v6 manual
show net info
set network config

Description
Permanently sets the IM network configuration to that of an EML or ESL. This

command is necessary when a new IM is embedded in an EML library, when
default configs were just set on the IM, or an IM compact Flash FRU was just
installed in the IM board and the IM cant be given a dhcp address over the
public LAN. It can also be seen in an ESL E-Series library if the IM board was
never connected to the back plane which supplies the DHCP address.
Syntax
set network config [[eml] | [esl]]
Availability
Service-level user in firmware version i232 and under, and users and modes
in firmware version i240 or over
Operands
[eml] [esl]
These specify the library type in which the card is being incorporated.
Examples
set network config eml
NOTE: Some new HP StorageWorks Interface Manager flashes are set to January 1, 1980,
which will prevent the six-month service password from working. If this is the case, set the date in
the HP StorageWorks Interface Manager in the board bios menu. After the date is set, the six-month
service password will work. See Support Communication Engineering Advisory ID c01587907
for more information.
To set the date from the bios menu:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use a serial cable to connect to the console.

Log in as admin using the password admin or cliadmin using the password clipwd.
Press the reset button on the HP StorageWorks Interface Manager.
As soon as any characters appear on the console, press Ctrl+C multiple times to access the
board bios menu.
NOTE: If the Linux version appears, the Ctrl+C command was entered too late and the bios
menu was not accessed. Reset the board and try again.
5.
From the bios menu, use the arrow keys and the Tab key to select Basic CMOS
Configuration. The selection character on the bios screen is >.
A menu appears with the present date. The date refreshes as the seconds are counted.
6.
7.
Use the Tab and arrow keys to position the selection character in the Date row (middle column
of the screen) in front of the month, day, and year.
Use the + and keys to change the month, day, and year to the correct values.
These values are set but not saved.
8.
Use the Tab and arrow keys to position the selection character in the Time row, in front of
the hours, minutes, and seconds.
set network config
215
9.
Use the + and keys to change the hours, minutes, and seconds to the correct values.
These values are set but not saved.
10. Press Esc to return to the main menu.

11. At the Save Changes and Exit? prompt, enter Y.
The date and time is now saved. The HP StorageWorks Interface Manager reboots. The
six-month HP service password works.
set network dhcp

Description
Enables or disables DHCP mode to set the Interface Manager card IP address.
If DHCP is disabled, the Interface Manager card IP address, gateway address,
and subnet mask must be set using set network ipaddress before the
Interface Manager card CLI can be accessed via Telnet/SSH.
Syntax
set network dhcp
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To enable using DHCP to set the IP address of the Interface Manager card:
/>set network dhcp
See also
show network dhcp

show network ipaddress

Description
Sets the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address for the Interface
Manager card. This command automatically disables DHCP mode.
Syntax
set network ipaddress ip subnet gateway
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
ip
Specify the IP address that the Interface Manager card should

use. This operand is required.
subnet
Specify the subnet mask that the Interface Manager card should
use. This operand is required.
gateway
Specify the gateway address that the Interface Manager card

should use. This operand is required.
Examples
To immediately change the IP address to 207.46.249.190, change the subnet

mask to 255.255.248.0, and change the current gateway address to
207.46.249.0:
/>set network ipaddress 207.46.249.190 255.255.248.0 207.46.249.0
Closing telnet/ssh session.
See also
show network dhcp

set network dhcp
set network snmpcommunity

Description
216
Sets the appropriate Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) community

string. SNMP is a well-defined standard of reporting device information through
a network. The Interface Manager card has a built-in SNMP agent that supports
queries to MIB-II in addition to SNMP traps/alerts.
Syntax
set network snmpcommunity [read] | [write] | [read6] |

[write6] string
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
[read] | [write] | [read6] Specify whether this command will

define the read or write community
| [write6]
string. Read and Write will set the
strings for IPV4. Read6 and Write6 will
set the strings for IPV6.
Specify the plain-text community string
or password required by SNMP clients
to read or write SNMP MIB values. This
string
Examples
To set the SNMP write community string to mycommunity:

/>set network snmpcommunity write mycommunity
To set the SNMP read community string to public:

/>set network snmpcommunity read public
See also
show network snmpcommunity
set network snmptrap

Description
Creates a SNMP trap. SNMP traps allow the Interface Manager to send
asynchronous notifications of internal events.
Syntax
set network snmptrap [[add]] | [[remove]]ip_add

trap_string severity snmp_ver mib_type
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
[add] | [remove]
ip_addr
Specifies whether this operation will add a new

trap destination or remove an existing one. ip_addr
specifies the IP address of the trap receiver.
Specifies the IP address of the trap receiver.
trap_string
Specifies the string that will be sent by the Interface Module.

Check the application that will be receiving the traps to
determine what this string should be. severity specifies the
level of event that will generate the trap. It is a combination
of one or more of the letters 'c', 'w', and 'i'; the letters
correspond to severity levels of Critical, Warning, and
Informational.
snmp_ver
Specifies the version of SNMP being used. It can be 1 or 2. Set

this to 1 unless the network environment requires 2. mib_type
Specifies the type of SNMP MIB. It can be semi or isee. Set this
to semi unless the network environment requires isee.
mib_type
Specifies the type of SNMP MIB. It can be semi or isee. Set this
to semi unless the network environment requires isee.
NOTE: When removing a trap destination, only the IP address needs to be

specified.
Examples
set network snmptrap add 10.0.0.10 public cwi 1 semi

set network snmptrap remove 10.0.0.50
set network snmptrap
217
See also
set ssh hostkeys

Description
Creates the SSH hostkeys for the Interface Manager. This command also makes
a copy of the public host keys available in the ftp public directory.
Syntax
set ssh hostkeys
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
/set/ssh>help hostkeys

Description
Turns off proactive generation of the support tickets for the tape drives. Support
ticket generation will take longer. See Generating a support ticket (page 172).
Syntax
Availability
All users and modes

NOTE: In version i273 and lower you must reboot the Interface Manager
card for this configuration to take affect.
Operands
None
Examples
To disable proactive drive support ticket generation:

/>set supportticket disable
done.
See also


Description
Turns on proactive generation of the support tickets and proactive log retrieval
for LTO tape drives on some ETLAs.
Syntax
Availability
All users and modes

NOTE: This feature can be enabled only on ETLAs that have an HP
StorageWorks Interface Manager card with 256 Mb of DDR RAM
(309522-001) or a card with 1 GB of DDR RAM.
In version i273 and lower you must reboot the Interface Manager card for
this configuration to take affect.
Operands
None
Examples
To enable proactive drive support ticket generation:

/>set supportticket enable
done.
See also

218

Description
Sets the system asset number.
Syntax
set system contact assetnumber ID
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
ID
Examples
To set the system asset number to 123456ABCD:
Specify the system asset number. The system asset number must only be
composed of letters and numbers. Its maximum length is 63 characters.
/>set system contact assetnumber 123456ABCD

See also

Description
Sets the system contact e-mail address.
Syntax
set system contact email address
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
address
Examples
To set the system contact e-mail address to myname@myorg.com:
Specify the system contact e-mail address. The e-mail address

must conform to the e-mail address format specified in RFC 821.
/>set system contact email myname@myorg.com

See also


Description
Sets the system location.
Syntax
set system contact location location
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
location
Examples
To set the system location to my_system_location:
Specify the system location. The system location must only be

composed of letters, and numbers. Its maximum length is 63
characters. This operand is required.
/>set system contact location my_system_location

See also

Description
Sets the system contact name.
Syntax
set system contact name new_name
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
new_name
Specify the system contact name. The system contact name must
only be composed of letters, numbers, and the '_' character. Its
maximum length is 19 characters. This operand is required.
219
Examples
To set the system contact name to myfirstname_mylastname:

/>set system contact name myfirstname_mylastname
See also


Description
Sets the system contact pager number.
Syntax
set system contact pager number
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
number
Examples
To set the system contact pager number to 444-444-4444:
Specify the system contact pager number. The system contact pager
number can include alphanumeric characters, dashes, periods, or
the _ character. This operand is required.
/>set system contact pager 444-444-4444

See also


Description
Sets the system contact phone number.
Syntax
set system contact phone number
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
number
Examples
To set the system contact phone number to 444-444-4444:
Specify the system contact phone number. The system contact

phone number can include alphanumeric characters, dashes,
periods, or the _ character. This operand is required.
/>set system contact phone 444-444-4444

See also

set system name

Description
Sets the system name.
Syntax
set system name system_name
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
system_name
Examples
To set the system name to my_system:
Specify the name of the tape library. The tape library name
can contain letters, numbers, and '_' characters. The
maximum length for a tape library name is 19 characters
/>set system name my_system

See also
show system name
show drive access

Description
Shows which hosts have access to one or more tape drives. For each tape
drive, a list of hosts appears. For each host, the target LUN that gives the host
access to the drive is shown.
Syntax
show drive access [drive_num] | [all]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
drive_num
Examples
To show tape drive access information for drive 1:
Specify the tape drive for which to display access information.

The access information may be displayed for all tape drives
by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.
/>show drive access 1

Access information for drive 1:
Host
Host Name
WW Node Name
1
myhost1
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
See also
LUN
1
Port
1
show drive info

show drive revision
show drive serialnumber
show drive status
show drive type
map host
unmap host
show drive hostport

Description
Shows hostport settings for one or more tape drives.
Syntax
show drive hostport [drive_num] | [all] [port_num] | [all]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
drive_num
port_num
Examples
Specify the tape drive for which to display the hostport settings.
The interface information may be displayed for all tape drives
by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.
Specify the port on the specified tape drive for which to display
the hostport settings. The interface information may be displayed
for all ports on the tape drive by specifying all for this
To show interface information for port 2 on drive 1:

/>show drive hostport 1 2 1
Drive port settings:
Drive # WW Port Name
------- ----------------------2
50.01.04.F0.00.79.F5.B4
See also
Config
Mode
-------N-Port
Actual
Mode
-------Fabric
Config
Speed
-----4 Bps
Actual
Speed
-----0 Bps
Config
ALPA
-----EF
Actual
ALPA
-----EF
show drive access

show drive info
show drive revision
show drive status
show drive access 221
show drive type

show interface info
show drive info

Description
Shows all information pertaining to one or more tape drives. This information
includes the tape drive status.
Syntax
show drive info [drive_num] | [all]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
drive_num
Examples
To show all information for all tape drives:
Specify a tape drive that will have its information appear. The
information may be displayed for all tape drives by specifying
/>show drive info all

Tape Drive status:
Drive Number Name
------------ -------------------Drive 1
drive 1
Drive 2
drive 2
Status
-------Green
Green
********************************************************
Host
Host Name
WW Node Name
LUN Port
-------- ---------------------- -------------------- --- --none
none
none
N/A N/A
Host
Host Name
-------- ---------------------none
none
WW Node Name
-------------------none
LUN Port
--- --N/A N/A
********************************************************
Tape drive interface information:
Drive Number
Interface Card Name
Interface WW Node Name
------------- -------------------- -------------------Drive 1
100000e00202733b
100000e00202733b
Drive 2
100000e00202733b
100000e00202733b
********************************************************
Tape drive product ID:
Drive Number Serial Number
Name
Product ID
------------ -------------------- --------------- ---------------Drive 1
HU72M09609
drive 1
Ultrium 1-SCSI
Drive 2
HU72M09608
drive 2
Ultrium 1-SCSI
********************************************************
Tape Drive firmware revision:
Drive Number Name
Revision
------------ -------------------- -------Drive 1
drive 1
E33W
Drive 2
drive 2
E33W
See also
show drive access

show drive revision
show drive status
show drive type

Description
Shows interface information pertaining to one or more tape drives.
Syntax
show drive interface [drive_num] | [all]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
drive_num
Specify the tape drive for which to display interface

information. The interface information may be displayed for
all tape drives by specifying all for this operand. This
Examples
To show interface information for drive 1:

/>show drive interface 1
Tape drive interface information:
Drive Number
Interface Name
FC LUN Bus
---------------- ---------------- ------ --Drive 1
myintfc1
1
0
See also
show drive access

show drive info
show drive revision
show drive status
show drive type
show interface info

Description
Shows the product ID of one or more tape drives.
Syntax
show drive productid [drive_num] | [all]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
drive_num
Examples
To show the product ID for all tape drives:
Specify a tape drive for which to display the product ID. The
tape drive product ID may be displayed for all tape drives by
specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.
/>show drive productid all

Tape drive product ID:
Drive Number
Product ID
---------------- ---------------Drive 1
Ultrium 1-SCSI
See also
show drive access

show drive info
show drive revision
show drive status
show drive type
show interface info
show drive revision

Description
Shows the firmware revision of one or more tape drives.
Syntax
show drive revision [drive_num] | [all]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
drive_num
Specify a tape drive for which to display the firmware revision.

The tape drive firmware revision may be displayed for all tape
show drive productid 223
drives by specifying all for this operand. This operand is

required.
Examples
To show the firmware revision for all tape drives:

/>show drive revision all
Tape drive firmware revision:
Drive Number
Firmware Revision
---------------- ----------------Drive 1
AEFF
Drive 2
AEFF
See also
show drive access

show drive info
show drive status
show drive type
show interface info

Description
Shows the serial number of one or more tape drives.
Syntax
show drive serialnumber [drive_num] | [all]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
drive_num
Examples
To show the serial number for all tape drives:
Specify a tape drive for which to display the serial number.

The tape drive serial number may be displayed for all tape
drives by specifying all for this operand. This operand is
required.
/>show drive serialnumber all

Tape drive serial number:
Drive Number
Serial Number
---------------- ---------------Drive 1
222222222222
Drive 2
333333333333
See also
show drive access

show drive info
show drive revision
show drive status
show drive type
show interface info
show drive status

Description
Shows the status of one or more tape drives.
Syntax
show drive status [drive_num] | [all]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
drive_num
Specify a tape drive for which to display the status. The tape
drive status may be displayed for all tape drives by specifying
Examples
To show the status for all tape drives:

/>show drive status all
Tape Drive status:
Drive Number
-----------Drive 1
Drive 2
serialNumber
-------------HU72M09167
HU72M09172
Status
-------Green
Yellow
Is
Available
--------No
Yes
Firmware
Mismatch
--------No
Yes
Has
Errors
-------No
Yes*
*Use the command 'show drive status' with a specific drive number to see
specific errors for this device.
See also
show drive access

show drive info
show drive revision
show drive type
show interface info
show drive type

Description
Shows the tape drive type for one or more tape drives.
Syntax
show drive type [drive_num] | [all]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
drive_num
Examples
To show the tape drive type for all tape drives:
Specify a tape drive for which to display the type. The type
may be displayed for all tape drives by specifying all for
this operand. This operand is required.
/>show drive type all

Tape drive type:
Drive Number
type
---------------- ---------------Drive 1
Ultrium 1-SCSI
Drive 2
Ultrium 1-SCSI
See also
show drive access

show drive info
show drive revision
show drive status
show interface info
show firmware available

Description
Shows the firmware files and revisions available to be downloaded to devices.
Syntax
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
show drive type 225
Examples
To show the available firmware files and revisions:

/>show firmware available
Firmware Revision VendorId
----------------- ----------i100
HP
1.05
HP
E36R
HP
See also
ProductID
----------INTRFC-MGR01
NS E2400-160
Ultrium 1-SCSI
show firmware revisions

Description
Shows the current firmware revisions installed in the Interface Manager card
and FC interface controllers.
Syntax
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the current firmware revisions:

/>show firmware revisions
Current Firmware Revisions
Overall firmware revision: 2.00.0
Interface manager firmware revision: 1.01
Tape library firmware revision: 3.456
Tape drive firmware revision:
Drive Number
Firmware Revision
---------------- ----------------Drive 1
AEFF
Drive 2
AEFF
Drive 3
AEFF
Drive 4
AEFF
Drive 5
AEFF
Drive 6
AEFF
Drive 7
AEFF
Drive 8
AEFF
Interface firmware revision:
Interface Number Firmware Revision
---------------- ----------------1
2.02
2
2.02
3
2.02
4
2.02
See also
show host access

Description
Shows which tape drives all hosts have access to. For each tape drive, the
LUN to which the host or hosts have access is displayed.
Syntax
show host access
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show host access information for the hosts:

/>show host access
Access information
Device
Port
--------- ---Library
0
Drive 1
0
Drive 2
0
Drive 3
1
Drive 4
1
See also
for host 1 (WWNN:

LUN Partition
--- --------0
Partition 1
0
Partition 1,
1
Partition 1,
0
Partition 1,
1
Partition 1,
show host info

1111111111111111) :
Drive
Drive
Drive
Drive
1
2
3
4
show host info

Description
Shows the name, node WWN, port WWN, and mapped status of all hosts.
Syntax
show host info
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show information for all hosts:

/>show host info
Host name information:
Host #
Node WWN
Port WWN
Current Name
------ ---------------- ---------------- ---------------1
11111111111111CC 11111111111111DD myhost1
2
22222222222222CC 22222222222222DD myhost2
See also
Mapped
-------yes
no
show host name

show interface info
show host name

Description
Shows the name, node WWN, port WWN, and mapped status of all hosts.
Syntax
show host name
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show host names, world wide names, and mapped statuses for all hosts:
/>show host name
Host name information:
Host #
Node WWN
Port WWN
Current Name
------ ---------------- ---------------- ---------------1
11111111111111CC 11111111111111DD myhost1
2
22222222222222CC 22222222222222DD myhost2
See also
Mapped
-------yes
no
set host name
show host sparselunmap

Description
Shows hosts that might have sparse LUNs.
Syntax
show host sparselunmap
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
The following example shows when one or more sparse LUN maps have been
found:
/>show host sparselunmap
Beginning to search.
Searching for sparse LUN maps on: ifcmap-2569_1681692777
Detected 1 or more sparse LUN maps
Finished searching for sparse LUN maps.
The following host(s) are
Host # WW Node Name
------ ---------------1
1234567890abcdef
See also
associated with device map(s) containing LUN holes.

WW Port Name
Current Name(Alias)
SID
---------------- -------------------- ------1234567890abcdef test
0h
None.
show inet
Description
Shows whether ftp, telnet, and rlogin services are enabled or disabled.
Syntax
show inet [ftp] | [telnet] | [rlogin] | [all]
Availability
All users and modes for ftp and telnet. Only displays rlogin information for
service-level user.
show host info 227
Operands
Examples
ftp
Displays whether the ftp service is enabled or disabled.
telnet
Displays whether the telnet service is enabled or disabled.
tlogin
Displays whether the rlogin service is enabled or disabled.
all
Displays whether the ftp, telnet, and rlogin services are

enabled or disabled.
To show whether the rlogin service is enabled or disabled::

/>show inet rlogin
rlogin is Disabled
To show whether ftp, telnet, and rlogin are enabled or disabled::

/>show
ftp is
telnet
rlogin
See also
inet all
Enabled
is Enabled
is Disabled
set inet ftp

set inet telnet

Description
Shows access information at the interface level. This command lists all tape
drives connected to the specified interface. For each tape drive listed, the
command shows which hosts have access to it, and the target LUN giving the
host access to the drive.
Syntax
show interface access [interface_num] | [all]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
interface_num
Examples
To show interface access information for interface 1:
Specify the interface for which to display access

information. The access information may be displayed
for all interfaces by specifying all for this operand.
/>show interface access 1

Interface access information:
Interface 1 tape drives:
Host
Host Name
-------- ---------------------1
myhost1
See also
WW Node Name
-------------------FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
LUN Port
---1
1
show drive access
show interface beacon

Description
For HP StorageWorks e2400-4Gb FC interface controllers, shows whether

the beacon is currently on or off.
Syntax
show interface beacon [interface_num] | [all]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
interface_num
Examples
To show the state of the beacon on interface 3:
Specify the interface for which you want to show the

beacon state. The beacon state may be displayed for
all interfaces that have beacons by specifying all for
/>show interface beacon 3

Interface 3 beacon: Off
To show the state of the beacons on all interfaces:

/>show interface beacon all
Beacon-supported Interfaces
---------------------------Interface 2 beacon: Off
See Also

Description
Shows the ALPA of one or more interfaces. This command also indicates
whether the interfaces currently have their port mode set to hard addressing
or are using the ALPAs.
Syntax
show interface hostport alpa [interface_num] | [all]

[port_num] | [all]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
interface_num
Specify an interface number. The ALPA may be

displayed for all interfaces by specifying all for this
port_num
Specify a port number. The ALPA may be displayed for

all ports by specifying all for this operand. This
Examples
To show the ALPAs for all interfaces:

/>show interface hostport alpa all all
Interface ALPAs (* indicates ALPA is not set):
Interface Card
WW Port Name
ALPA Port Mode
---------------- ----------------- ---- --------1
hostport1
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF 0x71 hard
hostport2
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA 0x96 hard
See also

ALPA matrix
show interface hostport connection

Description
Shows the connection type for one or more interfaces.
Syntax
show interface hostport alpa [interface_num] | [all]

[port_num] | [all]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
interface_num
Specify an interface number. The connection type may

be displayed for all interfaces by specifying all for this
port_num
Specify a port number. The connection type may be

displayed for all ports by specifying all for this
Examples
To show the connection type for all interfaces:

/>show interface hostport connection all all
Interface connection type:
Interface Card
WW Port Name
Connection Type
---------------- ---------------- --------------1
hostport1
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
fabric
hostport2
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
fabric
See also
show interface hostport mode

Description
Shows the port modes of one or more interfaces.

show interface hostport alpa 229
Syntax
show interface hostport mode [interface_num] | [all]

[port_num] | [all]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
interface_num
Specify an interface number. The mode may be

port_num
Specify a port number. The mode may be displayed for

all ports by specifying all for this operand. This
Examples
To show the port modes for all interfaces:

/>show interface hostport mode all
Interface port mode:
Interface Card
WW Port Num
---------------- ----------------1
hostport1
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
hostport2
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA
See also
all
Connection type
-------------N-Port
N-Port
show interface hostport sid

Description
Shows the source identifier for the port entered or all ports.
Syntax
show interface hostport sid [ interface_num | [all]] [

port_number | [all]]
Availability
All users and manual mode
Operands
interface_num
Specify the number of the interface. The value may be

port_number
Specify the number of the port. The value may be

Examples
To show the port speeds for interface 1:

/>show interface hostport sid all all
Interface fibre-Channel port settings:
Interface Card
WW Port Name
----------------- -------------------Interface Card 1
100000e00222a7a0
Interface Card 1
100000e00242a7a0
See also
Port #
-----0
1
SID
----------0x0
0x11b00

show interface info
show interface status
show interface hostport speed

Description
Shows the port speeds of one or more interfaces.
Syntax
show interface hostport speed interface_num port_num
Availability
All users and manual mode
Operands
interface_num

port_num
Specify the number of the port. The value may be

Examples
To show the port speeds for interface 1:

/>show interface hostport speed 1 all
Interface port speed:
Interface Card
WW Port Num
Speed
---------------- ----------------- ----1
hostport1
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF 2 Gbpsec
hostport2
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA 2 Gbpsec
See also
show interface info

Description
Shows all information pertaining to one or more interfaces.
Syntax
show interface info [interface_num] | [all]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
interface_num
Examples
To show all information for all interfaces:
Specify an interface number. The information may be

/>show interface info all

Interface information:
Interface status:
Interface Name
Status
---------------- ---------------myintfc1
Good
myintfc2
Downloading
***************************************************************
Interface access information:
Interface myintfc1 tape drives:
Tape Drive
---------------mydrive1
mydrive2
Tape drive access information:
mydrive1
Host Name
Drive LUN Pool
---------------- ---------- ---------------myhost1
1
mypool1
myhost2
1
mypool1
myhost3
2
mypool3
mydrive2
Host Name
---------------myhost1
myhost2
myhost3
Drive LUN
---------2
2
4
Pool
---------------mypool1
mypool1
mypool3
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Interface myintfc2 tape drives:
Tape Drive
---------------mydrive3
mydrive4
Tape drive access information:
mydrive3
Host Name
Drive LUN Pool
---------------- ---------- ---------------myhost1
3
mypool1
myhost2
3
mypool1
myhost3
1
mypool3
mydrive4
Host Name
---------------myhost1
myhost2
myhost3
Drive LUN
---------4
4
3
Pool
---------------mypool1
mypool1
mypool3
***************************************************************
Interface ALPAs (* indicates ALPA is not set):
Interface Name
ALPA Port Mode
---------------- ---- --------myintfc1
*
nport
myintfc2
0x23 hard
***************************************************************
Interface time and date:
(Only displayed for service user or manual mode)
show interface info
231
Interface Name
---------------myintfc1
myintfc2
Date
---------12/14/2002
12/14/2002
Time
----13:02
13:01
***************************************************************
Interface connection type:
Interface Name
Connection Type
---------------- --------------myintfc1
fabric
myintfc2
fabric
***************************************************************
Interface event mask:
(Only displayed for service user)
Interface Name
Event Mask
---------------- --------------myintfc1
0xFF
myintfc2
0x01
***************************************************************
Interface Fibre Channel discovery mode:
(Only displayed for service user
or manual mode)
Interface Name
Fibre Channel Discovery Mode
---------------- ---------------------------myintfc1
reboot
myintfc2
reboot
***************************************************************
Interface name information:
Interface # Node WWN
Port WWN
Current Name
----------- ---------------- ---------------- ---------------1
11111111111111CC 11111111111111DD myhost1
2
22222222222222CC 22222222222222DD myhost2
***************************************************************
Interface initiator ID(s):
Interface Name
Initiator ID(s)
---------------- ---------------------------myintfc1
6, 7
myintfc2
7
***************************************************************
Interface port mode:
Interface Name
Port Mode
---------------- ---------------------------myintfc1
nport
myintfc2
hard
***************************************************************
Interface port speed:
Interface Name
Port Speed
---------------- ---------------------------myintfc1
1 Gbpsec
myintfc2
1 Gbpsec
***************************************************************
Interface Name
Firmware revision
---------------- ----------------myintfc1
2.00
myintfc2
2.00
***************************************************************
Interface SCSI device discovery:
Interface Name
SCSI Device Discovery
---------------- --------------------myintfc1
enabled
myintfc2
enabled
***************************************************************
Interface SCSI device discovery delay:
Interface Name
SCSI Device Discovery Delay
---------------- --------------------------myintfc1
300 seconds
myintfc2
300 seconds
***************************************************************
Interface statistics gathering:
Interface Name
Statistics Gathering
---------------- --------------------myintfc1
enabled
myintfc2
enabled
***************************************************************
Interface target reset mode:
Interface Name
Target Reset Mode
---------------- ----------------myintfc1
standard
myintfc2
standard
***************************************************************
Interface trace level:
Interface Name
Trace Levels
---------------- -----------myintfc1
2, 4
myintfc2
2, 4
***************************************************************
Interface write buffering:
Interface Name
Write Buffering
---------------- --------------------myintfc1
enabled
myintfc2
enabled
See also
show drive info
show interface name

Description
Shows the name and node WWN of one or more interfaces.
Syntax
show interface name interface_num
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
interface_num
Examples
To show interface names and world wide names all interfaces:
Specify the interface number for which to display

interface names and world wide names. The information
can be displayed for all interfaces by specifying all for
/>show interface name all

Interface name information:
Interface Card
Node WWN
----------------------------1
11111111111111CC
2
22222222222222CC
See also
Current Name
-----------myhost1
myhost2
None
show interface revision

Description
Shows the firmware revision of one or more interfaces.
Syntax
show interface revision [interface_num] | [all]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
interface_num
Examples
To show the firmware revisions for all interfaces:
Specify an interface whose firmware revisions will be

displayed. The firmware revisions may be displayed for
all interfaces by specifying all for this operand. This
/>show interface revision all

Interface Card
WW Node Name
----------------- -------------------1
100000e0020286d1
2
100000e00202733b
See also
Firmware Revision
----------------5.01
5.01
show interface status

Description
Shows the status of one or more interfaces.
Syntax
show interface status [interface_num ] | [all]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
interface_num
Examples
To show the status for all interfaces:
Specify an interface for which to display the status. The

interface status may be displayed for all interfaces by
specifying all for this operand. This operand is
required.
show interface name 233
/>show interface status all

Interface status:
Interface Card
----------------Interface Card 1
Interface Card 2
WW Node Name
---------------bb5ea468bb5ea354
bb4ff343236bc023
Status
-----Green
Yellow
State
------Online
Offline
Firmware
Mismatch
-------No
Yes
Has
Errors
-------No
Yes*
*Use the command 'show interface status' with a specific interface number to see
specific errors for this device.
See also
show interface info

Description
Shows the World Wide Name (WWN) information for the requested interface
controller or controllers. All WWN information shown is for the node name/ID.
Syntax
show interface wwninfo interface_num
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
interface_num
Examples
To show WWN info for all controllers:

/>show interface wwninfo all

Interface Card
------------------Interface 1
Interface 2
See also
Current WW Name
------------------100000e0f202ed73
100000e0720309e3
Factory WW Name
------------------100000e00202ed71
100000e0020309eb
Mismatch
-------no
yes

set mgmt wwnstate
show library access

Description
Shows which hosts have access to the tape library. For each host, the target
LUN that gives the host access to the library is shown.
Syntax
show library access
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show tape library access information:

/>show library access
Access information for the tape
Host
Host Name
-------- -------------------1
myhost1
See also
library:
WW Node Name
-------------------FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
LUN Port
--- --1
1
map host
unmap host
show library info

Description
Shows all information pertaining to the tape library.
Syntax
show library info
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show all information for the tape library:

/>show library info
All tape library information
Tape library name: picker
Tape library firmware status: Green
Tape library product ID: ESL9322
Tape library serial number: 2G33KZ85H002

****************************************************************************
Tape library topology
Tape library:
Library Name
Serial Number
Interface Name
-------------------- -------------------- -------------------picker
2G33KZ85H002
100000e0020286d1
Tape drives:
Drive Num
Serial Number
-------------- ------------------Drive 1
HU72M09609
Drive 2
HU72M09608
Drive 3
HU73A01003
Drive 4
HU72L12069
Drive 5
HU72L12066
Drive 6
HU72L12103
Drive 7
HU73A05925
Drive 8
HU72M07819
Interfaces:
Interface Card
-------------------1
2
See also
Type
------------Ultrium 1-SCSI
Ultrium 1-SCSI
Ultrium 1-SCSI
Ultrium 1-SCSI
Ultrium 1-SCSI
Ultrium 1-SCSI
Ultrium 1-SCSI
Ultrium 1-SCSI
Interface Name
-------------------100000e0020286d1
100000e00202733b
Online? Interface Name

------- --------------yes
100000e0020286d1
yes
100000e0020286d1
yes
100000e00202733b
yes
100000e00202733b
yes
100000e0020286d1
yes
100000e0020286d1
yes
100000e00202733b
yes
100000e00202733b
WW Node Name
---------------100000e0020286d1
100000e00202733b
show license
show drive info
show host info
show library interface

Description
Shows interface information pertaining to the library.
Syntax
show library interface
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show interface information for the tape library:

/>show library interface
Tape library interface information:
Interface Card
WW Port Name
--------------------- -------------------1
100000e0020286d1
See also
show interface info

show library info
show library name

Description
Shows the name of the tape library.
Syntax
show library name
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the name of the tape library:

/>show library name
Tape library name: mylibrary
See also
show library info
show library productid

Description
Shows the product ID of the tape library.
Syntax
show library productid
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
show library interface 235
Examples
To show the product ID of the tape library:

/>show library productid
Tape library product ID: ESL 9326
See also
show library info
show library revision

Description
Shows the firmware revision of the tape library.
Syntax
show library revision
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the firmware revision of the tape library:

/>show library revision
See also
show library info

show library sensors

Description
Displays the status of the sensors inside the library which includes temperature,
voltage, and fan speed readings.
Syntax
show library sensors
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
/>show library sensors

Unit 1 (Operative)
Description:
Sensors - Back
Base drive CAP (Health: OK, Error: NA)
Power Supply 0
Status: Inoperative
Value: NA
Warning Threshold: NA
Normal Range: NA
Power Supply 1
Status: Operative
Value: NA
Normal Range: NA
Fan 0
Status: Operative
Value: NA
Normal Range: NA
Fan 1
Status: Operative
Value: NA
Normal Range: NA
Drive 1 Enclosure Fan/Temp
Status: Operative
Value: 24 deg
Normal Range: NA
Status: Operative
Value: 24 deg
Normal Range: NA
Status: Not Installed
Value: NA
Normal Range: NA
Value: NA
Normal Range: NA
Temperature Sensor 0
Value: NA
Normal Range: NA
...
See also
None
show library serialnumber

Description
Shows the serial number of the tape library.
Syntax
show library serialnumber
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the serial number of the tape library:

/>show library serialnumber
Tape library serial number: 123456ABCDEF
See also
show library info
show library status

Description
Shows the status of the tape library.
Syntax
show library status
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the status of the tape library:

/>show library status
Component
------------------Tape library
Robotics
See also
Status
-----Red
Green
Description
----------------------
Drives:
Drive1
Drive2
Drive3
Drive4
Drive5
Drive6
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
No
No
No
No
No
No
Interfaces:
Interface1
Interface2
Red
Red
Firmware Mismatch Detected

Interface Manager
Red
No errors detected
errors
errors
errors
errors
errors
errors
detected
detected
detected
detected
detected
detected
show library info
show library topology

Description
Shows the topology of the tape library.
Syntax
show library topology
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the topology of the tape library:

/>show library topology
Tape library topology
Tape library:
Library Name
Serial Number
-------------------- -------------------picker
2G33KZ85H002
Tape drives:
Drive Num
-------------Drive 1
Drive 2
Drive 3
Serial Number
-----------------HU72M09609
HU72M09608
HU73A01003
Interface Name
-------------------100000e0020286d1
Type
-------------Ultrium 1-SCSI
Ultrium 1-SCSI
Ultrium 1-SCSI
Online? Interface Name

------- ----------------yes
100000e0020286d1
yes
100000e0020286d1
yes
100000e00202733b
show library serialnumber 237
Drive
Drive
Drive
Drive
Drive
4
5
6
7
8
HU72L12069
HU72L12066
HU72L12103
HU73A05925
HU72M07819
Interfaces:
Interface Card
-------------------1
2
See also
Ultrium
Ultrium
Ultrium
Ultrium
Ultrium
Interface Name
-------------------100000e0020286d1
100000e00202733b
1-SCSI
1-SCSI
1-SCSI
1-SCSI
1-SCSI
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
100000e00202733b
100000e0020286d1
100000e0020286d1
100000e00202733b
100000e00202733b
WW Node Name
---------------100000e0020286d1
100000e00202733b
show library info
show license
Description
Shows the license key and quantity of currently licensed features.
Syntax
show license
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the licensed features supported and currently licensed and their license
keys:
/>show license
Supported Licensed Feature
------------------------------Direct Backup
Advanced Access Controls
See also
Licensed?
--------Yes
No
Qty
--8
show mgmt info
show media
Description
Shows media information for storage slots, drives, mail slots, or all.
Syntax
show media [all] | [slots] | [mail] | [drive] | [noprompt]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
One of these operands is required.

all
Shows media information for all storage slots, drives,
and mail slots.
Examples
slots [range]
Shows media information for all storage slots or those

within a range.
mail [range]
Shows media information for all mail slots or those within

a range.
drive [range]
Shows media information for all drives or those within

a range.
[noprompt]
An optional parameter; when noprompt is specified, the

output will run continuously, rather than pausing after
20 items have been displayed.
To show media information for all storage slots:

/>show media slots
To show media information for slots 1 to 100:

/>show media slots 1 100
To show media information for all storage slots, drives, and mail slots:
/>show media all
To show media information for all drives:

/>show media drives
Media List:
Element
-----------Drive: 1
Drive: 2
Partition Name
--------------NA
NA
Media Barcode
----------------102741L2
102452L2
Notes
-------------------Source slot unknown
From slot 1
Drive:
Drive:
Drive:
Drive:
Drive:
Drive:
Drive:
Drive:
Drive:
Drive:
See also
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Empty
Empty
Empty
102732L2
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Source slot unknown
move media
show mgmt clock

Description
Shows the current date and time for the Interface Manager card, along with
an indication of whether an NTP server is in use.
Syntax
show mgmt clock
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the current date and time for the Interface Manager card:
/>show mgmt clock
Interface manager date and time: Tue Jul 14 14:43:02 2009 MDT (Using NTP: True)
See also
set mgmt clock

set mgmt timezone
show mgmt info

Description
Shows Interface Manager card information.
Syntax
show mgmt info
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show all Interface Manager card information:

/>show mgmt info
Interface Manager
Interface manager
Interface manager
Interface Manager
IM RAM : 128 MB
See also
status: Green
date and time: Wed Jul 15 11:21:25 2009 MDT (Using NTP: False)
time zone: America/Denver
board model: IMAX
show drive info

show host info
show interface info
show library info
show mgmt log detail

Description
Displays detailed information about a specific event.
Syntax
show mgmt log detail eventID
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
eventID
Examples
To show more information about event 5 in the event log.
The identification number of the event obtained from the show

mgmt log event command.
/>show mgmt log detail 5

Event #
Timestamp
Event Type
Device
5
Mon Feb
Warning
Library
5 09:37:29 2007
show mgmt clock 239
Device State
Description
See also
Ready
Operational
show mgmt log event
show mgmt log event

Description
Displays the event log. Information for each event is summarized. To see
additional details about a specific event, see show mgmt log detail.
Syntax
show mgmt log event [noprompt]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
[noprompt]
Examples
To show the event log:
An optional parameter; when noprompt is specified, the

output will run continuously, rather than pausing after 20
items have been displayed.
/>show mgmt log event

Evt#
----10018
10017
-> Hit
See also
Timestamp (GMT)
Severity
Source
-------------------- --------- ----------Jul 14 22:56:28 2009 Warning
Library
Jul 14 22:56:18 2009 Info
Library
<Enter> for Next Page, q to Quit:
Description
------------------------Test unit ready status...
Director - auditRespons...
show mgmt log detail
show mgmt revision

Description
Shows the Interface Manager card firmware revision.
Syntax
show mgmt revision
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the current Interface Manager card firmware revision:

/>show mgmt revision
Interface manager firmware revision: 1.01
See also
show mgmt info
show mgmt status

Description
Shows the Interface Manager card status.
Syntax
show mgmt status
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the current Interface Manager card status:

/>show mgmt status
Interface manager status: Good
See also
show mgmt info
show mgmt timezone

Description
Shows the Interface Manager card time zone.
Syntax
show mgmt timezone
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the Interface Manager card time zone:

/>show mgmt timezone
Interface manager time zone: America/Denver (MST)
See also
set mgmt timezone

set mgmt clock
show mgmt clock
show mgmt wwnstate

Description
Shows the current World Wide Name (WWN) retention state for the Interface
Manager card. All WWN information shown is for the node name/ID. This
command is deprecated.
NOTE: In Command View TL versions 2.0 and later and Interface Manager
versions I200 and later the WWN retention state feature is always enabled.
The output of this command might not be shown correctly in the user interface.
Syntax
show mgmt wwnstate
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the WWN retention state of the Interface Manager card:

/>show mgmt wwnstate
enabled
See also
set mgmt wwnstate

show mode
Description
Shows the current command mode.
Syntax
show mode
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the current command mode:

/>show mode
Current command mode: manual
See also
set mode
show network info

Description
Displays the IPv4 and IPv6 network configuration of the public network
interface.
Syntax
show network info
Availability
All users and modes
Example
To display the network configuration of the public network interface:

/>show net info
- Hostname: abslib27
- IP version(s) enabled: dualstack (both IPv4 and IPv6 enabled)
- IPv4 Domain Name: gr.hp.com
- IPv6 Domain Name: gr.ipv6.hp.com
- DHCPv4 enabled
- IPv4 addr/mask/gtwy: 192.168.100.16 / 255.255.0.0 /
- DHCPv6 enabled
- IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration: enabled
- IPv6 manual addressing: enabled
show mgmt wwnstate
241
- IPv6 Addresses
Type
2620:0000:0a07:e00a:0001:0002:0003:0004/manual
2620:0:a07:e00a:280:66ff:fe05:f956/64
stateless
2620:0:a07:e00a:485c:8517:cdb:6a83/64
dhcpv6
fe80::280:66ff:fe05:f956/64
link-lcl
See also
set net v6 dhcpv6

set net v6 manual
show network dhcp

Description
Shows whether DHCP mode is enabled or disabled. When enabled, DHCP

is used to set the Interface Manager card IP address.
Syntax
show network dhcp
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show whether DHCP mode is enabled or disabled:

/>show network dhcp
DHCP: disabled
See also
set network dhcp


Description
Displays the current IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address for the
Interface Manager card.
Syntax
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the current IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address:

/>show network ipaddress
DHCP: disabled
IP address: 207.46.249.190
Subnet mask: 255.255.248.0
Gateway address: 207.46.72.1
See also
show network dhcp

set network dhcp

Description
Shows the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) community strings.

SNMP is a well-defined standard of reporting device information through a
network. The Interface Manager card has a built-in SNMP agent that supports
queries to MIB-II in addition to SNMP traps/alerts. This command also shows
all defined SNMP traps.
Syntax
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the SNMP community strings:

/>show network snmpcommunity
Community Strings:
Read Only IPV4 - public
Read/Write IPV4 - private
Read Only IPV6 - public
Read/Write IPV6 - private
Host IP
-------------15.146.154.126
16.78.5.40
See also
Trap Community String

--------------------public
public
Filter
------cwi
cwi
Ver Type
--- ---1
semi
1
semi
set network snmpcommunity (page 216)

set network snmptrap (page 217)
show partition
Description
Shows which devices are assigned to a partition.
Syntax
show partition [number] | [all]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
number
Examples
To show information for partition 1 only:
Specify the partition number. To show information for all partitions,

use all for this operand.
/>show partition 1
To show information for all partitions:

/>show partition all
See also
show host access
show robotics status

Description
Shows the status of the library robotics.
Syntax
show robotics status
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the status of the library robotics:

/>show robotics status
Tape Library robotics status
: Red
Tape Library robotics available : Yes
Tape Library robotics Errors:
Error #1 Firmware mismatch detected
See also
show library info
show ssh hostkeys

Description
Shows the Interface Manager's SSH hostkey fingerprints and exports the public
host keys. This command also makes a copy of the public host keys available
in the ftp public directory.
Syntax
show ssh hostkeys
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
/show/ssh>help hostkeys
show partition 243
show station
Description
Displays the Command View TL station's name and IP address that is receiving
the Tape Assure data.
Syntax
show station
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
/>show station
Current CVTL management station name: <CVTL station's
network name>
Current CVTL management station IP address:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
See also
clear station

NOTE:
Cached support tickets will no longer be available in Command View TL 2.6 and later.
Description
Shows detailed information on the support ticket cache for all devices (if
available).
Syntax
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
/>show supportticket cache

Device Id
---------------Drive 1
Drive 2
Drive 3
IM
See also
Cache State
----------Clean
Clean
Clean
None
Timestamp
---------------Wed Jan 31 18:46
Wed Jan 31 19:25
Wed Jan 31 18:46
Thu Feb 1 00:28
Proactive
---------No
Yes
No
No


Description
Displays whether proactive drive ticket retrieval is turned on or off.
Syntax
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To display whether proactive drive support tickets are currently enabled:

/>show supportticket policy
Current proactive retrieval policy: Disabled
See also


Description
Shows detailed information on the proactive log tickets for all devices (if
available).
Syntax
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
/>show supportticket statistics

Device Id
----------Drive 1
Drive 2
Drive 3
IM
See also
# of Proactive Requests
----------------------0
1
0
0
# of Dropped Requests
--------------------0
0
0
0
Avg Gen Time

-----------0
35
0
0


Description
Shows the system asset number.
Syntax
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the system asset number:

/>show system contact assetnumber
System asset number: 123456ABCD
See also

show system info

Description
Shows the system contact e-mail address.
Syntax
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the system contact e-mail address:

/>show system contact email
System contact e-mail address: myname@myorg.com
See also

show system info

Description
Shows the system location.
Syntax
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the system location:

/>show system contact location
System location: mylocation
show supportticket statistics 245
See also

show system info

Description
Shows the system contact name.
Syntax
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the system contact name:

/>show system contact name
System contact name: myfirstname_mylastname
See also

show system info

Description
Shows the system contact page number.
Syntax
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the system contact pager number:

/>show system contact pager
System contact pager: 444-444-4444
See also

show system info

Description
Shows the system contact phone number.
Syntax
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the system contact phone number:

/>show system contact phone
System contact phone number: 444-444-4444
See also

show system info
show system info

Description
Shows all system information.
Syntax
show system info
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show all system information:

/>show
System
System
System
System
System
system info
information
status: Good
contact name: myfirstname_mylastname
contact phone number: 444-444-4444
contact pager number: 222-222-2222
System
System
System
System
See also
contact e-mail address: myname@myorg.com

location: mylocation
asset number: 123456ABCD
name: mysystemname
show system status
show system name

Description
Shows the system name.
Syntax
show system name
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the system name:

/>show system name
System name: mysystemname
See also
set system name

show system info
show system status

Description
Shows the system status.
Syntax
show system status
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
To show the system status:

/>show system status
System status: Good
See also
show system info
synch secmgr
Description
If you have made interface controller host access changes directly through the
interface controller Telnet/SSH or serial interface instead of using the Interface
Manager card or Command View TL, the interface controller will be out of
sync with the Interface Manager card. You must then synchronize the settings
which reapplies the Interface Manager card settings to the interface controllers.
Syntax
synch secmgr
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
None
Examples
/>synch secmgr
Do you really want to Synchronize the Secure Manager?
Synchronizing the
Operation status:
Operation status:
Operation status:
Operation status:
See also
Secure Manager...
Synchronizing ACGs.
Synchronizing ACGs.
Synchronizing ACGs.
Finished Synchronizing ACGs
None
unmap host
Description
Blocks access to all of the current drives for the specified host.
CAUTION: Using this command could force a reboot of some interfaces.
Ensure that no backup jobs are in progress before running this command.
show system name 247
Syntax
unmap host host_num [force]
Availability
All users and modes
Operands
host_num
[force]
Examples
Specify the host number. This operand is required.

An optional parameter; when force is specified, there will be no
prompt asking if you really want to unmap the host.
To block host 1 access to all drives:

/>unmap host 1
Caution: Unmapping hosts could force a reboot of some interfaces
and will terminate all backup operations involving the rebooting
interfaces.
Do you really want to unmap the host? y
See also
map host
set host name
show host name
6 Troubleshooting
For common problems and how to resolve them, see the following sections:
LED diagnostic codes
Common issues (page 249)
For additional support, go to the following website:

http://www.hp.com/support/cvtl.
LED diagnostic codes

Table 37 Status LED diagnostic codes
Red LED
Green LED
Description
On
Off
BIOS code failed to run.
Blinks 1x per 5 second

interval
Off
Hardware POST failed. No firmware images are loaded.

interval
Off
No CompactFlash disk or valid boot sector image found.

interval
Off
Specified firmware image files were not found. Neither the

current nor the previous image was found.

interval
Off
Load or execute command failed (boot code remains at end

of process). This indicates that load, decompress, or execution
failed on both the current and previous image files.

interval
Off
Flash is read-only. Replace with 488160-001 (256 MB for

use on the 342213-001 or 393531-001 (AS#340252-001
or AS#340252-002) Interface Manager card) 439651-001
(1 GB for use on the 480240-001 (AS#340252-003) Interface
Manager card).
Off

interval
Load or execute command succeeded. Boot code successfully

loaded, decompressed, and initiated execution of one of the
image files.
Off

interval
Application software is initializing.
Off

interval
Application is identifying all library components.
Off
On
Normal state. Application has identified all library components.
Table 38 Network link activity/speed LEDs

LED
Status
Link Activity LED (left side of Off

each Ethernet port)
On
Flashing
Link Speed LED (right side of On
each Ethernet port)
Off
Description
Port disconnected/no link
Port connected to another Ethernet device
Data is being transmitted/received
Port is operating at 100 Mbps
Port is operating at 10 Mbps, or port is not connected (see Link Activity
LED)
Common issues
Common issues are organized into the following categories:
LED diagnostic codes 249
ESL9000 Series issues (page 250)
ESL E-Series issues (page 252)
EML E-Series issues (page 254)
MSL issues (page 256)
ESKM enrollment issues (page 256)
ESL9000 Series issues

Symptom
Possible cause
Solution
Command View TL server does not

detect the Interface Manager card
Bad network connection
Verify that the Interface Manager card

and the management station are
correctly connected to the LAN.
Interface Manager card not powered Power up the library. Observe status
up or in ready state
and link LEDs. For a description of LED
diagnostic codes, see LED diagnostic
codes (page 249).
Incorrect IP address
Verify that the correct IP address of the

Interface Manager card is entered in
Command View TL.
See Adding and removing
libraries (page 27) to configure
Command View TL with the correct IP
address.
Interface Manager card has outdated Verify that the Interface Manager card
firmware
has I130 or later firmware.
Interface Manager card does not
detect one or more FC interface
controllers

is properly connected to the FC
interface controllers and that the cables
are good.
Incorrect firmware revision
Ensure that the FC interface controllers

have the latest firmware revision. Check
http://www.hp.com/support for the
latest firmware for your devices.
Defective Interface Manager card or

FC interface controller
Observe status and link LEDs. Replace

defective card or controller.
DHCP not enabled on the interface

controller
DHCP must be enabled on the interface

controller before the Interface Manager
card can communicate with it. See the
interface controller documentation for
instructions on enabling DHCP mode.
NOTE: HP recommends resetting all
interface controllers to their default
settings.

detect drives or library
250 Troubleshooting
SCSI cables not connected properly
Check SCSI cabling.
FC cables (e2400-FC 2G or 4G only) Check FC cables and replace if

not connected properly or damaged necessary. Use link LEDs to troubleshoot
connections and cable integrity.
Symptom
Possible cause
Solution
SCSI settings or termination not set

properly
Check the SCSI settings for the

device.
Check that the SCSI bus is properly
terminated.
Timing issues
Reset the corresponding FC interface

controller.
If the reset works then increase the SCSI
bus discovery delay and/or the host
port delay should permanently fix the
problem.
Drive not powered up or in ready state Troubleshoot drive.

Command View TL does not run in the Incompatible browser version or
browser
Adobe Flash
Ensure you are using a minimum of

Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 or later,
or Mozilla Firefox 3.0, 3.5 or later.
Ensure that Adobe Flash is enabled
in the browser.
Bad network connection or network

down
Check all physical network

connections. If the connections are
good, contact your network
administrator.
Ping the management station. If
pinging fails and the IP address is
correct, contact your network
administrator.
Wrong IP address
Check the IP address of the

management station. On the
management station, open a command
shell and enter ipconfig. You must
use this IP address (or the network name
of the management station) in the URL
to access Command View TL.
Management station not running, or Check to see if the management

Command View TL service not running
station is operational.
on management station
Use the Services applet to verify that
the Command View TL service is
running on the management station.
Select Start Control
PanelAdministrative
ToolsServices.
Interface Manager does not accept a The password contains the characters If the password contains a $ or \, try
password
$ or /.
putting a \ before the $ or \. For
example, if the password is abc$def,
try abc\$def or if the password is
abc\def, try abc\\def.
Common issues
251
ESL E-Series issues

Symptom
Possible Cause
Solution

After powering up the library, it can

take up to ten minutes for Command
View TL to detect the Interface
Manager card
This is a normal delay. Wait for ten

minutes and try again.
Verify that the library and the

management station are correctly
cabled.
Interface Manager card not powered Power up the library. Observe status
on or in ready state
and link LEDs. For a description of
LED diagnostic codes, see LED
diagnostic codes (page 249).
If the Interface Manager card does
not have access to the library DHCP
server and the library firmware is at
release 2.4 or greater, access the
CLI from a serial connection and
execute the command set
network config ESL.
not have access to the library DHCP
server and the library firmware is at
an earlier version than 2.4, call HP
Support.

library is entered in Command View TL.
See the HP StorageWorks ESL
E-Series Tape Library user guide for
instructions on determining the
library IP address.
See Adding and removing
libraries (page 27) to configure
Command View TL with the correct
IP address.
Defective cabinet controller
Call HP Service.
Interface Manager card has outdated Verify that the Interface Manager card
firmware
has I130 or later firmware.
controllers
252 Troubleshooting

is properly connected to the library's
internal LAN and that the cables are
good. See the HP StorageWorks ESL
E-Series Tape Library User Guide for
more information.
Incorrect firmware revision
Ensure that the FC interface controllers

have the latest firmware revision. Check
http://www.hp.com/support for the
latest firmware for your devices.


defective card or controller.
DHCP not enabled on the interface

controller
DHCP must be enabled on the interface

controller before the Interface Manager
card can communicate with it. See the
interface controller documentation for
instructions on enabling DHCP mode.
Symptom
Possible Cause
Solution
NOTE: HP recommends resetting all
interface controllers to their default
settings.
E2400FC 4 Gb Interface controller is Make sure both fans are working in the
overheating
drive cluster. Order the baffle kit part
number 457038-001 to implement into
any additional drive clusters that is
missing the baffle. This kit includes six
baffles, which is enough to populate a
fully loaded library ESL-E library. Follow
the installation poster provided with the
baffle kit.
SCSI cables not connected properly
Check SCSI cabling.
FC cables (e2400-FC 2G or 4G only) Check FC cables and replace if

not connected properly or damaged necessary. Use link LEDs to troubleshoot
connections and cable integrity.
SCSI settings or termination not set
properly
Check the SCSI settings for the

device.
Check that the SCSI bus is properly
terminated.
Timing issues

controller.
problem.
Drive not powered on or in ready state Troubleshoot drive.

browser
Adobe Flash not enabled
Ensure that you are using a minimum

of Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 or
later, or Mozilla Firefox 3.0, 3.5 or
later.
Ensure that Adobe Flash is enabled
in the browser.

down

administrator.
administrator.
Wrong IP address

Common issues 253
Symptom
Possible Cause
Solution

Select Start Control
PanelAdministrative
ToolsServices.
EML E-Series issues

Symptom
Possible cause
Solution

Verify that the Interface Manager

card and the management station
are correctly connected to the LAN.
Use LEDs to troubleshoot Ethernet
cabling.
Ping the Interface Manager card to
verify network health.
Interface Manager card not powered Power on the library. Observe status
on or in ready state
and link LEDs.
Check for proper level of firmware.

Interface Manager card is entered in
Command View TL.
To get or set the network IP address
of the Interface Manager card, use
the CLI commands show network
ipaddress and set network
ipaddress. See Accessing the
CLI (page 180) for more information.
To add the library to Command
View TL, see Adding and removing
libraries (page 27).
not have access to the DHCP server
and the library firmware is at release
2.4 or greater, access the CLI from
a serial connection and execute the
command set network config
eml.
have access to the DHCP server and
the library firmware is at an earlier
version than 2.4, call HP Support.
The eth0 setting for the broadcast
might not be set to 0.0.0.0, call HP
Support.
Some applications in the network
are using SNMP and setting the
broadcast address. Modify the
SNMP community write name. The
command to modify the SNMP
254 Troubleshooting
Symptom
Possible cause
Solution
community string in the IPV4 network
is: set net snmp write <
community name >. The
command to modify the SNMP
community string in the IPV6 network
is: set net snmp write6 <
community name >. The
community name needs to be
anything other than the word
private.
The DNS address is set to something
weird. An incorrect DNS setting can
make the Interface Manager slow
and appear to be unresponsive or
hang. The DNS address can be set
to nothing or to a valid DNS server
IP address by using the OCP on the
library.

controllers
Verify that the Interface Manager

card is properly connected to the FC
interface controllers and that the
cables are good.
Use LEDs to troubleshoot Ethernet
cabling.



defective card or controller. For a
description of LED diagnostic codes,
see LED diagnostic codes (page 249).
Timing issues

controller.
problem.
Drive not powered on or in ready state Make sure the drive is not set to off.
Troubleshoot the drive.
browser
Adobe Flash not enabled
Make sure you are using a minimum

of Microsoft Internet Explorer v6.0
SP1 or later, or Netscape Navigator
v6.2 or later.
Make sure that Adobe Flash is
enabled in the browser.

down

administrator.
administrator.
Wrong IP address

Common issues 255
Symptom
Possible cause
Solution

Click Start Control
PanelAdministrative
ToolsServices.
ESL G3 issues
Symptom
Possible cause
Solution
Unable to launch ESL G3
Managing ESL G3 library on a 64bit

MS Windows machine requires JRE
1.6.0 update 23 64 bit as a
prerequisite. Continuing to launch or
manage the ESL G3 library will open
a dialog stating The page you are
viewing uses Java. More
information on Java support
is available from the
Microsoft website.
Possible cause
Solution
MSL issues
Symptom
Command View TL does not add the Bad network connection

MSL library to the Launcher window
or the discovery wizard does not add
the library to the Launcher window.
MSL library is not powered on
Verify that the MSL library and the

Command View TL server are both
connected to the same network.
Power on the library and check the front
panel for issues.
Verify that the IP addresses are on the

same network
The library might be configured for

https
Verify that https is not enabled in the

library network configuration
ESKM enrollment issues

Issue/Symptom
Solution
The clock on the tape library has the wrong date/time.

This affects the dates on the SSL certificates and causes
authentication failure.
Using Command View TL, set the library clock to match

the date and time on the ESKMs. If the ESKM installation
is new, also verify the clocks on the SKM nodes. Clocks
256 Troubleshooting
Issue/Symptom
Solution
should be as close as possible, but variations of up to 5
minutes are acceptable.
The SKM or ESKM key generation policy, or policies, for

this library have an error or are not complete.
Each library partition must have a separate policy, even

if the policy is No Encryption. See Changing library
partitions after initial SKM or ESKM setup (page 169).
The policy contains the serial number of the library or
partition. That serial number must match exactly. Review
the section of the SKM or ESKM User Guide containing
library steps for SKM or ESKM installation, in which key
generation policies are entered.
A certificate issue exists.
The main rules for certificates are:

There is 1 and only 1 Certificate Authority (CA) for the
entire system.
Ensure there is only 1 Local CA, and it is the same CA
on each ESKM node.
The CA must sign all client (library) certificates, and all
server (ESKM) certificates.
All server certificates must have the same name. Each
ESKM node has a unique certificate, but they all must
have the same name.
The server certificate name must be selected in the KMS
server for each ESKM.
For detailed information, review the section of the ESKM
User Guide that presents CA creation and server certificate
creation and installation.
An ESKM configuration is wrong. This can occur if

It is important to follow the installation processes
un-intended changes were made to the ESKM configuration, step-by-step, exactly, and make only those changes that
usually during initial installation.
are specified. Most un-intended configurations prevent
correct operation of the system. If re-tracing the installation
steps does not identify the issue, restore default
configurations on the ESKM and start again.
Firewall issues exist.
This can occur when libraries and/or ESKMs are distributed

across multiple sites. The devices all communicate over a
set of TCP ports, which must be opened between the sites
for correct operation. A complete list of the ports that must
be opened is provided at Installing Command View TL.
Password and username issues exists.
All passwords must be 8 or more characters, and some

mix of letters and numbers. If you have configured the SKM
or ESKM for increased password security, then the rules
are even stricter. Each tape library must have a unique
username. Passwords may be unique, but that is not
enforced. See the SKM or ESKM Installation and
Configuration Guide for detailed information about creating
usernames and passwords, and change the usernames
and passwords to meet the SKM or ESKM requirements.
Common issues 257
NOTE:
1. An HP CVTL Database Service restart should always be followed by starting the Command
View TL service.
2. Restart the LTT service in this order:
a. HP Command View TL Data Verification service
b. HP Command View TL Data Verification Web service
c. HP Command View TL Data Verification Notification service
Then restart the Command View TL service.
3.
When a data verification test is running, you cannot stop HP Command View TL DV Service
under Windows services.msc. If you try to stop this service, you may get a warning from
Windows and the data verification interface appears to hang. If this happens, restart the
Command View TL service, start the service from the data verification interface, and then run
the data verification tests.
258 Troubleshooting
7 Support and other resources
Contacting HP (page 259)
Related information (page 259)
Document conventions and symbols
Contacting HP
Go to www.hp.com/support/cvtl for the latest troubleshooting information, firmware updates,
software versions, and documentation.
Before contacting HP, collect the following information:
Product model names and numbers
Technical support registration number (if applicable)
Product serial numbers
Error messages
Operating system type and revision level
Detailed questions
For worldwide technical support information, see the HP support website:

http://www.hp.com/support
Related information
Related documentation
The following documents and websites provide related information:
ESL E-Series Interface Manager poster
ESL9000 Series Interface Manager Replacement Instructions poster
EML E-Series Interface Manager replacement poster
HP StoreEver Command View TL SMI-S Provider installation instructions
HP Enterprise Systems Library (ESL) G3 Tape Library User Guide
You can find these documents from the Manuals page of the HP Business Support Center website:
http://www.hp.com/support/manuals
In the Storage section, click Storage Software or Tape Storage and Media and then select your
product.
HP websites
For additional information, see the following HP websites:
http://www.hp.com
http://www.hp.com/go/storage
http://www.hp.com/support/manuals
http://www.hp.com/support/downloads
http://www.hp.com/go/tapeassure
Contacting HP 259
HP tape cartridges
To make sure you get the best performance from your HP StoreEver tape library, always use HP
branded tape cartridges. HP develops, tests, and qualifies their hardware and tape cartridges
together to ensure compatibility, and enabling you to keep your data safe. To learn more about
HP tape cartridges or to order online, go to the HP website:
www.hp.com/go/storagemedia
Product warranties
For information about HP StoreEver product warranties, see the warranty information website:
http://www.hp.com/go/storagewarranty
Subscription services
HP recommends that you register your product at the Subscriber's Choice for Business website:
http://www.hp.com/go/e-updates
After registering, you will receive e-mail notification of product enhancements, new driver versions,
firmware updates, and other product resources.
Typographic conventions
Table 39 Document conventions
Convention
Element
Blue text:
Table 39 (page
260)
Cross-reference links and e-mail addresses
Blue, underlined
text: http://
www.hp.com
Website addresses
Bold text
Keys that are pressed

Text entered into a GUI element, such as a box
GUI elements that are clicked or selected, such as menu
and list items, buttons, tabs, and check boxes
Italic text
Text emphasis
Monospace text File and directory names

System output
Code
Commands, their arguments, and argument values
Monospace,
italic text
Code variables
Monospace,
bold text
Emphasized monospace text
WARNING!
CAUTION:
IMPORTANT:
NOTE:
Command variables
Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or death.
Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or data.
Provides clarifying information or specific instructions.
Provides additional information.
260 Support and other resources
TIP:
Provides helpful hints and shortcuts.
Updated regulatory compliance and recycling notices

For regulatory and recycling notices see HP StorageWorks ESL E-Series Tape Library users guide
or HP StorageWorks Enterprise Modular Library E-Series user guide.
Updated regulatory compliance and recycling notices
261
A ALPA matrix
Table 40 ALPA matrix
0:0xEF
16:0xCD
32:0xB2
48:0x98
64:0x72
80:0x55
96:0x3A
112:0x25
1:0xE8
17:0xCC
33:0xB1
49:0x97
65:0x71
81:0x54
97:0x39
113:0x23
2:0xE4
18:0xCB
34:0xAE
50:0x90
66:0x6E
82:0x53
98:0x36
114:0x1F
3:0xE2
19:0xCA
35:0xAD
51:0x8F
67:0x6D
83:0x52
99:0x35
115:0x1E
4:0xE1
20:0xC9
36:0xAC
52:0x88
68:0x6C
84:0x51
100:0x34
116:0x1D
5:0xE0
21:0xC7
37:0xAB
53:0x84
69:0x6B
85:0x4E
101:0x33
117:0x1B
6:0xDC
22:0xC6
38:0xAA
54:0x82
70:0x6A
86:0x4D
102:0x32
118:0x18
7:0xDA
23:0xC5
39:0xA9
55:0x81
71:0x69
87:0x4C
103:0x31
119:0x17
8:0xD9
24:0xC3
40:0xA7
56:0x80
72:0x67
88:0x4B
104:0x2E
120:0x10
9:0xD6
25:0xBC
41:0xA6
57:0x7C
73:0x66
89:0x4A
105:0x2D
121:0x0F
10:0xD5
26:0xBA
42:0xA5
58:0x7A
74:0x65
90:0x49
106:0x2C
122:0x08
11:0xD4
27:0xB9
43:0xA3
59:0x79
75:0x63
91:0x47
107:0x2B
123:0x04
12:0xD3
28:0xB6
44:0x9F
60:0x76
76:0x5C
92:0x46
108:0x2A
124:0x02
13:0xD2
29:0xB5
45:0x9E
61:0x75
77:0x5A
93:0x45
109:0x29
125:0x01
14:0xD1
30:0xB4
46:0x9D
62:0x74
78:0x59
94:0x43
110:0x27
15:0xCE
31:0xB3
47:0x9B
63:0x73
79:0x56
95:0x3C
111:0x26
262 ALPA matrix
B New features in previous versions of Command View TL

Following are the new features that were added in earlier versions of Command View TL.
New features in Command View TL 3.6.00 (page 263)
New features in Command View TL 3.5.00 (page 263)
New features in Command View TL 3.1.00 and Interface Manager firmware version I274
(page 264)
New features in Command View TL 3.0.1 and Interface Manager firmware version I273
(page 264)
New features in Command View TL 3.0 and Interface Manager firmware version I272 (page
264)
New features in Command View TL 2.8 (page 265)
New features in Command View TL 2.6
New features in Command View TL 2.3.0.1 and 2.3.02 (page 266)
Command View TL Support for MSL6480 Library
Support for unfiltered ESL G3 Health Events sent to Command View TL through SNMP
Command View TL support for MSL G3 licenses
TAA license support for MSL6480
Command View TL support on Windows Server 2012
Command View TL Support for Library TapeAssure:(Supported libraries: MSL G3/ ESL G3 /
MSL 6480)
Library TapeAssure overview
Library usage
Moves per library
Empty slots per library
Advanced TapeAssure Dashboard
Predictive analytics for tape drives and cartridges
Alerts reporting
Performance Advisor
Drive utilization analysis
Predictive analytics for tape drive health
New features in Command View TL 3.6.00 263
Predictive analytics for tape drive life
Predictive analytics for tape cartridge health
Predictive analytics for tape cartridge life
Tape cartridge utilization and performance analysis
Ability to save the TapeAssure graphs and tabular data in PDF format
Ability to email the TapeAssure graphs and tabular data in PDF format as an attachment
License enforcement with Instant On capability for ESL G3, MSL, and AutoLoaders
NOTE: The features above are not visible or supported on EML and ESL E libraries. They
must have an Advance Tape Assure Licence on each library to function.
Ability to add and remove multiple libraries
New features in Command View TL 3.1.00 and Interface Manager

firmware version I274
Support for LTO-6 tape drives in EML E-Series and ESL G3 tape libraries.
New features in Interface Manager firmware version I274
Support for LTO-6 tape drives in EML E-Series libraries.
New features in Command View TL 3.0.1 and Interface Manager firmware

version I273
Support for HP ESL G3 KMIP Key Manager Client license.
New features in Interface Manager firmware version I273:
New CLI command show station. The command will show which command view TL
server the Tape Assure data is being sent.
New features in Command View TL 3.0 and Interface Manager firmware

version I272
IMPORTANT: For ESL G3 tape libraries, Command View TL supports Launching, Licensing, and
TapeAssure. All other ESL G3 features are managed directly through the library GUI. For more
information on ESL G3 tape libraries, see HP Enterprise Systems Library (ESL) G3 Tape Library
User Guide available from http://www.hp.com/support/eslg3.
GUI interface redesigned to enhance usability and scalability. Adobe Flash is now used
instead of Java.
Support for Insight Remote Support version 5.7, also known as WBES 6.3.
264 New features in previous versions of Command View TL
Secure Manager host access is now configured using Access Control Groups for increased
flexibility.
Users now log in once to the management station, instead of repeatedly logging in each
time a new library is managed.
New features in Interface Manager firmware version I272:
New command to set SNMP traps from the CLI.
The CLI confirmation prompt can be skipped when mapping or unmapping hosts.
When using the CLI's show media or show mgmt log commands, the pause after
every 20 items listed in now optional.

Added support for ESL G3 Tape Libraries. Launching, Licensing and TapeAssure is fully supported
through Command View TL. Other ESL G3 configuration is managed through the library's own
GUI.

Command View TL 2.7 adds the following capabilities:
Key management security and reliability improvements.
Support for LTO5 firmware versions I3AS (EML) and I3BW (ESL).
Command View TL and TapeAssure reports the status of any LTO5 media partitions (LTFS).
The TapeAssure database can now be backed up and restored.
TapeAssure data exported from Command View TL can be analyzed and graphed in the new
TapeAssure Analysis Template (requires Microsoft Excel).
Reporting of cleaning cartridge use in TapeAssure.
Support for SMI-S CXWS CIMOM version 2.3, providing co-existence with CV-EVA
management stations.
Support for zero-drive frames for ESL E-Series Tape Libraries with a cross-link mechanism (CLM)
In CLM configurations, secondary cabinets (cabinets 25) can contain zero drives.
Support for OCP password access to open load ports on the EML E-Series Tape Library.
Support for Microsoft Internet Explorer v8 and Firefox v3.0 or v3.5.00.
TapeAssure support for MSL G3 and 1/8 G2 LTO drives and standalone LTO drives. (Minimum
hardware and firmware requirements apply.)
Support for Ultrium 3280 tape drives in EML and ESL E-Series tape libraries. 8Gb Fibre
Channel speed also supported.
Detailed media health and usage information is now included in Command View TL's
TapeAssure tab.
Added Windows 2008 and VMWare support for Command View TL (Windows 2000 is no
longer supported with this release).
Email alerts can be sent when a major component's health changes.
TapeAssure Provides comprehensive summaries and detailed information about the

properties, status, performance, utilization, and health of all tape drives and media for every
New features in Command View TL 2.8 265
HP library in the SAN. This data can be exported on demand or at scheduled times to a
comma-separated values (.csv) file for analysis with spreadsheet programs or custom scripts.
The Interface Manager can synchronize its time with Network Time Protocol (NTP) servers.
Tape drives can be rebooted through the GUI and CLI. Only one drive can be rebooted at a
time.
The drive description in the Health summary indicates when the drive needs cleaning.
The inventory page displays media properties, including vendor, format, capacity, write
protected, WORM, and encryption.
Identifies hosts that are mapped to devices that have non-contiguous LUNs for drives behind
interface controllers.
Allows removal of hosts from Secure Manager through the CLI.
The GUI launcher panel indicates the number of browser sessions logged into Command View
TL.
The GUI support tab includes a link to the online Guided Troubleshooting tool.
Includes a wizard to assist in replacing one or many LTO2 or LTO3 tape drives with
corresponding LTO4 tape drives.
Supports IPv6 or a dual-stack (IPv4 and IPv6) combination. EML has received IPv6 Ready Logo
Phase-1 certification and ESL has received IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-2 certification. See http://
www.ipv6ready.org for more information.
Supports SSH/SFTP clients
Status icons are included for each library on the launcher panel.
Host/HBA filtering can be done from Secure Manager dialogs.
Drive health alerts are enhanced.
Secure Manager operations process faster.
Configuration files from up to two previous versions can be restored.
New features in Command View TL 2.3.0.1 and 2.3.02
Support a new Interface Manager card (part number 340252-003). For more information
about the Interface Manager cards, see External features overview (page 14).
Interface Controller reboots are now reported as Informational alerts in the alert log.

Command View TL 2.3 adds support for the encryption of data on LTO4 tape drives. Specifically,
Command View 2.3 does the following:
Supports the HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM) key management appliance which
provides centralized encryption key management for HP LTO4 enterprise tape libraries. SKM
enables you to encrypt the data on LTO4.
Includes a new user name/role for the Security Officer: security.
Adds a logout command so you can log out without closing the Command View TL browser
window.

Command View TL 2.2 adds support for the LTO4 Ultrium 1840 tape drives to the many new
features added in Command View TL 2.0. The LTO4 and/or LTO5 tape drive offers direct fibre
connection to the storage area network (SAN). Command View TL 2.2 includes the following new
features for working with LTO4 and later tape drives:
Monitoring and configuring LTO4 tape drivesYou can configure and monitor the FC
connections between the tape drive and the SAN. See (page 130).
World wide name (WWN) retentionThe WWN is retained when you replace an LTO4 tape
drive with another LTO4 tape drive. See Changing the connection properties of advanced
LTO4 tape drives (page 131).
Installing, upgrading, and replacing LTO4 tape drivesWith LTO4 tape drives, the library
architecture includes an internal network switch. When you install the first LTO4 tape drive in
a library that only contains LTO2 or LTO3 tape drives, you need to add and configure the
internal network switch. When replacing an LTO2 or LTO3 tape drive with an LTO4 tape
drive, you must also reconfigure some library settings to enable to the new tape drive. See
(page 130).
The ability to turn off Telnet (and SSH) and FTP (and SFTP).
SecurityESL E-Series and EML libraries have different security levels for different users. The
users that are defined are administrator, operator, and guest. You are prompted for the user
and password when you select a library to manage. The user name appears in the center of
the bottom of the screen. See Managing libraries (page 24) and Changing library
passwords (page 34).
Host mappingYou can dynamically configure additional servers to access your tape library
without rebooting the interface controllers. See Configuring host HBA access (page 144). You
can create a custom device map even if the Interface Manager Mode is set to automatic.
PartitionsYou can add slots or tape drives to an existing partition without first deleting and
recreating it. You can allocate partitioned (virtual) robots to both FC ports instead of being
grouped on port 0. See Extending a partition (page 155).
Firmware updatesA firmware update wizard walks you step-by-step through the process
and checks that your library meets the minimum requirements. Firmware updates for multiple
components happen simultaneously. See Updating the firmware with the Firmware Update
wizard (page 137).
Support ticketsSome support tickets are non-disruptive to backups and contain more
information than before. You can generate support tickets even if the library is not completely
healthy. Support tickets for multiple components happen simultaneously. Support tickets for
tape drives are generated and cached whenever a tape cartridge is ejected. Large support
tickets are in one file and are therefore easier to e-mail. See Using support tickets (page 172).
World Wide Name (WWN) retention is automatically and always enabled in Command
View TL 2.0.
MonitoringA summary of the component status and recent alerts appears in the upper-right
corner of every Library screen.
The Health Summary screen contains a Recent Alerts column.
On the Health Summary screen, you can right-click a component, and then select Alerts.
Readings from temperature, voltage, and fan speed sensors inside the library cabinet appear
in the GUI. See Viewing the status of components (page 39).
Simultaneous logins from multiple GUIs and CLIsMultiple users can manage a library at the
same time without interrupting critical or long-running operations.
The Close button in upper-right corner returns you to the Launcher window from which you
select libraries to manage. See Navigating Command View TL (page 25).
The Help link in the upper-right corner now opens the online help in a new browser window.
New features in Command View TL 2.0 267
NOTE: If you have a popup blocker, it will prevent the online help browser window from
appearing. You can either set your popup blocker to enable pop-ups on this site or hold the
Ctrl key while selecting the Help link.
Hardware replacement wizardStep-by-step wizard that guides you through the replacement
of one or more interface controllers. Retains all settings including Secure Manager settings,
partitions, and WWNs and updates firmware revisions.
Necessary component reboots happen simultaneously, instead of serially.
Manual synchronization of Secure Manager settingsSave Secure Manager settings to the

interface controllers when it is convenient for you.
Index
A
Access Control Group, 145
adding, 145
editing, 149
removing, 152
Action menu, 59
Actions menu, 25
button, 26
default command, 25
in a 2-panel window, 25
Add License Key dialog box, 32
Add Trap Entry command, 133
adding
capacity, 156
library, 27
manually, 27
license key, 32
partitions, 153
slots, 156
SNMP trap, 132
admin user, 22, 34
advanced features, 144
alert log
displaying in popup box, 40
icons, 40
sorting, 40
viewing, 39
Alert Log command, 39
alerts SNMP, 132
ALPA matrix, 262
Application bar, 59
automatic
Interface Manager mode, 41, 184
Autosense radio button, 132
B
backup application
key manager, 162
browser
navigation buttons, 25
pop-ups, 175, 268
requirements, 16
buttons see icons
C
cabling, 38
Cabling View command, 38
caching, 244
support ticket, 173
capacity
enabling upgrade, 157
upgrading, 156
EML 71e, 157
ESL E-series, 156
cascade port, 181

cautions
browser navigation buttons, 25
cabling interface controllers, 43
hot-pluggable interface controllers, 43
moving media, 136
rebooting components, 136
rebooting interface controllers, 193, 195, 196, 199,
200, 201, 208, 209, 247
rebooting Interface Manager card, 195, 197, 201
rebooting library, 194, 197
removing partitions, 154, 155
updating firmware, 137
using manual mode, 41, 185
certificate authority (CA)
change, 168
key manager, 168
update, 168
certificates
change, 168
key manager, 168
update, 168
Change password command, 34
changing
contact information, 35
data time frame in TapeAssure, 66
date and time, 35
e-mail settings, 28
library partitions and key manager, 169
managed library, 25
management station password, 34
network settings for Interface Manager card, 36
port mode, 41
port speed, 41, 131
SNMP trap, 133
checking connectivity, 37
cleaning tapes
view status in TapeAssure, 107
Clear WWN Mismatches command, 43
Clear WWN Mismatches dialog box, 44
clearing WWN mismatch, 43
Command Line Interface (CLI)
abbreviating commands, 183
accessing, 180
command reference, 190
command sequences, 182
command syntax structure, 182
common functions, 185
described, 180
device status, monitoring, 186
FC interface controllers, configuring, 185
firmware commands, 187
login information, 181
navigating, 184
operational commands, 184
serial interface
269
described, 180
starting, 180
Telnet interface
starting, 181
via the cascade port, 181
via the LAN, 181
Command View ESL, 15, 18
Command View MSL, 24
Command View TL
accessing, 15
described, 21
device numbering conventions, 183
displaying details, 25
GUI, 11, 15
installing, 18
multiple GUI clients, 15
multiple sessions, 11
navigating, 25
new features, 264, 265
prerequisites, 15
service, 21
starting, 21
toolbar buttons, 25
version 1.5, 15, 18
Command View TL command, 21
commands
abbreviating, 183
basic navigation, 184
command level, 182
command sequences, using, 182
firmware, 187
operational, 184
syntax structure, 182
communications settings, 180
community string, 132
adding, 133
component
rebooting, 136
status, 39
configuration
described, 134
restoring, 134
saving, 134
viewing saved, 135
Configuration tab, 24
configuring, 41, 131
see also changing
host HBA access, 144
interface controllers, 185
library
CLI, 185
GUI, 26
Connection Properties command, 41, 44
connections
interface controller, 41
tape drive, 131
within library, 38
connectivity
verifying, 37
270 Index
verifying on key manager, 169

Connectivity Check dialog box, 37
contact information, changing, 35
conventions
document, 260
text symbols, 260
creating
data verification partition, 116
Critical icon, 24, 40
current
library, 25
custom device map
viewing, 152
D
data encryption see key manager
data verification, 115
adding tapes to queue, 125
changing verification type, 125
configuring data verification policy, 125
configuring library, 116
creating data verification partition, 116
deleting data verification partition, 118
deleting test logs, 119
disabling email notification, 127
known good tapes, 121
removing tapes from queue, 125
selecting tapes, 125
setting policy, 125
setting the default type, 119
tapes in partition window, 121
tapes queued for verification window, 122
tapes under verification window, 122
Test Setup Details screen, 119
using email notification, 126
viewing detailed information, 119
viewing drives in partition, 123
viewing results, 127
data verification partition
creating, 116
deleting, 118
viewing drives in, 123
date, changing, 35
default
CLI username and password, 181
management station passwords, 22
menu item, 25
restoring, 141
deleting
a partition, 154
all partitions, 155
data verification partition, 118
library, 27
SNMP trap, 133
support ticket, 179
details, 25
device see component
device numbering
CLI, 183
GUI, 26
Device Selection tab, 22
device status monitoring
CLI, 186
GUI, 38
Direct Attach radio button, 42, 132
Disable Factory Overrides dialog box, 143
discovering library
manually, 27
displaying see viewing
documentation
conventions, 260
HP website, 259
related, 259
downgrading firmware, 139, 142
drive
drive properties environment tab in TapeAssure, 81
drive properties health tab in TapeAssure, 79
drive properties last loaded tape tab in TapeAssure, 84
drive properties performance tab in TapeAssure, 82
drive properties usage tab in TapeAssure, 83
drive assessment
viewing results, 129
Drive Connection Properties command, 131
drive margin report, 172
Drives command, 39
E
e-mail settings, 28
e-mailing support ticket, 177
Edit Contact Information command, 36
Edit Drive Connection Settings command, 131
Edit E-mail Settings command, 28
Edit Interface Manager Mode command, 41
Edit Library Name command, 36
Edit Network Settings command, 33, 36
Edit Port Connection Settings command, 41
Edit System Date/Time command, 36
editing see changing
EML 71e capacity upgrade, 157
EML E-Series library, 24
Connectivity Check, 37
front panel device numbering, 26, 183
SAN relationship, 11
SAN relationship illustrated, 13
separate licenses, 31
troubleshooting, 254
Enable Factory Overrides command, 143
encrypting data, 158
see also key manager
Enterprise Secure Key Manager
ports, 20
Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM), 158
ESKM enrollment troubleshooting, 256
ESL E-Series library, 24
front panel device numbering, 26, 183
SAN relationship, 11
SAN relationship illustrated, 12
ESL G3
change library name, 27
ESL G3 library, 24
ESL286e, 156
ESL322e, 156
ESL9000 Series library, 140
exclamation point icon, 24, 40
extending a partition, 155
F
Fabric (SAN) Attach radio button, 42, 132
factory
defaults, restoring, 141
overrides, 142
password, 139, 142
Factory Overrides dialog box, 143
factory password, 176
factory settings see default
FC host ports numbering, 26
Fibre Channel (FC) interface controllers see interface
controllers
filtering, 59
firewall, 19
firmware
downgrading, 142
enabling downgrades, 139
keeping up-to-date, 139
updating from the Web, 139
updating I1xx to I2xx, 140
updating with CLI, 186
updating with the Firmware Update wizard, 137
using locally stored files, 139
versions that can save and restore, 134
versions that can upgrade, 140
Firmware Update command, 138
front panel, 26, 183
FTP, 186, 187
G
generating support ticket
CLI, 187
GUI, 172
green checkmark icon, 24, 40
guest user, 22, 34
H
hard ALPA, changing, 41, 131
Hardware Replacement command, 43
Health Summary command, 38
271
help
obtaining, 259
Help button, 26
Help command, 268
Home command, 25
Host Access command, 153
host HBA
configuring access, 144
synchronizing, 152
viewing device map, 152
viewing properties, 152
HP
technical support, 259
HyperTerminal, 180
I
icons, 40
green checkmark, 24, 40
Help, 26
Print, 26
red X, 24, 40
Refresh, 26
status, 24
yellow exclamation point, 24, 40
increasing see upgrading
Information icon, 24, 40
initial configuration steps, 26
Insight Remote Support, testing, 23
installing Command View TL, 18
instant-on license, 32
interface controller
configuring with CLI, 185
connection properties, 41
numbering, 26
port mode, 41
port speed, 41
replacing, 42
WWN, 42
Interface Controllers command, 39
Interface Manager card
advanced features, 144
automatic mode, 41, 184
cascade port, 181
changing network settings, 36
illustrated, 14
manual mode, 41, 185
user interfaces, illustrated, 11
verifying network settings, 37
Interface Manager command, 39
Interface Manager mode, 41
changing, 185
described, 184
Interface Manager Mode command, 41
Internet connection, 17
IP address
cascade port, 182
issues
EML E-Series, 254
272 Index
ESKM enrollment, 256

ESL E-Series, 252
ESL G3, 256
ESL9000 Series, 250
MSL, 256
K
Key Management command, 160, 163, 164, 166, 168,
169, 171
key manager
add address, 166
add hostname, 166
certificate authority (CA), 168
certificates, 168
change library partitions, 169
change tier information, 166
configuration, add a tier, 168
configuration, delete a tier, 168
delete address, 166
delete hostname, 166
enroll library, 160
login, 164
select backup application, 162
select ESKM, 160
select SKM, 160
upgrade from SKM to ESKM, 170
verify library connectivity, 169
L
L&TT
downloading firmware files, 192, 193, 194, 195
support ticket
viewing, 172, 177
support tickets
CLI, 202, 203
GUI, 172
viewing, 188
Launch Firmware Update Wizard command, 138
Launch Interface Controller Replacement Wizard
command, 43
Launch Key Management Setup Wizard command, 160,
163, 164, 166, 168, 169, 171
Launch Support Ticket Wizard command, 172
Launcher window, 22
returning to, 25
tabs, 22
LEDs, 14
diagnostic codes
network link activity/speed LEDs, 249
status LEDs, 249
Library
data moves, 56
empty slots, 53
overview, 51
partition, 51, 52
usage, 51, 53
library
adding, 27
adding LTO4 and later tape drives, 130
adding manually, 27
changing, 25
configuration
described, 134
restoring, 134
saving, 134
viewing saved, 135
configuring, 26
current, 25
enroll in backup application, 162
enroll with a key manager, 160
front panel, 26
information, 38
managing, 24
partitioning, 153
password
changing, 34
removing, 27
Library command, 39
library name
ESL G3, 27
MSL6480, 27
Library Name dialog box, 36
library partitions
change, 169
Library Properties dialog box, 39
Library Sensors command, 39
Library Settings command, 35
License Key Summary tab, 22, 31
license keys
adding, 32
described, 144
instant-on, 32
managing, 31
permanent, 32
purchasing, 144
Licensed Capacity command, 158
Licensed Capacity Panel Upgrade, 157
localhost, 21
Log Entry Properties dialog box, 40
login
default CLI, 181, 182
ESKM, 20
key manager, 164
library, 22
SKM, 20
SMTP, 20
LTO drive
view detailed drive information in TapeAssure, 77
LTO tape
properties in TapeAssure, 89
LTO4 and later tape drive, 130
see also tape drive
adding, 130
connection properties, 131
LTO4 tape drive, 11, 158
new in version 2.2, 266
M
MAC address, 36, 43
management station
change libraries using TapeAssure, 44
described, 15
firewall, 19
installing Command View TL, 21
network settings, 33
primary, 15
proxy settings, 33
view libraries using TapeAssure, 44
web server port, 34
Management Station tab, 22
managing
library, 24
license keys, 31
manual mode, 41, 185
marking tapes for drive assessment, 121
Media Management command, 137
mode, 41
mouse
double-click, 25
Move Media dialog box, 137
moving tape cartridges, 136
MSL G3 library, 24
MSL library
Command View MSL, 24
configure for TapeAssure, 45
MSL6480
change library name, 27
MSL6480 library, 24
multiple
sessions, 11
users, 22
N
navigating Command View TL, 25
network settings
changing, 36
verifying, 37
Network Settings dialog box, 33
new features, 264, 265
numbering, 26
O
one-based vs. zero-based numbering, 26, 183
Open dialog box, 135
Operations tab, 24
operator user, 22, 34
optional features, 144
overrides, factory, 142
P
partition see data verification partition
273
adding, 153
deleting, 154
deleting all, 155
extending, 155
Partitioning command, 153, 154, 155
password
default CLI, 181
factory, 139, 142, 176
library, 34
changing, 34
default, 22
permanent license, 32
physical connections, 38
popup blocker, 175, 268
Port Connection Settings dialog box, 42, 132
port mode, 41
port speed, 41, 131
ports, 19, 20, 34
ESKM, 20
Interface Manager card, 14
SKM, 20
SMTP, 20
prerequisites, 15
primary management station, 15
Print button, 26
proxy settings, 33
Q
Question Mark button, 26
R
Reboot command, 136
rebooting
all controllers, 136
components, 136
components that require a reboot, 136
Interface Manager, 136
single component, 136
red X icon, 24, 40
Refresh button, 26
related documentation, 259
removing see deleting
library, 27
replacing an interface controller, 42
Restore Configuration command, 135
Restore Configuration dialog box, 135
Restore Defaults on All Components command, 141
Restore Factory Defaults command, 141
restoring
factory defaults, 141
library configuration, 134
Robotics command, 39
roles see users
S
sample time, choosing, 66
Save Current Configuration command, 134
Save Current Configuration dialog box, 134
274
Index
Save/Restore command, 134, 135

saving
library configuration, 134
support ticket, 177
screens see windows
SCSI bus numbering, 26
Secure Key Manager
new in version 2.3, 266
ports, 20
Secure Key Manager (SKM), 158
Secure Manager, 144
see also host HBA
accessing through the CLI, 188
adding a host, 189
advanced, 145, 188
basic, 145, 188
described, 144, 188
mapping a host, 188
Send to support provider in reference to an open case
radio button, 178
Send to support provider to request support by e-mail radio
button, 178
serial interface, 11, 152
described, 180
starting, 180
Services applet, 21, 251, 254
showing see viewing
slot numbering, 26
slots see capacity
SMTP, 28
SNIA, 10
SNMP
adding trap, 132
alerts, 132
editing trap, 133
removing trap, 133
SNMP Alerts command, 133
sorting, 59
sorting alert log, 40
starting Command View TL, 21
Status tab, 24
Subscriber's Choice, HP, 260
Support tab, 24
support ticket, 173
compatibility between I1xx and I200, 140
deleting, 179
described, 172, 187
e-mail setup, 177
e-mailing, 177
file format, 172
generating
CLI, 187
GUI, 172
saving, 177
viewing, 175
viewing with Library and Tape Tools (L&TT), 188
Support Ticket command, 172, 175, 177, 179
symbols in text, 260
synchronizing host access, 152
T
tape cartridges
content panel in TapeAssure, 87
encrypting, 158
moving, 136
overview in TapeAssure, 89
properties in TapeAssure, 89
view health in TapeAssure, 90
view last used drive in TapeAssure, 94
view performance in TapeAssure, 92
view usage in TapeAssure, 93
view utilization in TapeAssure, 100
tape drive
configure for TapeAssure, 45
drive properties overview tab in TapeAssure, 78
encryption, 158, 266
numbering, 26
port speed, 131
view drive health in TapeAssure, 59
view drive performance in TapeAssure, 63
view drive utilization in TapeAssure, 65
TapeAssure, 44
access, 46
analyze data from CSV files, 112
change data time frame, 66
change management station, 44
choose a sample time, 66
cleaning tapes, 107
configure drives, 45
configure MSL libraries, 45
drive properties environment tab, 81
drive properties health tab, 79
drive properties last loaded tape tab, 84
drive properties overview tab, 78
drive properties performance tab, 82
drive properties usage tab, 83
export library data to CSV, 108
export panels as PDF files, 109
licensing notes, 22
LTO tape properties, 89
LTO tape properties health tab, 90
LTO tape properties last used drive tab, 94
LTO tape properties overview tab, 89
LTO tape properties performance tab, 92
LTO tape properties usage tab, 93
restore database, 114
save database file as, 115
schedule library data export, 112
scheduled backup of database, 114
status of cleaning tapes, 108
tape utilization, 100
tapes content panel, 87
test Insight Remote Support, 23
view dashboard, 46
view detailed drive information, 77
view drive health, 59
view drive health and life, 61
view drive performance, 63

view drive performance and utilization graph, 76
view drive performance and utilization history, 67
view drive utilization, 65
view drives needing attention, 48
view information, 46
view libraries needing attention, 48
view newly added tapes graph, 105
view Performance Advisor graph, 74
view tape health and life, 98
view tape utilization and performance history, 101
view tapes needing attention, 48
tapes in partition, 121
tasks users can perform, 34
TCP/IP, 36
technical support
HP, 259
Telnet interface, 11, 152, 180
starting, 181
via the cascade port, 181
via the LAN, 181
test logs, deleting, 119
Test Setup Details screen, 119
text symbols, 260
tiers
add to key manager configuration, 168
change information, 166
delete from key manager configuration, 168
time, 35
tool tip, 25
toolbar buttons, 25
trap destinations, 132
adding, 133
EML E-Series library, 254
ESKM enrollment, 256
ESL E-Series, 252
ESL G3 library, 256
ESL9000 Series, 250
MSL, 256
truncated text, 25, 40
U
Ultrium 1840 see LTO4 tape drive
updating firmware
CLI, 186
GUI, 137
I1xx to I2xx, 140
upgrading
capacity, 156
key manager, 170
Use cached support ticket whenever possible check box,
244
user interfaces
described, 11
GUI, 11
illustrated, 11
preferred, 15
serial, 11
275
Telnet, 11, 180

users, 22, 34
default CLI, 181
V
verifying see checking
View Saved Configuration command, 135
viewing
alert log, 39
component status, 39
details, 25
device map, 152
health summary, 38
host HBA properties, 152
physical connections, 38
saved library configuration, 135
support ticket, 175
truncated text, 40
W
Warning icon, 24, 40
web server port, 34
websites
HP, 259
HP Subscriber's Choice for Business, 260
license keys, 144
product manuals, 259
purchasing license keys, 144
windows
Launcher, 22
WWN, 41, 131
interface controller, 42
mismatch, 43
Y
yellow exclamation point icon, 24, 40
Z
zero-based vs. one-based numbering, 26, 183
276 Index

HP StoreEver Interface Manager Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP StoreEver Interface Manager Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP StoreEver Interface Manager and

Command View for Tape Libraries

HP Part Number: 344841-026

Copyright 2003, 2013 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.

2 Command View TL GUI.............................................................................15

Empty slots per library...................................................................................................53

Selecting the tapes for verification......................................................................................125

3 Advanced features in the GUI..................................................................144

Adding or deleting addresses or hostnames for SKM or ESKM appliances..........................166

4 Command View TL CLI............................................................................180

5 CLI Command Reference.........................................................................190

save library lttsupportticket.....................................................................................................202

7 Support and other resources....................................................................259

features in Command View TL 3.6.00..............................................................................263

Remote management of FC interface controllers via a Web-based GUI or command line

New features in Command View TL 3.7.00

Configurable policies permit periodic scans based on a user-chosen time interval.

MSL6480 license management via CVTL.

User notifications of degraded tapes.

Reports of data verification and drive assessment results.

Network configuration overview

Figure 1 Network configuration for ESL E-Series tape libraries

1. SDLT, LTO1, LTO2, or LTO3 tape drives

4. Interface Manager card

7. Management station with Command View TL

8. Remote web browser connected to management station

10. Library Cabinet Controller

11. Serial CLI via RS-232 connection

12. Library boundary

13. LTO4 or later tape drives

14. Internal network switch (LTO4 or later libraries only)

Figure 2 Network configuration for EML E-Series tape libraries

3. FC interface controllers (up to four)

4. Interface Manager card

5. LTO2 and LTO3 tape drives

6. Library robotics controller

8. Operator control panel

10. Telnet connection

11. Management station

12. Library boundary

13. LTO4 and later tape drives

14. Internal network switch (LTO4 and LTO5 libraries only)

Network configuration overview

External features overview

1. Cascade in back-end Ethernet port

2. Private Ethernet ports to FC interface controllers

3. Front-end Ethernet port (to LAN)

5. Auxiliary RJ-11 serial connector or USB port (not used)

6. Board status LEDs

8. Green link speed LED

9. Green link activity LED

Figure 4 Interface Manager card faceplate480240-001

1. Cascade in back-end Ethernet port

2. Private Ethernet ports to FC interface controllers

3. Front-end Ethernet port (to LAN)

5. Auxiliary RJ-11 serial connector or USB port (not used)

6. Board status LEDs

8. Green link speed LED

9. Green link activity LED

2 Command View TL GUI

Management of the entire library system

Hardware inventory and identity information

Status information for connected hardware

Error reporting and comprehensive error logs